MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Programmable Logic Controllers

User's Manual

QJ61BT11N
CC-Link Master/Local Module

Art. no. 158161

01082009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
SH (NA)-080394E
Version K
 • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS •
(Read these precautions before using this product.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full
attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. For the safety precautions of
the programmable controller system, please read the user's manual of the CPU module used.
In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

DANGER resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " ! CAUTION" may lead to
serious consequences.
Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety.

Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future
reference.

[DESIGN PRECAUTION]
! DANGER
• See Chapter 5 of this manual for each station's operating status when a communication error
has occurred in the data link.
• When changing data of running programmable controller from a personal computer connected to
an intelligent function module or a peripheral connected to a CPU module, configure an interlock
circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely.
For program modification and operating status change, read relevant manuals carefully and
ensure the safety before operation.
Especially, in the case of a control from an external device to a remote programmable controller,
an immediate action cannot be taken for a problem on the programmable controller due to a
communication failure.
To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program, and determine corrective
actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication
error.

A-1 A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTION]
! DANGER
• Do not write any data into the "system area" of the buffer memory of each intelligent function
module. Also, do not output any "prohibited" signal to an intelligent function module from the
programmable controller CPU.
Writing data into the "system area" or outputting a "prohibited" signal may cause malfunction in
the programmable controller system.
• When setting automatic refresh parameters, specify "Y" for the remote output RY refresh device.
If a value other than "Y" (for example, M or L) is specified, the previous status of the device will
be held when the CPU is stopped.
See Section 4.4.10 for how to stop the data link.
• If a CC-Link dedicated cable is disconnected, the line status may become unreliable, resulting in
a data link communication error at multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the
sequence program to operate the system safely even if a data link communication error occurs
at multiple stations. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or
malfunction.

[DESIGN PRECAUTION]
! CAUTION
• Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or
power cables.
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.9 inches) or more between them.
Failure to do so may malfunction due to noise.

[INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• Use the module in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the CPU
user's manual to use.
Using this module in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause
electric shock, fire, malfunction, and damage to or deterioration of the product.
• To mount the module, while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the
module, fully insert the module fixing projection(s) into the hole(s) in the base unit and press the
module until it snaps into place.
Incorrect mounting may result in malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.
When using the module in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a screw.
• Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque.
Undertightening can cause drop or the screw, short circuit, or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage to the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit or
malfunction.
• Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the
module.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
• Do not directly touch any conductive area or electronic components of the module.
Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

A-2 A-2
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• After wiring, attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation.
Failure to do so may result in malfunction.
• Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any
spade solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.
• Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause short circuit, or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause damage to the screw and/or the module, resulting in drop, short
circuit, or malfunction.
• Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
• A protective film is attached to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips, from entering the
module during wiring.
Do not remove this film during wiring.
Remove it for head dissipation before system operation.
• Use dedicated cables as specified by the manufacturer for the CC-Link system. If a cable other
than the one specified by the manufacturer is used, the performance of the CC-Link system is
not guaranteed. Also, follow the specifications listed in Chapter 3 for the overall cable distance
and the station-to-station cable length. If the wiring does not meet the specifications, accurate
data transmission is not guaranteed.
• Place the cables in the duct or clamp them.
If not, dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the module
or cables or malfunction due to poor contact.
• Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or
power cables. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.
• Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. When disconnecting the cable with connector, hold
and pull the connector on the side that is connected to the module.
When removing the cable connected to the terminal block, loosen the screws of the connector
connected to the terminal block.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable.

A-3 A-3
[STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• Do not disassemble or modify each module.
Doing so could cause failure, malfunction, injury or a fire.
• Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before mounting or removing the
module.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.
• Do not touch any terminal while power is on.
Doing so will cause malfunction.
• Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before cleaning the module or
retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction of the module.
Undertightening the terminal screws can cause drop, short circuit, or malfunction.
Overtightening can damage the screws and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or
malfunction.
• After the first use of the product, do not mount/remove the module to/from the base unit, and the
terminal block to/from the module more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2 compliant) respectively.
Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction.
• Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity
from the human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
! CAUTION
• When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

A-4 A-4
REVISIONS
The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
May, 2003 SH (NA)-080394E-A First edition
May, 2004 SH (NA)-080394E-B Addition
Appendix 6
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.3, Section 2.2.4,
Chapter 4, Section 4.1, Section 4.3.3, Section 4.4.14, Section 7.2.1,
Section 8.2.2, Section 8.3.1, Section 8.3.2, Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2,
Section 13.1, Section 13.3, Appendix 3
Dec., 2004 SH (NA)-080394E-C Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.2.1, Section 3.1,
Section 4.4.1, Section 4.4.2, Section 4.4.3, Section 4.4.14,
Section 5.4.1, Section 7.3, Section 8.4.2, Section 13.3, Appendix 2,
Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6, Appendix 2.7
Jul., 2005 SH (NA)-080394E-D Addition
Section 11.1
Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.2, Section 4.4.3,
Section 4.4.6, Section 6.2, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.4.1,
Section 6.4.2, Section 6.5.1, Section 6.5.2, Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2,
Section 9.1.2, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2.2, Section 10.3.2,
Section 11.1.2, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.2.4, Section 11.2.5,
Section 11.3.2, Section 11.3.3, Section 11.3.4, Section 11.3.5,
Section 11.4.2, Section 11.4.3, Section 11.4.4, Section 11.4.5,
Section 13.3, Appendix 2.7, Appendix 7.1
Dec., 2005 SH (NA)-080394E-E Addition
Section 4.3.7, Appendix 7
Partial correction
Section 1.3, Section 2.2.3, Section 4.1, Section 5.1,
Section 7.8, Section 13.1

A-5 A-5
 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Apr., 2006 SH (NA)-080394E-F Addition
Section 4.3.8, Appendix 2.1
Partial correction
Section 1.3, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.3, Section 2.2.4,
Section 3.1, Section 4.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.4, Section 6.2,
Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.4.1, Section 6.4.3, Section 6.5.1,
Section 6.5.3, Section 6.6.1, Section 7.1, Section 7.5, Section 8.3.2,
Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2, Section 9.1.2, Section 10.1.2,
Section 10.1.3, Section 10.2.2, Section 10.2.3, Section 10.3.2,
Section 10.3.3, Section 11.2.2, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3.2,
Section 11.3.3, Section 11.4.2, Section 11.4.3, Section 13.1,
Section 13.3, Appendix 2, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4,
Appendix 2.5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7
Oct., 2006 SH (NA)-080394E-G Partial correction
Section 2.2.2, Section 4.2.6, Section 4.4.1, Section 4.5.1, Section 5.3.1,
Section 5.3.2, Section 5.3.3, Section 6.2, Section 7.5.1, Section 8.4.1,
Section 8.4.2, Section 10.3.2, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3.2,
Section 11.3.3, Section 11.4.2, Section 11.4.3, Appendix 2.1,
Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1
Nov., 2007 SH (NA)-080394E-H Partial correction
Section 1.3, Section 2.2.1, Section 4.1, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.6,
Section 4.4.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.4, Section 6.4.2,
Section 6.4.4, Section 6.5.2, Section 6.5.4, Section 6.6.2, Section 6.7,
Section 7.3, Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 10.1.1,
Section 10.2.1, Section 10.3.1, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.3.1,
Section 11.4.1, Appendix 1, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3,
Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 2.6, Appendix 2.7, Appendix 2.8
Apr., 2008 SH (NA)-080394E-I Change of a term
"PLC" was changed to "programmable controller".
Addition
Section 7.9, Appendix 2.9
Partial correction
About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations, Section 2.2.1,
Section 4.3.6, Section 4.4.3, Section 5.4.1, Section 7.2.1,
Section 7.4, Section 7.7.2, Section 8.1, Section 8.4.1, Section 8.4.2,
Section 9.1.2, Section 13.2, Section 13.3, Section 13.4, Appendix 2,
Appendix 2.1 to 2.7, Appendix 6, Appendix 7

A-6 A-6
 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Jan., 2009 SH (NA)-080394E-J Partial correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations,
Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.3, Section 2.2.4, Section 3.1,
Section 5.3.1 to 5.3.3, Section 5.4.1, Section 7.1, Section 7.2,
Section 7.2.1, Section 7.3 to 7.6, Section 7.8, Section 7.9, Section 8.2.2,
Section 13.3, Appendix 1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.5,
Appendix 6
Aug., 2009 SH (NA)-080394E-K Addition
Section 13.3.1
Partial correction
Section 2.2.1, 2.2.3, 5.2.3, 8.4.2, 11.4.4, 13.3.2, Appendix 7

Japanese Manual Version SH-080395-K

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-7 A-7
 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC-Q series programmable controller.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions
and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased, so as to ensure correct use.
Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................A- 1
REVISIONS ....................................................................................................................................................A- 5
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................A- 8
Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives................................................................................A-15
Generic Terms and Abbreviations .................................................................................................................A-16
PACKING LIST...............................................................................................................................................A-18

1 OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1-14

1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.2 Compatibility with CC-Link...................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.3 Features .................................................................................................................................................. 1- 2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2-14

2.1 System Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 2- 1

2.2 Applicable System................................................................................................................................... 2- 4
2.2.1 Applicable modules and number of mountable modules................................................................ 2- 4
2.2.2 Notes on the system configuration .................................................................................................. 2- 9
2.2.3 How to confirm the function version and serial No.......................................................................... 2-12
2.2.4 CC-Link version................................................................................................................................ 2-14

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3- 1 to 3- 6

3.1 Performance Specifications .................................................................................................................... 3- 1

3.1.1 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.00).............................................................................. 3- 3
3.1.2 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.10).............................................................................. 3- 5
3.2 CC-Link Dedicated Cable ....................................................................................................................... 3- 6

4 FUNCTIONS 4- 1 to 4-94

4.1 Function List ............................................................................................................................................ 4- 1

4.2 Basic Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.1 Communication with the remote I/O stations .................................................................................. 4- 4
4.2.2 Communication with the remote device stations............................................................................. 4- 6
4.2.3 Communication with the local stations ............................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.4 Communication with the intelligent device stations......................................................................... 4-17
4.2.5 Parameter setting with GX Developer ............................................................................................. 4-23
4.2.6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction .................................................................................. 4-24

A-8 A-8
4.3 Functions for Improving System Reliability ............................................................................................ 4-27
4.3.1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations
(Slave station cut-off function)......................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal
(Automatic return function) .............................................................................................................. 4-28
4.3.3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station programmable controller CPU
(Data link status setting when the master station programmable controller CPU has an error)... 4-29
4.3.4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station
(Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station) ..................................................... 4-30
4.3.5 Clearing data in case of programmable controller CPU STOP
(Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-31
4.3.6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty
(Standby master function) ............................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.7 Data link start by standby master station (First 5 digits of serial No. is 07112 or later)................. 4-47
4.3.8 Guaranteeing the cyclic data for each slave station (block guarantee of cyclic data per station)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-50
4.4 Handy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 4-57
4.4.1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations
(Remote device station initialization procedure registration function) ........................................... 4-57
4.4.2 Performing high-speed processing (Event issuance for the interrupt program) ............................ 4-68
4.4.3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on (Automatic CC-Link startup) .................................. 4-71
4.4.4 Communicating with intelligent device stations (Remote net mode).............................................. 4-73
4.4.5 Speeding up the response from remote I/O stations (Remote I/O net mode) ............................... 4-73
4.4.6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future
(Reserved station function) ............................................................................................................. 4-74
4.4.7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection
(Error invalid station setting function).............................................................................................. 4-75
4.4.8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan (Scan synchronous function)...................... 4-76
4.4.9 Replacing modules without error detection (Temporary error invalid station setting function) ..... 4-80
4.4.10 Checking operations for each local station (Data link stop/restart) .............................................. 4-81
4.4.11 Station number overlap checking function .................................................................................... 4-82
4.4.12 Multiple CPU system support ........................................................................................................ 4-83
4.4.13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I/O stations (Remote I/O station points setting) .... 4-84
4.4.14 Increasing the number of cyclic points (Remote net ver.2 mode) ................................................ 4-86
4.5 Transient Transmission Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-94
4.5.1 Performing transient transmission (Dedicated instructions) ........................................................... 4-94

5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME 5- 1 to 5-29

5.1 Link Scan Time ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.2 Transmission Delay Time ....................................................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.1 Master station remote I/O station ............................................................................................... 5- 4
5.2.2 Master station remote device station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station).................................... 5- 6
5.2.3 Master station remote device station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station).................................... 5- 8
5.2.4 Master station local station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station) ................................................... 5-10
5.2.5 Master station local station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station) ................................................... 5-12
5.2.6 Master station intelligent device station ..................................................................................... 5-14
5.3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions .......................................................................................... 5-15
A-9 A-9
 5.3.1 Master station local station ......................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.2 Local station local station............................................................................................................ 5-18
5.3.3 Master station intelligent device station ..................................................................................... 5-20
5.4 Link Refresh Time ................................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.4.1 Master station/local station .............................................................................................................. 5-22
5.5 Station Status at Error Occurrence ........................................................................................................ 5-28
5.5.1 Status of the master station, standby master station (when the master station is operating)
and remote I/O station at error occurrence..................................................................................... 5-28
5.5.2 Status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station
(when the local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence................ 5-29

6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6- 1 to 6-58

6.1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup ..................................................................... 6- 1

6.1.1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory....................................................... 6- 1
6.1.2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer.................................. 6- 2
6.1.3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction ....................... 6- 2
6.2 Parameter Setting Items ......................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.1 mode).................................... 6- 6
6.3.1 Master station network parameter settings ..................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings...................................................................... 6-12
6.3.3 Local station network parameter settings........................................................................................ 6-14
6.3.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings ........................................................................ 6-17
6.4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.2 mode).................................... 6-19
6.4.1 Master station network parameter settings ..................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings...................................................................... 6-25
6.4.3 Local station network parameter settings........................................................................................ 6-27
6.4.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings ........................................................................ 6-31
6.5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net additional mode) ............................ 6-33
6.5.1 Master station network parameter settings ..................................................................................... 6-33
6.5.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings...................................................................... 6-39
6.5.3 Local station network parameter settings........................................................................................ 6-42
6.5.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings ........................................................................ 6-46
6.6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote I/O net mode)....................................... 6-49
6.6.1 Master station network parameter settings ..................................................................................... 6-49
6.6.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings...................................................................... 6-52
6.7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction .................................................................... 6-54

7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 7- 1 to 7-20

7.1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link ............................................................................................... 7- 1

7.2 Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.1 Handling precautions ....................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2.2 Installation environment ................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.3 Part Names and Settings........................................................................................................................ 7- 4
7.4 Checking the Module Status (Hardware Test)....................................................................................... 7- 7
7.5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC-Link Dedicated Cables............................................................ 7- 9
7.5.1 Wiring check ..................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.6 T-Branch Connection .............................................................................................................................. 7-11
7.6.1 T-Branch system configuration ........................................................................................................ 7-11
A - 10 A - 10
 7.6.2 T-Branch communication specifications list .................................................................................... 7-12
7.7 Switch Settings........................................................................................................................................ 7-13
7.7.1 Station number setting ..................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.7.2 Transmission speed and mode settings.......................................................................................... 7-14
7.8 Checking the Connection Status (Line Test) ......................................................................................... 7-15
7.9 Checking the Transmission Speed (Transmission Speed Test) .......................................................... 7-19

8 PROGRAMMING 8- 1 to 8-43

8.1 Precautions on Programming .................................................................................................................. 8- 1

8.2 I/O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU ................................................................................. 8- 2
8.2.1 I/O signal list ...................................................................................................................................... 8- 2
8.2.2 Details of the I/O signals ................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.3 Buffer Memory.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 6
8.3.1 Buffer memory list ............................................................................................................................. 8- 6
8.3.2 Buffer memory details ....................................................................................................................... 8- 9
8.4 Link Special Relays and Registers (SB/SW) .......................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.1 Link special relays (SB)..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.2 Link special registers (SW) ............................................................................................................... 8-32
8.5 Mode Selection Method ........................................................................................................................... 8-43

9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I/O STATIONS 9- 1 to 9-10

9.1 When Remote I/O Net Mode is Used..................................................................................................... 9- 1

9.1.1 Configuring a system ....................................................................................................................... 9- 1
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................... 9- 2
(2) Setting the remote I/O stations ........................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.1.2 Setting the master station parameters ............................................................................................ 9- 4
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station....................................................................... 9- 4
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ....................................................... 9- 6
9.1.3 Creating a program .......................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.1.4 Performing the data link ................................................................................................................... 9- 9
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display.................................................................................. 9- 9
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program....................................................................... 9-10

10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND

REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10- 1 to 10-57

10.1 When Remote Net Ver. 1 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 10- 1

10.1.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 10- 1
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................. 10- 2
(2) Setting the remote device station ..................................................................................................... 10- 3
10.1.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 10- 4
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 10- 4
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 10- 6
10.1.3 Initial setting of the remote device station ................................................................................... 10- 7
(1) Setting the target station number ..................................................................................................... 10- 7
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration .......................................................................................... 10- 7
(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings ......................................................................... 10-11
10.1.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 10-13
A - 11 A - 11
 10.1.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 10-16
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 10-16
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 10-17
10.2 When Remote Net Ver. 2 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 10-18
10.2.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 10-18
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................. 10-19
(2) Setting the remote device station ..................................................................................................... 10-20
10.2.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 10-22
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 10-22
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 10-24
10.2.3 Initial setting of the remote device station ................................................................................... 10-25
(1) Setting the target station number ..................................................................................................... 10-25
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration .......................................................................................... 10-25
(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings ......................................................................... 10-29
10.2.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 10-32
10.2.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 10-36
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 10-36
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 10-37
10.3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used ..................................................................................... 10-38
10.3.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 10-38
(1) Setting the master station ................................................................................................................. 10-39
(2) Setting the remote device station ..................................................................................................... 10-40
10.3.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 10-42
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 10-42
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 10-44
10.3.3 Initial setting of the remote device station ................................................................................... 10-45
(1) Setting the target station number ..................................................................................................... 10-45
(2) Setting the regist procedure registration .......................................................................................... 10-45
(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings ......................................................................... 10-49
10.3.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 10-52
10.3.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 10-56
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 10-56
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 10-57

11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11- 1 to 11-47

11.1 Secured 32-bit Data ............................................................................................................................ 11- 1

11.2 When Remote Net Ver.1 Mode is Used............................................................................................. 11- 2
11.2.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 11- 2
(1) Setting the master and local stations ............................................................................................... 11- 3
11.2.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 11- 4
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 11- 4
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 11- 6
11.2.3 Setting the local station parameters ............................................................................................ 11- 7
(1) Setting the network parameters of the local station......................................................................... 11- 7
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station ......................................................... 11- 9

A - 12 A - 12
 11.2.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 11-10
(1) Master station program..................................................................................................................... 11-12
(2) Local station program ....................................................................................................................... 11-12
11.2.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 11-14
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 11-14
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 11-15
11.3 When Remote Net Ver. 2 Mode is Used............................................................................................ 11-16
11.3.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 11-16
(1) Setting the master and local stations ............................................................................................... 11-17
11.3.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 11-18
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 11-18
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 11-20
11.3.3 Setting the local station parameters ............................................................................................ 11-21
(1) Setting the network parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) ............. 11-21
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station
(station number 1)............................................................................................................................. 11-23
(3) Setting the network parameters of the ver.2 compatible local station (station number 5) ............. 11-24
(4) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.2 compatible local station
(station number 5)............................................................................................................................. 11-26
11.3.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 11-27
(1) Master station program..................................................................................................................... 11-29
(2) Local station program ....................................................................................................................... 11-29
11.3.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 11-30
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 11-30
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 11-31
11.4 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used ..................................................................................... 11-32
11.4.1 Configuring a system ................................................................................................................... 11-32
(1) Setting the master and local stations ............................................................................................... 11-33
11.4.2 Setting the master station parameters ........................................................................................ 11-34
(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station..................................................................... 11-34
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station ..................................................... 11-36
11.4.3 Setting the local station parameters ............................................................................................ 11-37
(1) Setting the network parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) ............. 11-37
(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station
(station number 1)............................................................................................................................. 11-39
(3) Setting the network parameters of the ver.2 compatible local station (station number 5) ............. 11-40
(4) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.2 compatible local station
(station number 5)............................................................................................................................. 11-42
11.4.4 Creating a program ...................................................................................................................... 11-43
(1) Master station program..................................................................................................................... 11-45
(2) Local station program ....................................................................................................................... 11-45
11.4.5 Performing the data link ............................................................................................................... 11-46
(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display................................................................................ 11-46
(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program..................................................................... 11-47

12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE

STATIONS 12- 1 to 12- 2

A - 13 A - 13
13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13- 1 to 13-31

13.1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence .............................................................................................. 13- 1

13.2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the "ERR." LED of the Master Station is Flashing or
When Normal Data cannot be Sent/Received During Data Link ...................................................... 13- 9
13.3 Error Codes ......................................................................................................................................... 13-11
13.3.1 How to check error codes ............................................................................................................. 13-11
13.3.2 Error code list ................................................................................................................................ 13-16
13.4 CC-Link Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................... 13-26

APPENDIXES App- 1 to App-52

Appendix 1 External Dimensions..............................................................................................................App- 1

Appendix 2 Dedicated Instructions ...........................................................................................................App- 2
Appendix 2.1 Dedicated instruction list, applicable devices, and precautions ....................................App- 2
Appendix 2.2 G(P).RIRD.......................................................................................................................App- 4
Appendix 2.3 G(P).RIWT ......................................................................................................................App- 9
Appendix 2.4 G(P).RIRCV ....................................................................................................................App-14
Appendix 2.5 G(P).RISEND..................................................................................................................App-19
Appendix 2.6 G(P).RIFR .......................................................................................................................App-24
Appendix 2.7 G(P).RITO .......................................................................................................................App-27
Appendix 2.8 G(P).RLPASET ...............................................................................................................App-30
Appendix 2.9 G(P).RDMSG ..................................................................................................................App-41
Appendix 3 Differences Between the New and Previous Models ...........................................................App-46
Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11N..........................................App-47
Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QJ61BT11N ............................................App-47
Appendix 6 CPU-dependent Function Availability ...................................................................................App-48
Appendix 7 Functional upgrade of the QJ61BT11N .................................................................................App-49
Appendix 8 Parameter Setting Checklist..................................................................................................App-50
Appendix 8.1 Parameter setting checklist ............................................................................................App-50
Appendix 8.2 Station information setting checklist...............................................................................App-51

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 4

A - 14 A - 14
Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives

(1) For programmable controller system

To configure a system meeting the requirements of the EMC and Low Voltage Directives when
incorporating the Mitsubishi programmable controller (EMC and Low Voltage Directives compliant)
into other machinery or equipment, refer to Chapter 9 "EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES" of
the QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).
The CE mark, indicating compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives, is printed on the
rating plate of the programmable controller.

(2) For the product

For the compliance of this product with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives, refer to "CC-Link
module" in Chapter 9 "EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES" of the QCPU User's Manual
(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection).

A - 15 A - 15
Generic Terms and Abbreviations

This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the QJ61BT11N CC-Link
System Master/Local Module, unless otherwise specified.

Generic Term/Abbreviation Description

QJ61BT11N Abbreviation for QJ61BT11N CC-Link System Master/Local Module
Transmission method by which to periodically communicate the contents of remote
Cyclic transmission
I/O and remote registers.
Transmission method with which the counterpart is specified and 1:1 communication
Transient transmission
is used at an arbitrary timing.
Station that controls the data link system.
Master station
One master station is required for each system.
Station having a programmable controller CPU and the ability to communicate with
Local station
the master and other local stations.
Remote station that handles bit unit data only. (Performs input and output with
Remote I/O station
external devices.) (AJ65BTB1-16D, AJ65SBTB1-16D)
Remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only. (Performs input and
Remote device station output with external devices, and analog data conversion.)
(AJ65BT-64AD, AJ65BT-64DAV, AJ65BT-64DAI)
Generic term for remote I/O station and remote device station.
Remote station
(Controlled by the master station)
AJ65BT-R2(N) Generic term for AJ65BT-R2, AJ65BT-R2N.
Station that can perform transient transmission, such as the AJ65BT-R2(N) (including
Intelligent device station
local stations).
Backup station for data link control when the link to the master station is disconnected
Standby master station
due to a programmable controller CPU or power supply problem.
Generic term for remote I/O station, remote device station, local station, intelligent
Slave station
device station and standby master station.
Generic term for QJ61BT11N, QJ61BT11, AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11, AJ61QBT11,
Master/local module
and A1SJ61QBT11
Generic term for QJ61BT11N, QJ61BT11, AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11, AJ61QBT11,
Master module
and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as master stations.
Generic term for QJ61BT11N, QJ61BT11, AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11, AJ61QBT11,
Local module
and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as local stations.
Generic term for AJ65BTB1-16D, AJ65SBTB1-16D, AJ65BT-64AD, AJ65BT-64DAV,
Remote module
AJ65BT-64DAI, and A852GOT
Module that can perform transient transmission, such as the AJ65BT-R2(N) (including
Intelligent device module
local module).
Dedicated mode for sending and receiving data to and from the remote I/O station at
Remote I/O net mode
high speed.
Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC-Link (remote I/O station,
remote device station, local station, intelligent device station, and standby master
Remote net mode station)
The remote net mode has three different modes: remote net ver. 1 mode, remote net
ver. 2 mode, and remote net additional mode.
Mode in which complete compatibility with the conventional module (QJ61BT11) is
achieved.
Remote net ver. 1 mode
Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the
QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product.
Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic points and configuring a new
Remote net ver. 2 mode
system.
Select this mode when adding a ver. 2 compatible station to the existing system to
Remote net additional mode
increase the number of cyclic points.

A - 16 A - 16
 Generic Term/Abbreviation Description
Ver. 1 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver. 1 mode.
Ver. 2 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver. 2 mode.
Link special relay (for CC-Link)
SB Bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of
the master station/local station.
Link special register (for CC-Link)
SW 16-bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status
of the master station/local station.
Remote input (for CC-Link)
RX
Information entered in bit units from the slave station to the master station.
Remote output (for CC-Link)
RY
Information output in bit units from the master station to the slave station.
Remote register (Write area for CC-Link)
RWw
Information output in 16-bit units from the master station to the slave station.
Remote register (Read area for CC-Link)
RWr
Information entered in 16-bit units from the slave station to the master station.
Generic term for AOJ2HCPU, A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU,
A2SCPU, A2SHCPU, A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1, A1NCPU,
ACPU
A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A3NCPU, A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A3ACPU, A2UCPU,
A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU and A4UCPU
Generic term for A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1, A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1,
AnUCPU
A3UCPU and A4UCPU
Generic term for Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1, Q2ACPU,
QnACPU
Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU
Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,
Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU,
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
QCPU (Q mode)
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU,
Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU
Basic model QCPU Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU
High Performance model
Generic term for Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU
QCPU
Process CPU Generic term for Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU
Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU
Generic term for Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU,
Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Universal model QCPU
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU
Generic term for Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Built-in Ethernet port QCPU
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU
QCPU (A mode) Generic term for Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A and Q06HCPU-A
C Controller module Generic term for Q06CCPU-V, Q06CCPU-V-B, and Q12DCCPU-V
Generic product name for SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-
GX Developer
GPPW-EV, and SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA. ("n" in the model name is 4 or greater)
Q series modules other than the CPU module, power supply module and I/O module
Intelligent function module
that are mounted on the base unit.
A series and QnA series modules that are mounted on the base unit, excluding the
Special function module
CPU module, power supply module and I/O module.

A - 17 A - 17
PACKING LIST

The components of the QJ61BT11N are listed below.

Item name Quantity

QJ61BT11N 1

Terminal resistor 110 Ω, 1/2 W (brown-brown-brown)

(used when wiring with the CC-Link dedicated cable or Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link 2
dedicated cable)

Terminal resistor 130 Ω, 1/2 W (brown-orange-brown)

2
(used when wiring with the CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable)

A - 18 A - 18
MEMO

A - 19 A - 19
 1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

1 OVERVIEW
1 This manual describes the specifications, parts names and settings of the QJ61BT11N
CC-Link System Master/Local Module (hereinafter referred to as the QJ61BT11N)
which is used with the MELSEC-Q series programmable controller CPUs.
When applying the following program examples to the actual system, make sure to
examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.

1.1 Overview

The CC-Link system is a system that connects distributed modules such as I/O modules,
intelligent function modules, and special function modules using dedicated cables so that
these modules can be controlled by a programmable controller CPU.

(1) By connecting each module separately to equipment such as a conveyor line or a

machine, the number of wires can be reduced in the entire system.

(2) Each module’s on/off information of input/output and numeric data can easily be
sent and received at high-speed.

(3) By connecting multiple programmable controller CPUs, a simple distributed

system can be configured.

(4) Since various devices from Mitsubishi's partner manufacturers can be connected,
the system can provide flexible solutions depending on the user’s requirements.
Master station

Programmable
controller CPU

Remote I/O station

Device manufactured by one of our Remote device station

partner manufacturers

Remote I/O station Local station

Intelligent device station

Programmable
controller CPU

Master station ................The station that controls the data link system.
Remote I/O station ........The remote station that handles bit data only.
Remote device station ....The remote station that handles bit and word data.
Local station ..................The station having a programmable controller CPU and the
ability to communicate with the master and other local
stations.
Intelligent device station ..The station that can perform transient transmission.

1-1 1-1
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

1.2 Compatibility with CC-Link

This product supports the following CC-Link functions and performance. 1

Cyclic transmission
Increase of cyclic transmission data size
Transient transmission
Less restrictions on the station-to-station cable length

1.3 Features

The features of the CC-Link are described below.

(1) Remote I/O station communication

The ON/OFF status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the
remote input RX and remote output RY (see Section 4.2.1).

Programmable
Master station Remote I/O station
controller CPU

Automatic refresh Remote input Link scan

X Input
RX

Automatic refresh Remote output Link scan

Y Output
RY

1-2 1-2
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(2) Remote device station communication

Signals for handshaking with the remote device station (initial request, error
occurred flag, etc.) are communicated using the remote input RX and remote
output RY. The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using
remote registers RWw and RWr (see Section 4.2.2).

Programmable
Master station Remote device station
controller CPU

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

X input input
(RX) (RX)

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

Y output output
(RY) (RY)

Remote Remote
Automatic refresh Link scan
W register register
(RWw) (RWw)

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

W register register
(RWr) (RWr)
Voltmeter

1-3 1-3
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(3) Local station communication

Communication between the master station and the local station uses two types
of transmission methods: cyclic transmission and transient transmission (see
Section 4.2.3).

(a) Cyclic transmission

Data communication between the programmable controller CPUs can be
performed in N:N mode using bit data (remote input RX and remote output
RY) and word data (remote registers RWw and RWr).

Programmable Programmable
Master station Local station
controller CPU controller CPU

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

X input output Y
(RX) (RY)

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

Y output input X
(RY) (RX)

Remote Remote
Automatic refresh Link scan Automatic refresh
W register register W
(RWw) (RWr)

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote Automatic refresh

W register register W
(RWr) (RWw)

(b) Transient transmission

Read (G(P).RIRD) or write (G(P).RIWT) operation of the local station buffer
memory and CPU device can be performed at any timing.

Programmable Programmable
controller CPU Master station Local station controller CPU
Transient transmission
Transient
G(P).RIWT Transient transmission transmission
Transient area
transmission W
Transient transmission
area
G(P).RIRD Buffer
Transient transmission
memory

1-4 1-4
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(4) Intelligent device station communication

Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station
uses two types of transmission methods: cyclic transmission and transient
transmission (see Section 4.2.4).

(a) Cyclic transmission

Signals for handshaking with the intelligent device station (positioning start,
positioning complete, etc.) are communicated using the remote input RX and
remote output RY. Numeric data (positioning start number, present feed
value, etc.) is communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr.
Programmable
Master station Intelligent device station Servo amplifier
controller CPU

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

X input input
RX RX

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

Y output output
RY RY

Remote Remote
Automatic refresh Link scan
W register register
RWw RWw

Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote

W register register
RWr RWr

(b) Transient transmission

Read (G(P).RIRD) or written (G(P).RIWT) operation of the intelligent device
station buffer memory can be performed at any timing.
Programmable
controller CPU Master station Intelligent device station

G(P).RIWT
Transient transmission
Transient
transmission Buffer memory
area

G(P).RIRD
Transient transmission

1-5 1-5
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(5) Parameter setting by GX Developer or the dedicated instruction

There are two parameter setting methods; the parameters can either be set by
GX Developer or by using a dedicated instruction (see Sections 2.2.1, 4.2.5 and
4.2.6).
The following table lists the differences between the two setting methods.
Changing the
Program parameter settings
Number of CPUs
requirement for Automatic while the
that can be
setting refresh programmable
mounted
parameters controller CPU is
running
Parameter setting with
Not required 8 modules
GX Developer
Parameter setting with
Required 64 modules
dedicated instruction

(6) System down prevention (Slave station cut-off function)

Because the system employs the bus connection method, even if a module
system fails due to power off, it will not affect the communication with other
normal modules.
Also, for a module using a 2-piece terminal block, the module can be replaced
during data link. (Replace the module after turning off the module power.
Additionally, check that the settings of the new module are the same as that of
the replaced module.) However, if the cable is disconnected, data link to all
stations are disabled (see Section 4.3.1).
Station number 4 Station number 7

Local Local
Master station station
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 5 (occupies
1 station) 4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)

Data link continues

Station number 4 Station number 7

Faulty
station
Local Local
Master station station
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 5 occupies
1 station) 4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)

(7) Automatic return function

When a station that has been disconnected from the link due to power off
recovers the normal status, it will join the data link automatically (see Section
4.3.2).

1-6 1-6
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(8) Data link status setting when the master station programmable
controller CPU has an error
The data-link status can be set to either "stop" or "continue" when an error
causing the operation to stop such as "SP. UNIT ERROR" occurs in the
programmable controller CPU at the master station. With errors enabling the
operation to continue such as "BATTERY ERROR," the data link will continue
regardless of the setting (see Section 4.3.3).

(9) Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station
The data entered (received) from a data-link faulty station can be cleared or the
previous status immediately before the error can be maintained (see Section
4.3.4).

(10) Standby master function

This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby
master station (backup station for the master station) if a malfunction occurs in
the master station due to a malfunction of the programmable controller CPU or
power supply.
The master station can return to online even during data link control by the
standby master station, and prepares itself for standby master station system
down (see Section 4.3.6).
Standby master station
Data link control by the master station Station number 1
Master station Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Data link
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Standby
control in
progress

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Data link
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station
control in
progress

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

To the next page

1-7 1-7
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

Continued from the previous page

Master station returns to normal and comes back online

Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down
Master station Standby master station
Station number 0 1 Station number 0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Data link
Standby Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station
control in
progress

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Problem occurrence in the standby master station Data link control by the master station
Master station
Station number 1 0 Standby master station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Data link
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station
control in
progress

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online Standby master station
Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Station number 1
Master station Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Data link
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Standby
control in
progress

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

1-8 1-8
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(11) Data link start by standby master station (First 5 digits of serial No.
is 07112 or later)
This function allows data link to start by turning on either of the master or standby
master station.
When the standby master station is turned on, even if no power is applied to the
master station, data link will start.
To enable this function, the same parameters and programs must be set to the
master and standby master stations. (Refer to Section 4.3.7.)
When using the standby station as a backup for the master station, utilize the
standby master function explained in (10).

When standby master station only is started, it controls data link. Standby master station
Station number 1 0
Master station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 : Occupies 1 station Data link control

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station joins the network. It stands by waiting for a standby master station failure.
Master station Standby master station
Station number 0 1 Station number 0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Standby status Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 : Occupies 1 station
Data link control

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

To the next page

1-9 1-9
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

Continued from the previous page

Error occurred in standby master station Master station controls data link.
Master station Standby master station
Station number 1 0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Data link control
Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 : Occupies 1 station

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online

It stands by waiting for a master station failure Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 : Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Data link control Station number 4 : Occupies 1 station
Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Standby status

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

1 - 10 1 - 10
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(12) Remote device station initialization procedure registration function

This function performs the initial setting for the remote device station using the
GX Developer, without creating a sequence program.
Also,if a running remote device station is replaced due to a failure, initial
processing that has been done for all stations conventionally can be performed
for the replaced remote device station by specifying it. (See Section 4.4.1.)

(13) Event issuance for the interrupt program

This function issues an event when the conditions set by the GX Developer are
established in order to make the programmable controller CPU execute the
interrupt program (see Section 4.4.2).

(14) Automatic CC-Link startup

By installing the QJ61BT11N, the CC-Link is started up and all data are refreshed
by simply turning on the power, without creating a sequence program. However,
when the number of connected modules is less than 64, it is necessary to set the
network parameters in order to optimize the link scan time (see Section 4.4.3.).

(15) Selecting a mode according to the system

The CC-Link system has four types of modes according to various systems. (See
sections 4.4.4, 4.4.5 and 4.4.14.)
The overview of the modes is described in the following table.
Mode Connectable Overview
Mode in which complete compatibility with the
conventional module (QJ61BT11) is achieved.
Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need
Remote net ver. 1 mode Remote I/O station not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to
Remote device station replace the conventional module as a maintenance
Intelligent device station product.
Local station Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic
Remote net ver. 2 mode
points and configuring a new system.
Standby master station
Select this mode when adding a ver.2 compatible slave
Remote net additional mode station to the existing system to increase the number of
cyclic points.
Select this mode when the system consists of only the
master station and remote I/O stations.
Remote I/O net mode Remote I/O station
Since cyclic transmission is made at high speed, the link
scan time can be reduced.

1 - 11 1 - 11
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(16) Reserved station function

Stations that are not actually connected (stations to be connected in the future)
will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserved stations.
The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points. (see Section 4.4.6).
Stations that will be connected in the future

(Reserved station)
Station number 4

Local
Master station (Reserved station)
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 8 Station number 10
4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station)

(17) Error invalid station setting function

This setting function prevents the modules that may be powered off in the system
configuration from being treated as “data link fault stations” on the master and
local stations.
This function is set in Network parameters.
However, caution is required since errors are no longer detected (see Section
4.4.7).

Stations to be specified as error invalid stations

Station number 4 Station number 7

Local Local
Master station station
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 5 (occupies
1 station) 4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)

This station does not become a data link faulty station.

Station number 4 Station number 7

Local Local
Master station station
station Station number 1 Station number 3 (occupies Station number 5 (occupies
1 station) 4 stations)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)

1 - 12 1 - 12
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(18) Scan synchronous function

This function synchronizes the link scan to the sequence scan (see Section
4.4.8).

(19) Temporary error invalid station setting function

With this function, the module specified by the GX Developer will not be treated
as a "data link faulty station" by the master or local station while in online. The
module can be replaced without detecting an error in online (see Section 4.4.9).

(20) Data link stop/restart

The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used (see Section
4.4.10).

(21) Station number overlap checking function

This function checks the status of the connected stations to see if the number of
occupied stations is overlapping or if there is more than one station with the
station number setting of 0 in the system (see Section 4.4.11).

(22) Transient transmission

With this method of transmission, the counterpart is specified and 1:1
communication is performed at an arbitrary timing (see Section 4.5).

Master station Local station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

G(P).RIWT Send buffer

Buffer memory
Device memory

Master station Local station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

G(P).RIRD

Buffer memory
Device memory

Send buffer

1 - 13 1 - 13
1 OVERVIEW
MELSEC-Q

(23) Compatibility with conventional module

The QJ61BT11N achieves complete compatibility with the conventional module
(QJ61BT11) in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
Select the remote net ver. 1 mode when the number of cyclic points need not be
increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module
as a maintenance product.

(24) Cyclic points increase

Selection of the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode allows
RX/RY to be increased to up to 8192 points and RWr/RWw to up to 2048 words
per network by making expanded cyclic setting (single, double, quadruple,
octuple).
Also, RX/RY can be increased to up to 224 points and RWr/RWw to up to 32
words per station. (See Section 4.4.14.)

(25) Remote I/O station points setting

Set the number of I/O points of a remote I/O station.
This setting minimizes CPU device assignment and reduces the reserved points
of remote input RX and remote output RX for remote I/O stations. (See Section
4.4.13.)

(26) Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting in case of

programmable controller CPU STOP
Set whether output data to the remote, local, intelligent device and standby
master stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared when the programmable
controller CPU comes to STOP. (See Section 4.3.5.)

(27) Block guarantee of cyclic data per station (First 5 digits of serial
number are 08032 or later)
The cyclic data are guaranteed for each slave station according to the setting of
parameters. (Refer to Section 4.3.8.)

1 - 14 1 - 14
 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The system configuration for the CC-Link is described below.

2.1 System Configuration

(1) Remote net ver. 1 mode

2 A total of 64 remote I/O stations, remote device stations, local stations, standby
master stations, or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master
station.
However, the following conditions must all be satisfied.
a: Number of modules occupying 1 station
b: Number of modules occupying 2 stations
Condition 1 {(1 a) + (2 b) + (3 c) + (4 d)} ≤ 64
c: Number of modules occupying 3 stations
d: Number of modules occupying 4 stations
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
Condition 2 {(16 A) + (54 B) + (88 C)} ≤ 2304
C: Number of local stations, standby master stations
and intelligent device stations ≤ 26

1 module for each system Maximum 26

Master station Master station Master station Local station Local station Local station

QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11

QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11

Terminal resistor (required) CC-Link dedicated cable

Maximum 26 Maximum 42 Maximum 64

Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I/O station

RS-232 Analog/digital Remote I/O module

Interface module converter module AJ65BTB1-16D
AJ65BT-R2(N) AJ65BT-64AD AJ65BTC-32D

CC-Link dedicated cable

Terminal resistor (required)

Total 64

2-1 2-1
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

(2) Remote net ver. 2 mode, remote net additional mode

A total of 64 remote I/O stations, remote device stations, local stations, standby
master stations, or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master
station.
However, the following conditions must all be satisfied.
{(a + a2 + a4 + a8) a: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
+ (b + b2 + b4 + b8) 2 stations that occupy 1 station, and ver.2
Condition 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 1 station
+ (c + c2 + c4 + c8) 3
which are set to “Single”. 2
+ (d + d2 + d4 + d8) 4} ≤ 64 b: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
[{(a 32) + (a2 32) + (a4 64) + (a8 128)} stations that occupy 2 stations, and ver.2
+ {(b 64) + (b2 96) + (b4 192) + (b8 384)} compatible slave stations that occupy 2 stations
Condition 2 which are set to “Single”.
+ {(c 96) + (c2 160) + (c4 320) + (c8 640)}
c: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
+ {(d 128) + (d2 224) + (d4 448) + (d8 896)}] ≤ 8192
stations that occupy 3 stations, and ver.2
compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations
which are set to “Single”.
d: The total number of ver.1 compatible slave
stations that occupy 4 stations, and ver.2
compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations
which are set to “Single”.

a2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that

occupy 1 station which are set to “Double”.
b2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 2 stations which are set to “Double”.
c2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 3 stations which are set to “Double”.
d2: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
[{(a 4) + (a2 8) + (a4 16) + (a8 32)} occupy 4 stations which are set to “Double”.
+ {(b 8) + (b2 16) + (b4 + 32) + (b8 64)}
Condition 3 a4: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
+ {(c 12) + (c2 24) + (c4 48) + (c8 96)} occupy 1 station which are set to “Quadruple”.
+ {(d 16) + (d2 32) + (d4 64) + (d8 128)}] ≤ 2048 b4: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 2 stations which are set to “Quadruple”.
c4: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 3 stations which are set to “Quadruple”.
d4: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 4 stations which are set to “Quadruple”.

a8: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that

occupy 1 station which are set to “Octuple”.
b8: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 2 stations which are set to “Octuple”.
c8: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 3 stations which are set to “Octuple”.
d8: The number of ver.2 compatible stations that
occupy 4 stations which are set to “Octuple”.
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
Condition 4 {(16 A) + (54 B) + (88 C) } ≤ 2304
C: Number of local stations, standby master
stations and intelligent device stations ≤ 26

2-2 2-2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

1 module for each system Maximum 26

Master station Local station Local station Local station

QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11

QJ61BT11N
QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11

Terminal resistor (required) CC-Link dedicated cable

Maximum 26 Maximum 42 Maximum 64

Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I/O station

Analog/digital Remote I/O module

RS-232
converter module AJ65BTB1-16D
Interface module
AJ65VBTCU-68ADVN AJ65BTC-32D
AJ65BT-R2(N)
AJ65VBTCU-68ADIN

CC-Link dedicated cable

Terminal resistor (required)

Total 64

2-3 2-3
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

2.2 Applicable System

Applicable programmable controller CPUs and notes on the system configuration are
described below.

2.2.1 Applicable modules and number of mountable modules

(1) Mountable modules, No. of mountable modules, and mountable

base unit
(a) When mounting to CPU module
The following shows the mountable CPU modules, No. of mountable
modules, and mountable base unit of the QJ61BT11N module.
Power shortage may occur depending on the combination with other
mounted modules or the number of mounted modules.
When mounting modules, pay attention to the power supply capacity.
When the power shortage occurs, review the combination of modules to be
mounted.

1 2
Mountable CPU module No. of mountable modules ( ) Base unit ( )
When setting When setting
CPU model parameters by parameters by Main base Extension
CPU type
name software dedicated unit base unit
package instructions
Q00JCPU
Basic model
Q00CPU Up to 2 Up to 2
QCPU
Q01CPU
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
High Performance 3
Q06HCPU Up to 8( ) Up to 64
model QCPU
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU 3
Process CPU Up to 8( ) Up to 64
Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU
4 5
Programmable Q12PRHCPU Up to 4( )( ) 7 7
Redundant CPU 6 Not mountable ( ) ( )
controller CPU Q25PRHCPU ( )
Q00UJCPU Up to 2 Up to 8
Q00UCPU
Up to 2 Up to 24
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU Up to 4 Up to 36
Q03UDCPU
Universal model Q04UDHCPU
QCPU Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Up to 8 Up to 64
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
: Mountable, : Not mountable

2-4 2-4
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

1 2
Mountable CPU module No. of mountable modules ( ) Base unit ( )
When setting When setting
CPU model parameters by parameters by Main base Extension
CPU type
name software dedicated unit base unit
package instructions
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Programmable Universal model Q10UDEHCPU
Up to 8 Up to 64
controller CPU QCPU Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
Q06CCPU-V
7 7
C Controller module Q06CCPU-V-B Up to 8 Not mountable ( ) ( )
Q12DCCPU-V
: Mountable, : Not mountable
1 Limited to the range of the number of I/O points in the CPU module.
2 Mountable on any I/O slot of the base unit.
3 When the number of mountable modules is set to "8", use a CPU module whose
serial No. (first 5 digits) is "08032" or later.
Operation cannot be guaranteed when an incompatible Programmable Controller
CPU is used.
When a CPU module whose first 5 digits of serial number are "08031" or earlier is
used, the number of mountable modules is four.
4 For use in a redundant system, select the QJ61BT11N whose serial No. (first 5 digits)
is "06052" or later.
When any incompatible QJ61BT11N is used, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
5 The number of QJ61BT11N modules on the either system is counted.
Example: When one QJ61BT11N module is mounted on the system A and the
system B respectively, the number of modules is counted as one.
6 When setting 8 for the number of modules, use CPU modules whose serial No. (first
5 digits) is 09102 or later for both systems.
If an incompatible programmable controller CPU is used, proper operation is not
guaranteed.
For a CPU module whose serial No. (first 5 digits) is 09101 or earlier, up to four
modules can be mounted.
7 Not applicable when parameters are set by dedicated instructions.

REMARK
For using with a C Controller module, refer to the C Controller Module User’s
Manual.

2-5 2-5
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

(b) When mounting to remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H

The following shows the mountable network modules, No. of mountable
modules, and mountable base unit of the QJ61BT11N module.
Power shortage may occur depending on the combination with other
mounted modules or the number of mounted modules.
When mounting modules, pay attention to the power supply capacity.
When the power shortage occurs, review the combination of modules to be
mounted.

1) When performing the parameter setting with GX Developer

2
Mountable base unit ( )
Mountable network No. of mountable
1 Main base unit of Extension base unit of
module modules ( )
remote I/O station remote I/O station
QJ72LP25-25
QJ72LP25G
Up to 4
QJ72LP25GE
QJ72BR15
: Mountable, : Not mountable

1 Limited to the range of the number of I/O points in the CPU module.
2 Mountable on any I/O slot of the mountable base unit.

REMARK
Basic model QCPUs and C Controller modules cannot create a MELSECNET/H
remote I/O network.

2-6 2-6
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

(2) CPU modules for additional functions and availability of network

modules
To use the additional functions of the QJ61BT11N, use CPU modules and
network modules (for MELSECNET/H remote I/O stations) that support them.
Operation cannot be guaranteed when an incompatible programmable controller
CPU or network module is used.
The versions of CPU modules and network modules that support additional
functions are listed in the table below.
QJ61BT11N additional functions
Data link startup
Block guarantee of
function by
cyclic data per
standby master
Applicable module Issue of event for Remote net station
station
interrupt program additional mode (QJ61BT11N with
(QJ61BT11N with
first 5 digits of serial
first 5 digits of serial
No. 08032 or later)
No. 07112 or later)

Q00JCPU
(CPU module (CPU module with
Q00CPU
function version B first 5 digits of serial
Q01CPU
or later) No. 06112 or later)
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
(CPU module with (CPU module with
Q06HCPU
first 5 digits of serial first 5 digits of serial
Q12HCPU
No. 05032 or later) No. 08032 or later)
Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU
Q06PHCPU

Q12PHCPU (CPU module with (CPU module with

Q25PHCPU first 5 digits of serial first 5 digits of serial
No. 07032 or later) No. 08032 or later)
Q00UJCPU
CPU module Q00UCPU
Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q20UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU
Q03UDECPU
Q04UDEHCPU
Q06UDEHCPU
Q10UDEHCPU
Q13UDEHCPU
Q20UDEHCPU
Q26UDEHCPU
: Available, : Not available

2-7 2-7
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N additional functions

Data link startup
Block guarantee of
function by
cyclic data per
standby master
Applicable module Issue of event for Remote net station
station
interrupt program additional mode (QJ61BT11N with
(QJ61BT11N with
first 5 digits of serial
first 5 digits of serial
No. 08032 or later)
No. 07112 or later)
Q06CCPU-V
C Controller
Q06CCPU-V-B
module
Q12DCCPU-V
QJ72LP25-25
Network
QJ72LP25G
module
QJ72BR15
: Available, : Not available

Remarks
For the functional upgrade of the QJ61BT11N, refer to Appendix 7.

(3) Support of the multiple CPU system

When using the QJ61BT11N in a multiple CPU system, refer to the QCPU User's
Manual (Multiple CPU System) first.
(a) Compatible QJ61BT11N
The function version of the first released QJ61BT11N is B, and it supports
multiple CPU systems.
(b) Network parameters
Network parameters must be set to the control CPU of the QJ61BT11N.

(4) Applicable software package

The software package available for the QJ61BT11N is listed below:
Manual name Model name Remarks
Required MELSEC programmable
5
GX Developer SWnD5C-GPPW-E controller programming software.
"n" in the model name is 4 or greater.
5 The versions of GX Developer that support additional functions are listed
below.
Additional functions GX Developer version
Remote net Ver.2 mode
Version 8.03D or later
Remote net additional mode
Number of mountable modules: 8
Version 8.32J or later
Block guarantee of cyclic data per station

(5) Usable slave stations

Any of ver.1 compatible slave stations and ver.2 compatible slave stations is
usable.

2-8 2-8
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

2.2.2 Notes on the system configuration

The system should be designed with the following considerations to prevent mis-input
from the remote I/O modules:

(1) When powering on and off

Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I/O modules. Turn off
the power to the remote I/O modules after stopping the data link.

Data link start Data link stop

During operation
Master module
(data link status) During stop

ON
Remote I/O module
(power status)
OFF

(2) During momentary power failure of the remote I/O modules

When a momentary power failure occurs in the power (24 V DC) being supplied
to the remote I/O modules, mis-input may occur.

(a) Cause for mis-input due to a momentary power failure

The remote I/O module hardware uses the power by internally converting
the module power (24 V DC) to 5 V DC.
When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I/O module, the
following condition occurs:
(Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I/O module to turn off) >
(Response time for input module on off)
Therefore, mis-input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time
indicated by 1) in the figure below.
1)

Remote I/O module

(module power supply and input
external supply power)

Remote I/O module (internal 5 V DC)

Input (Xn)

When the input external power supply turns OFF, the

input (Xn) turns OFF after the response time for the
input module to change from ON to OFF.

2-9 2-9
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

(b) Countermeasure for mis-input

For the power supply module, the stabilized power supply and the input
external supply power of AC input, wire the power cables from the same
power source.

Power supply module

Master module
Programmable
~
controller CPU
Remote I/O module

For DC input

Module power supply Input external-

supply power
Stabilized
24 V DC
power supply
Power supply module

Programmable Master module

~ controller CPU
Remote I/O module

For AC input
Module power supply Input external-
supply power
Stabilized
24 V DC
power supply

REMARK
When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I/O modules,
select the proper type of cable and perform the wiring in consideration of the voltage
decline.
Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I/O
module is within the specified range of the remote I/O module to be used.

Stabilized
~
power supply

Remote module Remote module

2 - 10 2 - 10
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

(3) Access to station No.64

(a) To a local station of No. 64, other station access from GX Developer or
GOT is not allowed. If the station No. is changed to other than 64, other
station access is executable.
(b) The CC-Link board is not allowed to access a local station or intelligent
device station whose station No. is 64. If the station No. is changed to other
than 64, other station access is executable.

(4) Precautions for use on MELSECNET/H remote I/O stations

Pay attention to the following for use on MELSECNET/H remote I/O stations:
• Interrupt setting of network parameters is not available.
• Use of dedicated instructions is not allowed.

(5) Precautions on the retry count setting for use of dedicated

instructions
The following QJ61BT11N supports the retry count setting for use of dedicated
instructions.
• QJ61BT11N whose first 5 digits of serial No. is 08102 or later
Note that some dedicated instructions are not applicable to the retry count
setting. For details, refer to Appendix 2.1 (3).
For the retry count setting for use of dedicated instructions, there are no
restrictions on CPU module models.

2 - 11 2 - 11
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

2.2.3 How to confirm the function version and serial No.

The serial No. and function version of the QJ61BT11N can be confirmed on the rating
plate, on the front of the module, and from the System Monitor window of GX
Developer.

(1) How to check the function version and serial No. of the
QJ61BT11N
(a) Checking the "SERIAL" section of the rating plate, which is located on the
side of the module.

Serial No. (first 5 digits)

MODEL
Function version

SERIAL 100917000000000-B

Relevant regulation standards

MADE IN JAPAN

(b) Checking on the front of the module

The serial No. and function version on the rating plate are also indicated on
the lower front of the module.

Function version
Serial No.

2 - 12 2 - 12
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
Serial No. labelling on the front of the module was started from August in 2008.
Note that, however, some of the modules manufactured around the time of change
may not have the serial No. label attached.

(c) Confirming from the System Monitor window (Product Information List)
In GX Developer, select [Diagnostics] [System monitor…] and click the
Product Inf. List button.

Function version

Serial No. Production number

1) Production number display

Since the QJ61BT11N does not support the production number
display, "-" is displayed.

POINT
The serial No. displayed in the Product Information List of GX Developer may be
different from the one on the rating plate and the front of the module.
• The serial No. on the raging plate and the front of the module indicates the
management information on the product.
• The serial No. in the Product Information List of GX Developer indicates the
functional information on the product, which is updated when a new function is
added.

2 - 13 2 - 13
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSEC-Q

2.2.4 CC-Link version

There are two different CC-Link versions: Ver.1 and Ver.2.

(1) Definitions of Ver.1.00 and Ver.1.10

Ver.1.10 is a version in which the station-to-station cable length was improved to
20 cm or more.
In contrast, the older version is defined as Ver.1.00.
See Section 3.1.2 for the maximum overall cable length of Ver.1.10.
The station-to-station cable length must be 20 cm or more when the following
conditions are met:
1) All the modules that compose the CC-Link system are Ver.1.10 modules.
2) All the data link cables are CC-Link Ver.1.10-compatible cables.

(2) Definition of Ver.2

Modules supporting the extended cyclic transmission are defined as the Ver.2-
compatible module.
Note that the specifications of the cable remain the same as Ver.1.10.

POINT
The specifications for Version 1.00 must be applied to the maximum cable overall
length and station-to-station cable length if a system contains all of Ver.1.00,
Ver.1.10, and Ver.2-compatible modules.
See Section 3.1.1 for the maximum overall cable length and station-to-station cable
length of Ver.1.00.

(3) Checking the version

For Ver.1.10-compatible modules, the "CC-Link" logo is printed on the rating
plate.
For Ver.2-compatible modules, the "V2" logo is printed on the rating plate.

MODEL

SERIAL 100917000000000-B

Relevant regulation standards

MADE IN JAPAN

2 - 14 2 - 14
 3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3 SPECIFICATIONS

This section describes the specifications of the QJ61BT11N.

For the general specifications of the QJ61BT11N, refer to the user's manual for the
CPU module to be used.

3.1 Performance Specifications

Table 3.1 lists the performance specifications of the OJ61BT11N.

3 Table 3.1 Performance specifications

Item Specification
Transmission speed Can select from 156 kbps/ 625 kbps/ 2.5 Mbps/ 5 Mbps/ 10 Mbps
Maximum overall cable distance
Varies according to the transmission speed (See Section 3.1.1, 3.1.2)
(Maximum transmission distance)
Maximum number of connected stations
64 (See Section 2.1)
(master station)
Number of occupied stations 1 to 4 stations
1
(local station) The number of stations can be switched using the GX Developer parameter setting.
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 2048 points
Remote register (RWw) : 256 points (master station remote device station/local station/ intelligent
Maximum number of link points per system
1 device station/standby master station)
Remote register (RWr) : 256 points (remote device station/local station/ intelligent device station/standby
master station master station)
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 32 points (local station is 30 points)
Remote station/local station/intelligent device Remote register (RWw) : 4 points (master station remote device station/local station/ intelligent
station/standby master station device station/standby master station)
1
Number of link points per station Remote register (RWr) : 4 points (remote device station/local station/ intelligent device station/standby
master station master station)
Communication method Broadcast polling method
Synchronous method Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI method
Transmission path Bus (RS-485)
Transmission format Conforms to HDLC
16 12 5
Error control system CRC (X + X + X + 1)
CC-Link dedicated cable/ CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable/
Connection cable
Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable 2
Automatic return function
RAS function Slave station cut-off function
Error detection by the link special relay/register
Number of I/O occupied points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 32 points)
5 V DC internal current consumption 0.46 A
Weight 0.12 kg

1 Indicates the number of link points for remote net ver.1 mode. For number of link points for remote net
ver.2 mode/remote net additional mode. Refer to the table 3.2.
2 Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables, CC-Link dedicated cables (Ver.1.00) and CC-Link
dedicated high-performance cables cannot be used together. If used together , correct data transmission
will not be guaranteed. Also attach the terminating resister which matches the kind of the cable. (Refer to
section 7.5)

3-1 3-1
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Table 3.2 Number of link points for remote net ver.2 mode/remote net additional mode
Item Specifications
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 8192 points
Remote register (RWw) : 2048 points (master station remote device
station/local station/intelligent device
Maximum No. of link points per system station/standby master station)
Remote register (RWr) : 2048 points (remote device station/local
station/intelligent device station/standby
master station master station)
Expanded cyclic setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple
32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 3
No. of link (30 points (30 points (62 points (126 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY)
points per for local for local for local for local
station station) station) station) station)
Remote register (RWw) 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
Remote register (RWr) 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
Remote I/O
32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
(RX, RY)
Occupies Remote
4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
1 station register (RWw)
Remote
4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
register (RWr)
Remote I/O
64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points
(RX, RY)
Occupies Remote
8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
Number 2 stations register (RWw)
of link Remote
8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
points per register (RWr)
number of Remote I/O
96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points
occupied (RX, RY)
stations Occupies Remote
12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points
3 stations register (RWw)
Remote
12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points
register (RWr)
Remote I/O
128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points
(RX, RY)
Occupies Remote
16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
4 stations register (RWw)
Remote
16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
register (RWr)

3-2 3-2
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3.1.1 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.00)

The relationship between the transmission speed and the maximum overall cable
distance is described below:

(1) For a system consisting of only remote I/O stations and remote
device stations

Remote I/O station Master station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
or remote or remote or remote or remote
device station device station device station device station

2 2 1 1

Maximum overall cable distance

1 Cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations.
2 Cable length between the master station and the adjacent stations.

CC-Link dedicated cable (uses terminal resistor 110 Ω)

Station-to-station cable length Maximum overall cable
Transmission speed 1 2 distance

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

625 kbps 30 cm (11.81 in.) or more 600 m (1968.6 ft.)
2.5 Mbps 200 m (656.2 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
110 m (360.9 ft.)
5 Mbps 59 cm (23.23 in.)
60 cm (23.62 in.) or more 1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 150 m (492.15 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
50 m (164.1 ft.)
59 cm (23.23 in.)
10 Mbps 60 cm (23.62 in.) to
80 m (262.5 ft.)
99 cm (38.98 in.)
1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)

CC-Link dedicated high performance cable (uses terminal resistor 130 Ω)

Station-to-station cable length Maximum overall cable
Transmission speed 1 2 distance

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

625 kbps 900 m (2952.9 ft.)
2.5 Mbps 400 m (1312.4 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) or more
5 Mbps 160 m (524.96 ft.)
Number of connected
100 m (328.1 ft.)
stations: 1 to 32
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
Number of connected 1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 80 m (262.5 ft.)
39 cm (15.35 in.)
stations: 33 to 48
40 cm (15.75 in.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)
10 Mbps
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
20 m (65.52 ft.)
39 cm (15.35 in.)
Number of connected
40 cm (15.75 in.) to
stations: 49 to 64 30 m (98.43 ft.)
69 cm (27.17 in.)
70 cm (27.56 in.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)

The cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations is within
this range and if even one location is wired, the maximum overall cable distance will
be as indicated above.

3-3 3-3
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(Example) When the transmission speed is 10 Mbps, and 43 remote I/O stations
and remote device stations are connected using the CC-Link dedicated
high performance cable, because the cable connecting the second and
third stations is "35 cm (13.78 in.)", the maximum overall cable distance
will be "80 cm (31.5 in.)".
First Second Third 4th 43th

Master station Remote device Remote device

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
station station

1 m (3.28 ft.) 50 cm (19.69 in.) 35 cm (13.78 in.) 50 cm (19.69 in.)

(2) For a system consisting of remote I/O stations, remote device

stations, local stations and intelligent device stations
Local station Local station
Master station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station or intelligent or intelligent
or remote or remote device station device station
device station device station

2 1 2 2

Maximum overall cable distance

1 Cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations
2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station
and the adjacent stations

CC-Link dedicated cable (uses terminal resistor 110 Ω)

Station-to-station cable length Maximum overall cable
Transmission speed 1 2 distance

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

625 kbps 30 cm (11.81 in.) or more 600 m (1968.6 ft.)
2.5 Mbps 200 m (656.2 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
5 Mbps 110 m (360.9 ft.)
59 cm (23.23 in.)
60 cm (23.62 in.) or more 2 m (6.56 ft.) or more 150 m (492.15 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
50 m (164.1 ft.)
59 cm (23.23 in.)
10 Mbps
60 cm (23.62 in.) to
80 m (262.5 ft.)
99 cm (38.98 in.)
1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 100 m (328.1 ft.)

CC-Link dedicated high performance cable (uses terminal resistor 130 Ω)

Station-to-station cable length Maximum overall cable
Transmission speed 1 2 distance

156 kbps 1200 m (3937.2 ft.)

625 kbps 30 cm (11.81 in.) or more 600 m (1968.6 ft.)
2.5 Mbps 200 m (656.2 ft.)
30 cm (11.81 in.) to
110 m (360.9 ft.)
5 Mbps 59 cm (23.23 in.) 2 m (6.56 ft.) or more
60 cm (23.62 in.) or more 150 m (492.15 ft.)
70 cm (27.56 in.) to
50 m (164.1 ft.)
10 Mbps 99 cm (38.98 in.)
1 m (3.28 ft.) or more 80 m (262.5 ft.)
The cable length between remote I/O stations or remote device stations is within
this range and if even one location is wired, the maximum overall cable distance will
be as indicated above.

3-4 3-4
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3.1.2 Maximum overall cable distance (for Ver. 1.10)

The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when
configuring the entire system with Version 1.10 modules and cable is shown below.

Local station or Local station or

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
Master station intelligent device intelligent device
or remote or remote
station station
device station device station

Station to station
cable length
Maximum overall cable distance

Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (terminal resistor of 110Ω used)
Transmission speed Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance
156kbps 1200m
625kbps 900m
2.5Mbps 20cm or longer 400m
5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m

3-5 3-5
3 SPECIFICATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3.2 CC-Link Dedicated Cable

Use the CC-Link dedicated cables for the CC-Link system. If a cable other than the
CC-Link dedicated cable is used, the performance of the CC-Link system cannot be
guaranteed.
For the specifications of the CC-Link dedicated cables or any other inquiries, visit the
following website:
CC-Link Partner Association: http://www.cc-link.org/

REMARK
For details, refer to the CC-Link cable wiring manual issued by CC-Link Partner
Association.

3-6 3-6
 4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4 FUNCTIONS
This chapter explains the functions of QJ61BT11N, dividing them into four sections:
"Basic Functions", "Functions for Improving System Reliability", "Handy Functions" and
"Transient Transmission Functions".
Some functions are unavailable depending on the mounted CPU.
Refer to Appendix 6 for details.
4.1 Function List
(1) Table 4.1 lists the "basic functions".

Table 4.1 List of the "basic functions"

Item Description Reference section
Communication with remote I/O
Performs on/off data communication with remote I/O station. Section 4.2.1
station
4 Communication with remote device Performs on/off data and numeric data communication with
Section 4.2.2
station remote device station.
Performs on/off data and numeric data communication with local
Communication with local station Section 4.2.3
station.
Communication with intelligent Performs communication with intelligent device station, cyclic
Section 4.2.4
device station transmission, and transient transmission.
Parameter setting with GX Sets the network parameter, automatic refresh parameter with
Section 4.2.5
Developer the GX Developer.
Parameter setting with dedicated
Sets the network parameter with the G(P).RLPASET instruction. Section 4.2.6
instruction

4-1 4-1
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Table 4.2 lists the "functions for improving system reliability".

Table 4.2 List of the "functions for improving system reliability"

Item Description Reference section
Disconnects the module that cannot continue the data link
Slave station cut-off function because of power off, and continues the data link with only the Section 4.3.1
normal modules.
When a module, which has been disconnected from the data link
Automatic return function because of power off, returns to the normal status, it Section 4.3.2
automatically joins the data link.
Data link status setting when the
Sets the data link status when an error that stops the operation
master station programmable Section 4.3.3
occurs at the master station programmable controller CPU.
controller CPU has an error
Setting the status of input data from Sets the status (clear/hold) of the input (receive) data from a
Section 4.3.4
a data link faulty station station that became data link faulty because of power off.
Slave station refresh/compulsory 4
Sets whether output data to the slave stations will be refreshed
clear setting in case of
or compulsorily cleared when the programmable controller CPU Section 4.3.5
programmable controller CPU
comes to STOP.
STOP
Continues the data link by switching to the standby master
Standby master function Section 4.3.6
station when a problem occurs in the master station.
Data link start by standby master Starts data link when either of the master or standby master
Section 4.3.7
station station is turned on.
Block guarantee of cyclic data per
Guarantees the cyclic data for each slave station. Section 4.3.8
station

4-2 4-2
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Table 4.3 lists the "handy functions".

Table 4.3 List of the "handy functions"

Item Description Reference section
Remote device station initialization Performs initial setting of remote device station using GX
Section 4.4.1
procedure registration function Developer.
Issues events when the conditions set by GX Developer are
Event issuance for the interrupt
established and causes the programmable controller CPU to run Section 4.4.2
program
an interrupt program.
Automatic CC-Link startup Starts the CC-Link automatically by turning the power on. Section 4.4.3
Performs communication with all stations (remote station, local
Remote net mode Section 4.4.4
station, intelligent device station, and standby master station).
Shortens the link scan time for a system consisting only of the
Remote I/O net mode Section 4.4.5
master station and remote I/O stations.
By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as
reserved stations, they will not be treated as data link faulty
Reserved station function stations. If any of the connected modules is specified, it cannot Section 4.4.6
perform data link.
The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points.
Prevents modules that may be powered off in the system
Error invalid station setting function configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4.4.7
setting the network parameters.
Performs link scan by synchronizing with
Synchronous mode
sequence scan.
Scan synchronous function Section 4.4.8
Perform link scan without synchronizing
Asynchronous mode
with sequence scan.
Temporary error invalid station Prevents modules specified by GX Developer from being treated
Section 4.4.9
setting function as data link faulty stations temporarily during online operation.
Data link stop/restart Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed. Section 4.4.10
Checks for the overlapping of number of occupied stations and
Station number overlap checking
whether or not more than one module having a station number Section 4.4.11
function
setting of 0 exists in the system.
Allows monitoring and reading/writing programs from/to any
Multiple CPU system support CPU in a multiple CPU system mounted with the QJ61BT11N Section 4.4.12
via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or other station CPUs.
Allows the I/O points of the remote I/O stations to be selected
Remote I/O station points setting from among 8 points, 16 points and 32 points, reducing the Section 4.4.13
number of reserved points.
Allows the number of cyclic points per module to be increased
from 128 points for RX/RY and 16 points for RWr/RWw in the
Cyclic points increase Section 4.4.14
ver. 1 mode to up to 896 points for RX/RY and 128 points for
RWr/RWw in the ver. 2 mode.

(4) Table 4.4 lists the "functions for transient transmission".

Table 4.4 List of the "functions for transient transmission"

Item Description Reference section
Transient transmission Specifies a counterpart and communicates at an arbitrary timing. Section 4.5.1

4-3 4-3
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.2 Basic Functions

This section explains the basic functions of the QJ61BT11N.

4.2.1 Communication with the remote I/O stations

Two types of communication modes are available for the CC-Link system: remote net
mode and remote I/O net mode.

(1) Remote net mode

In this mode, it is possible to communicate with all stations (remote I/O station,
remote device station, local station, intelligent device station, and standby master
station). Thus, various systems can be configured according to their applications.

(2) Remote I/O net mode

In this mode, a high-speed cyclic transmission is performed for a system
consisting only of the master station and remote I/O stations. Because of this, the
link scan time can be shortened when compared to the remote net mode.

The following provides an overview of the communication between the master

station and a remote I/O station using the remote I/O net mode. In the
communication with the remote I/O station, the on/off data of the switches and
indicator lamps are communicated through remote input RX and remote output
RY.
Programmable
controller CPU Master station Remote I/O station

Network 1) Network
parameters parameters

Automatic
refresh
parameters
Buffer memory

3) 2)
Remote input
X Automatic refresh Link scan Input
RX

4) 5)
Remote output
Y Automatic refresh Link scan Output
RY

[Data link startup]

1) When the programmable controller system is powered on, the network
parameters in the programmable controller CPU are transferred to the
master station, and the CC-Link system automatically starts up.

4-4 4-4
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote input]
2) The input status of a remote I/O station is stored automatically (for each
link scan) in the master station's "remote input RX" buffer memory.
3) The input status stored in the "remote input RX" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 2:
controller CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
RX0F to RX00 2) X0F to X00
3) RX1F to RX10
X 2)
RX2F to RX20 X0F to X00
RX3F to RX30 X1F to X10
RX4F to RX40

to

RX7FF to RX7F0 16-point module 32-point module

[Remote output]
4) The on/off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory.
5) The output status stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory is
output automatically (for each link scan) to remote I/O stations.
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
Programmable (Station number 3: (Station number 4:
controller CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
RY0F to RY00
RY1F to RY10
RY2F to RY20
RY3F to RY30
RY4F to RY40 5) Y0F to Y00
4) RY5F to RY50
Y 5)
RY6F to RY60 Y0F to Y00
RY7F to RY70 Y1F to Y10
RY8F to RY80

to

RY7FF to RY7F0 16-point module 32-point module

• When setting the automatic refresh parameters, it is recommended to specify "Y" as

DANGER the remote output RY refresh device. If any device other than "Y" (e.g. M or L) is
specified, parameter setting must be made to compulsorily clear the device status at
a CPU STOP. If parameter setting is not made, the device status before a STOP is
retained as is. For slave station compulsory clear in case of CPU STOP, see
Section 4.3.5. For the method to stop a data link, see Section 4.4.10.

4-5 4-5
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.2.2 Communication with the remote device stations

This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and the
remote device stations.
In the communication with remote device stations, the signals for handshaking with
remote device stations (initial data request flag, error reset request flag, etc.) are
communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX. Numeric data (averaging
processing specification, digital output value, etc.) is communicated using remote
register RWw and remote register RWr.

Programmable
controller CPU Master station Remote device station

Network 1) Network
parameters parameters

Automatic
refresh
parameters Buffer memory

Remote input
3) 2) RX
Remote input Handshaking signals
X Automatic refresh Link scan
RX such as remote READY
and initial data
processing request flag

Remote output
4) 5) RY
Remote output Handshaking signals such
Y Automatic refresh Link scan as error reset request flag
RY
and initial data processing
complete flag

Remote register
6) 7) RWw
Remote register Numeric data for
W Automatic refresh Link scan
RWw averaging processing
setting, A-D conversion
enable/disable setting,
etc.

Remote register
9) 8) RWr
Automatic refresh Remote register
W Link scan Numeric data such as
RWr digital output values,
detected temperature
value, etc.

4-6 4-6
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Data link startup]

1) When the programmable controller system is powered on, the network
parameters in the programmable controller CPU are transferred to the
master station, and the CC-Link system automatically starts up.

[Remote input]
2) The remote input RX of a remote device station is stored automatically
(for each link scan) in the master station's "remote input RX" buffer
memory.
3) The input status stored in the "remote input RX" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.
Remote device station Remote device station
Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 3:
controller CPU Master station occupies 2 stations) occupies 2 stations)
Remote input RX
Handshaking signals
such as remote READY
and initial data
processing request flag
Remote input RX
Remote input RX
RX0F to RX00 RX0F to RX00
Handshaking signals
RX1F to RX10 2) RX1F to RX10 such as remote READY
RX2F to RX20 and initial data
processing request flag
3) RX3F to RX30
X
RX4F to RX40 RX0F to RX00
RX5F to RX50 2) RX1F to RX10
RX6F to RX60
RX7F to RX70
RX8F to RX80

to

RX7FF to RX7F0

[Remote input RX when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-64AD Master module
Device No. Signal name
RX00 CH1 A-D conversion completed flag
RX01 CH2 A-D conversion completed flag
RX02 CH3 A-D conversion completed flag
RX03 CH4 A-D conversion completed flag
RX04
to Not used
RX17
RX18 Initial data processing request flag
RX19 Initial data setting complete flag
RX1A Error status flag
RX1B Remote READY
RX1C
to Not used
RX1F

4-7 4-7
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote output]
4) The on/off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory.
5) Remote output RY is automatically set to on/off (for each link scan)
according to the output status stored in the "remote output RY" buffer
memory.

Remote device station Remote device station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 3:
controller CPU Master station occupies 2 stations) occupies 2 stations)
Remote output RY
Handshaking signals such
as error reset request flag
and initial data processing
complete flag
Remote output RY Remote output RY
RY0F to RY00 RY0F to RY00 Handshaking signals such
RY1F to RY10 5) RY1F to RY10 as error reset request flag
and initial data processing
RY2F to RY20 complete flag
4) RY3F to RY30
Y
RY4F to RY40 RY0F to RY00
RY5F to RY50 5) RY1F to RY10
RY6F to RY60
RY7F to RY70
RY8F to RY80

to

RY7FF to RY7F0

[Remote output RY when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: Master module AJ65BT-64AD
Device No. Signal name
RY00 Selection of offset/gain values
RY01 Selection of voltage/current
RY02
to Not used
RY17
RY18 Initial data setting complete flag
RY19 Initial data setting request flag
RY1A Error reset request flag
RY1B
to Not used
RY1F

4-8 4-8
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Writing to the remote register RWw]

6) The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory.
7) The data stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is
automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device
station.

Remote device station Remote device station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 3:
controller CPU Master station occupies 2 stations) occupies 2 stations)
Remote register RWw
Numeric data for
averaging processing
setting, A-D conversion
enable/disable setting,
Remote register RWw etc.
RWw0 RWw0
RWw1 RWw1
RWw2 RWw2
RWw3 7) RWw3 Remote register RWw
RWw4 RWw4 Numeric data for
averaging processing
RWw5 RWw5 setting, A-D conversion
RWw6 RWw6 enable/disable setting,
etc.
6) RWw7 RWw7
W
RWw8 RWw0
RWw9 RWw1
RWwA RWw2
RWwB 7) RWw3
RWwC RWw4
RWwD RWw5
RWwE RWw6
RWwF RWw7
RWw10

to

RWwFF

[Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: master module AJ65BT-64AD
Address Description
RWw0 Averaging process setting
RWw1 CH1 average time, number of times
RWw2 CH2 average time, number of times
RWw3 CH3 average time, number of times
RWw4 CH4 average time, number of times
RWw5 Data format
RWw6 A-D conversion enable/disable setting
RWw7 Not used
The data content to be written to the remote registers RWw0 to RWwn is predefined for each remote device
station.

4-9 4-9
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Reading from the remote register (RWr)]

8) The remote register RWr data of a remote device station is
automatically stored in the "remote register Rwr" buffer memory of the
master station.
9) The remote register RWr data of a remote device station stored in the
"remote register RWr" buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set
with the automatic refresh parameters.

Remote device station Remote device station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 3:
controller CPU Master station occupies 2 stations) occupies 2 stations)
Remote register RWr
Numeric data such as
digital output values,
detected temperature
Remote register RWr value, etc.
RWr0 RWr0
RWr1 RWr1
RWr2 RWr2
RWr3 8) RWr3
RWr4 RWr4 Remote register RWr
RWr5 RWr5 Numeric data such as
digital output values,
RWr6 RWr6
detected temperature
9) RWr7 RWr7 value, etc.
W RWr8 RWr0
RWr9 RWr1
RWrA RWr2
RWrB 8) RWr3
RWrC RWr4
RWrD RWr5
RWrE RWr6
RWrF RWr7
RWr10

to

RWrFF

[Remote register RWr when the AJ65BT-64AD is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-64AD Master module
Address Description
RWw0 CH1 digital output value
RWw1 CH2 digital output value
RWw2 CH3 digital output value
RWw3 CH4 digital output value
RWw4 Error code
RWw5
RWw6 Not used
RWw7

4 - 10 4 - 10
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.2.3 Communication with the local stations

This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and local
stations.

(1) Communication between the master and local stations by cyclic

transmission
Data communication between programmable controller CPUs can be performed
in N:N mode using remote input RX and remote output RY (bit data used in local
station systems) as well as remote register RWw and remote register RWr (word
data for writing and reading used in local station systems).
Programmable Local station Local station Programmable
controller CPU Master station (station number 1) (station number 2) controller CPU

Network 1) Network Network 1) Network

parameters parameters parameters parameters

Automatic Automatic
refresh refresh
parameters parameters
Buffer memory Buffer memory Buffer memory

Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY

4) 3) 3) 5)
Receive area Host station Receive area
X Automatic refresh from local Link scan (station number 1) Link scan from local Automatic refresh Y
station No. 1 send area station No. 1
4) Receive area 3) Receive area 3) 2)
Host station
X Automatic refresh from local Link scan from local Link scan (station number 2) Automatic refresh Y
station No. 2 station No. 2 send area

to to to

Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX

6) 7) 7) 8)
Send area to Receive area Receive area
Y Automatic refresh local station Link scan from master Link scan from master Automatic refresh X
No. 1 station station
6) Send area to 7) Receive area 7) Receive area 8)
Y Automatic refresh local station from master from master Automatic refresh X
Link scan Link scan
No. 2 station station

to to to

Remote register Remote register Remote register

RWw RWr RWr
9) Send area to 10) 10) 11)
Receive area Receive area
W Automatic refresh local station Link scan from master Link scan from master Automatic refresh W
No. 1 station station
9) Send area to 10) Receive area 10) Receive area 11)
W Automatic refresh local station Link scan from master Link scan from master Automatic refresh W
No. 2 station station

to to to

Remote register Remote register Remote register

RWr RWw RWw
14) 13) 13) 15)
Receive area Host station Receive area
W Automatic refresh from local Link scan (station number 1) Link scan from local Automatic refresh W
14) station No. 1 send area station No. 1
Receive area 13) Receive area 13) 12)
Host station
W Automatic refresh from local Link scan from local Link scan (station number 2) Automatic refresh W
station No. 2 station No. 2 send area

to to to

POINT
The master station sends only the data for the stations that have started the data link.
The data for the stations that have not started the data link are not sent.

4 - 11 4 - 11
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Data link startup]

1) When the programmable controller system is powered on, the network
parameters in the programmable controller CPU are transferred to the
master station and the CC-Link system starts up automatically.

[On/off data from a local station to the master station or other local
stations]
2) The on/off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory of the
local station. The remote output RY is used as output data in local
station systems.
3) The data in the "remote output RY" buffer memory of the local station is
automatically stored (for each link scan) in the "remote input RX" buffer
memory of the master station and the "remote output RY" buffer
memory of other local stations.
4) The input status stored in the "remote input RX" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.
The remote input RX is used as input data in local station systems.
5) The input status stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.

Local station Local station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 2: Programmable
controller CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 4 stations) controller CPU

Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote output RY

RX0F to RX00 3) RY0F to RY00 3) RY0F to RY00 5)
Y
RX1D to RX10 RY1D to RY10 RY1D to RY10
RX2F to RX20 RY2F to RY20 RY2F to RY20
RX3F to RX30 RY3F to RY30 RY3F to RY30
4) RX4F to RX40 RY4F to RY40 RY4F to RY40
X 3) 3) 2)
RX5F to RX50 RY5F to RY50 RY5F to RY50
Y
RX6F to RX60 RY6F to RY60 RY6F to RY60
RX7F to RX70 RY7F to RY70 RY7F to RY70
RX8F to RX80 RY8F to RY80 RY8F to RY80
RX9D to RX90 RY9D to RY90 RY9D to RY90
RXAF to RXA0 RYAF to RYA0 RYAF to RYA0

to to to

RX7FF to RX7F0 RY7FF to RY7F0 RY7FF to RY7F0

The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master
and local stations.

4 - 12 4 - 12
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[On/off data from the master station to local stations]

6) The on/off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory of the
master station.
7) The data in the "remote output RY" buffer memory is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the "remote input RX" buffer
memory of the local station.
8) The input status stored in the buffer memory "remote input RX" is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.

Local station Local station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 2: Programmable
controller CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 4 stations) controller CPU
Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX
RY0F to RY00 7) RX0F to RX00 7) RX0F to RX00
RY1D to RY10 RX1D to RX10 RX1D to RX10
RY2F to RY20 RX2F to RX20 RX2F to RX20
RY3F to RY30 RX3F to RX30 RX3F to RX30
6) RY4F to RY40 RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40 8)
Y 7) 7) X
RY5F to RY50 RX5F to RX50 RX5F to RX50
RY6F to RY60 RX6F to RX60 RX6F to RX60
RY7F to RY70 RX7F to RX70 RX7F to RX70
RY8F to RY80 RX8F to RX80 RX8F to RX80
RY9D to RY90 RX9D to RX90 RX9D to RX90
RYAF to RYA0 RXAF to RXA0 RXAF to RXA0
to to to

RY7FF to RY7F0 RX7FF to RX7F0 RX7FF to RX7F0

The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master
and local stations.

4 - 13 4 - 13
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Word data from the master station to all local stations]

9) The word data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory of the
master station. The remote register RWw is used as word data for
writing in local station systems.
10) The data in the buffer memory "remote register RWw" is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the buffer memory "remote register
RWr" of all local stations. The remote register RWr is used as word
data for reading in local station systems.
11) The word data stored in the buffer memory "remote register RWr" is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.

Local station Local station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 2: Programmable
controller CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 4 stations) controller CPU

Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Remote register RWr

RWw0 RWr0 RWr0
RWw1 10) RWr1 10) RWr1
RWw2 RWr2 RWr2
RWw3 RWr3 RWr3
RWw4 RWr4 RWr4
RWw5 RWr5 RWr5
RWw6 RWr6 RWr6
RWw7 RWr7 RWr7
RWw8 RWr8 RWr8
9) RWw9 RWr9 RWr9 11)
W W
RWwA RWrA RWrA
RWwB 10) RWrB 10) RWrB
RWwC RWrC RWrC
RWwD RWrD RWrD
RWwE RWrE RWrE
RWwF RWrF RWrF
RWw10 RWr10 RWr10
RWw11 RWr11 RWr11
RWw12 RWr12 RWr12
RWw13 RWr13 RWr13
RWw14 RWr14 RWr14

to to to

RWwFF RWrFF RWrFF

4 - 14 4 - 14
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Word data from a local station to the master and other local
stations]
12) Word data set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the
"remote register RWw" buffer memory of the local station. However, the
data is stored only in the area corresponding to its own station number.
13) The data in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the "remote register RWr" of the
master station and the "remote register RWw" of other local stations.
14) The word data stored in the "remote register RWr" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.
15) The word data stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.

Local station Local station

Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 2: Programmable
controller CPU Master station occupies 1 station) occupies 4 stations) controller CPU

Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Remote register RWw

RWr0 RWw0 RWw0
RWr1 13) RWw1 13) RWw1 15)
W
RWr2 RWw2 RWw2
RWr3 RWw3 RWw3
RWr4 RWw4 RWw4
RWr5 RWw5 RWw5
RWr6 RWw6 RWw6
RWr7 RWw7 RWw7
RWr8 RWw8 RWw8
14) RWr9 RWw9 RWw9
W
RWrA RWwA RWwA
RWrB 13) RWwB 13) RWwB 12)
W
RWrC RWwC RWwC
RWrD RWwD RWwD
RWrE RWwE RWwE
RWrF RWwF RWwF
RWr10 RWw10 RWw10
RWr11 RWw11 RWw11
RWr12 RWw12 RWw12
RWr13 RWw13 RWw13
RWr14 RWw14 RWw14

to to to

RWrFF RWwFF RWwFF

4 - 15 4 - 15
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Communication between the master and local stations by transient

transmission
Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 : 1 mode by specifying the
opposite party at an arbitrary timing.

[Writing data to the buffer memory in a local station using the

G(P).RIWT instruction]
1) Data to be written to the buffer memory in a local station is stored in the
send buffer in the master module.
2) The data is written to the buffer memory in the local station.
3) The local station returns a writing complete response to the master
station.
4) The devices specified with the G(P).RIWT instruction are turned on.

Master station Local station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

1) 2)
G(P).RIWT Send buffer

Device memory
Buffer memory
4) 3)

[Reading data from the buffer memory in a local station using the
G(P).RIRD instruction]
1) The data in the buffer memory of the local station is accessed.
2) The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station.
3) The data is stored in the device memory of the programmable controller
CPU and the devices specified with the G(P).RIRD instruction are
turned on.
Master station Intelligent device station
Programmable controller CPU Master module

1)
G(P).RIRD

Device memory
Buffer memory
3)
2)
Receive buffer

POINT
Before performing data communication using transient transmission, the sizes of
the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master
station. For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers, see
Section 6.2.

4 - 16 4 - 16
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.2.4 Communication with the intelligent device stations

This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and
intelligent device stations.

(1) Communication between the master station and intelligent device

stations by cyclic transmission
Handshaking signals with intelligent device stations (positioning complete,
positioning start. etc.) are communicated using remote input RX and remote
output RX. Numeric data (positioning start number, present feed value, etc.) is
communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr.

Programmable Intelligent
controller CPU Master station device station

Network 1) Network
parameters parameters

Automatic
refresh
parameters
Buffer memory

Remote input
3) 2) RX
Remote input Handshaking signals
X Automatic refresh Link scan
RX such as initial data
processing request and
positioning complete

Remote output
4) 5) RY
Remote output
Y Automatic refresh Link scan Handshaking signals
RY such as initial data
processing complete
and positioning start

Remote register
6) 7) RWw
Remote register
W Automatic refresh Link scan Numeric data such
RWw as positioning start
number and speed
change value

Remote register
9) 8)
Remote register RWr
W Automatic refresh Link scan Numeric data such
RWr
as present feed
value and send speed

4 - 17 4 - 17
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Data link startup]

1) When the programmable controller system is powered on, the network
parameters in the programmable controller CPU are transferred to the
master station, and the CC-Link system automatically starts up.

[Remote input]
2) The remote input RX of an intelligent device station is stored
automatically (for each link scan) in the master station's "remote input
RX" buffer memory.
3) The input status stored in the "remote input RX" buffer memory is
stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters.

Intelligent device station

Programmable (Station number 1:
controller CPU Master station occupies 4 stations)
Remote input RX
Handshaking signals such
Remote input RX as positioning complete

RX0F to RX00 RX0F to RX00

RX1F to RX10 RX1F to RX10
RX2F to RX20 RX2F to RX20
3) RX3F to RX30 2) RX3F to RX30
X
RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40
RX5F to RX50 RX5F to RX50
RX6F to RX60 RX6F to RX60
RX7F to RX70 RX7F to RX70
RX8F to RX80

to

RX7FF to RX7F0

[Remote input RX when the AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 Master module
Device No. Signal name
RX00 D75P2 ready complete
RX01 Single-axis start complete
RX02 Dual-axis start complete
RX03 Use prohibited
RX04 Single-axis BUSY
RX05 Dual-axis BUSY
RX06 Use prohibited
RX07 Single-axis positioning complete
RX08 Dual-axis positioning complete
to to

4 - 18 4 - 18
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote output]
4) The on/off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote output RY" buffer memory.
5) Remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to
on/off (for each link scan) according to the output status stored in the
"remote output RY" buffer memory.

Intelligent device station

Programmable (Station number 1:
controller CPU Master station occupies 4 stations)
Remote output RY
Handshaking signals such
Remote output RY as positioning start

RY0F to RY00 RY0F to RY00

RY1F to RY10 RY1F to RY10
RY2F to RY20 RY2F to RY20
4) RY3F to RY30 5) RY3F to RY30
Y
RY4F to RY40 RY4F to RY40
RY5F to RY50 RY5F to RY50
RY6F to RY60 RY6F to RY60
RY7F to RY70 RY7F to RY70
RY8F to RY80

to

RY7FF to RY7F0

[Remote output RY when the AJ65BT- D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 Master module
Address Description
RY01
to Use prohibited
RY0F
RY10 Single-axis positioning start
RY11 Dual-axis positioning start
RY12 Use prohibited
RY13 Single-axis stop
RY14 Dual-axis stop
to to

4 - 19 4 - 19
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Writing to the remote register (RWw)]

6) The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh
parameters is stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory.
7) The data stored in the "remote register RWw" buffer memory is
automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device
station.
Intelligent device station
Programmable (Station number 1:
controller CPU Master station occupies 4 stations)
Remote register RWw
Numeric data such as
positioning start number
Remote register RWw
RWw0 RWw0
RWw1 RWw1
RWw2 RWw2
RWw3 RWw3
RWw4 RWw4
RWw5 RWw5
RWw6 RWw6
6) RWw7 7) RWw7
W
RWw8 RWw8
RWw9 RWw9
RWwA RWwA
RWwB RWwB
RWwC RWwC
RWwD RWwD
RWwE RWwE
RWwF RWwF
RWw10

to

RWwFF

[Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: Master module AJ65BT-D75P2-S3
Address Description
RWw0 Single-axis positioning start number
RWw1 Single-axis override
RWw2
Single-axis new present value
RWw3
RWw4
Single-axis new speed value
RWw5
RWw6
Single-axis JOG speed
RWw7
to to
The data content to be written to the remote registers RWw0 to RWwn is predefined for each intelligent
device station.

4 - 20 4 - 20
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Reading from the remote register (RWr)]

8) The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station is
automatically stored in the "remote register Rwr" buffer memory of the
master station.
9) The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in
the "remote register RWr" buffer memory is stored in the CPU device
set with the automatic refresh parameters.
Intelligent device station
Programmable (Station number 1:
controller CPU Master station occupies 4 stations)
Remote register RWr
Numeric data such as
Remote register RWr present feed value

RWr0 RWr0
RWr1 RWr1
RWr2 RWr2
RWr3 RWr3
RWr4 RWr4
RWr5 RWr5
RWr6 RWr6
9) RWr7 8) RWr7
W
RWr8 RWr8
RWr9 RWr9
RWrA RWrA
RWrB RWrB
RWrC RWrC
RWrD RWrD
RWrE RWrE
RWrF RWrF
RWr10

to

RWrFF

[Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 is set to station number 1]

Signal direction: AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 Master module
Address Description
RWr0
Single-axis present feed value
RWr1
RWr2
Single-axis feed speed
RWr3
RWr4 Single-axis valid M code
RWr5 Single-axis error number
RWr6 Single-axis warning number
RWr7 Single-axis operating status
to to

4 - 21 4 - 21
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Communication between the master and intelligent device stations

by transient transmission
Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 : 1 mode by specifying the
opposite party at an arbitrary timing.

[Writing data to the buffer memory in the intelligent device station

using the G(P).RIWT instruction]
1) Data to be written to the buffer memory in an intelligent device station is
stored in the send buffer in the master module.
2) The data is written to the buffer memory in the intelligent device.
3) The intelligent device returns a writing complete response to the master
station.
4) The devices specified with the G(P).RIWT instruction are turned on.
Master station Intelligent device station
Programmable controller CPU Master module

1) 2)
G(P).RIWT Send buffer

Device memory
Buffer memory
4) 3)

[Reading data from the buffer memory in the intelligent device

station using the G(P).RIRD instruction]
1) The data in the buffer memory of an intelligent device station is
accessed.
2) The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station.
3) The data is stored in the device memory of the programmable controller
CPU and the devices specified with the G(P).RIRD instruction are
turned on.
Master station Intelligent device station
Programmable controller CPU Master module

1)
G(P).RIRD

Device memory
Buffer memory
3)
2)
Receive buffer

POINT
Before performing data communication using transient transmission, the sizes of
the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master
station. For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers, see
Section 6.2.

4 - 22 4 - 22
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.2.5 Parameter setting with GX Developer

Using GX Developer makes the setting of the network parameters and automatic
refresh parameters easier.
The data link is automatically started if GX Developer is used to set the parameters.
Using GX Developer to set the parameters has the following advantages:
• It is not necessary to write a program for setting the parameters.
• It is possible to perform automatic refresh in the system.

POINT
In case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set
by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the
dedicated instruction (G(P).RLPASET), the module for which the network
parameters are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction should not be included in the
"No. of boards in module" setting of GX Developer.

Network parameter

Write to
Automatic refresh parameter programmable
controller

GX Developer Master station

Local station Remote I/O station Remote device station

Data link start

[Setting method]
For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

4 - 23 4 - 23
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.2.6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction

It is possible to use the G(P).RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters of the
master station and start the data link.
Using the G(P).RLPASET instruction to set the parameters has the following
advantages:
• It is possible to mount nine or more QJ61BT11N modules (see Section 2.2.1 for
details about the number of CPUs that can be mounted).
• It is possible to change the network parameter settings while the programmable
controller CPU is running.

POINT
It is recommended to use GX Developer to set the parameters when the number of
QJ61BT11N mounted is 8 or less.

Parameter setting
direction
Control
data set

G(P).RLPASET
instruction

G(P).RLPASET Write to
instruction completion programmable
controller
Refresh
direction

Master station
GX Developer
Local station Remote I/O station Remote device station

Data link start

(1) Setting method

For more details on the setting, see Section 6.7.
For the G(P).RLPASET instruction, see Appendix 2.8.

(2) Precautions when using the G(P).RLPASET instruction to set the

network parameters
(a) The remote I/O net mode cannot be used.
The module operates in remote net mode.

(b) If it is necessary to change the network parameters while the programmable

controller CPU is running and the data link is being performed, the data link
should be stopped once using SB0002 (data link stop).

4 - 24 4 - 24
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(c) It is necessary to set I/O assignments for modules whose network

parameters are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction.
In addition, do not use GX Developer to set the network parameters and
automatic refresh parameters for modules whose network parameters are
set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction.
If the G(P).RLPASET instruction is used to set network parameters for
modules whose network parameters and automatic refresh parameters
have been set by GX Developer, the G(P).RLPASET instruction will
complete with an error and the network parameter settings performed by
the G(P).RLPASET instruction become invalid.
(d) If the switch setting of an intelligent functional module for which an I/O
assignment is set, has not been performed or is wrong, the G(P).RLPASET
instruction completes with an error.
However, the QJ61BT11N with the smallest head I/O number seen from
the programmable controller CPU starts CC-Link automatically.

(e) Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters, if the
network parameters of all the modules are set by the G(P).RLPASET
instruction.
Change the "No. of boards in module" setting to blank if the network
parameters have been already set by GX Developer.
Moreover, in case a system includes both a module for which the network
parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network
parameters are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction, the module for which
the network parameters are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction should
not be included in the "No. of boards in module" setting of GX Developer.

(f) After executing the G(P).RLPASET instruction, turn on SB0003 (refresh

instruction) to refresh cyclic data.

(g) Automatic refresh is not performed.

The devices should be refreshed via the FROM/TO instruction or the G device.

(h) It is not possible to set input status from a data link faulty station.
Inputs from a data link faulty station are cleared.

(i) The standby master function is not available.

4 - 25 4 - 25
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(j) In order to change the parameter setting method, turn the power supply to
the programmable controller system off and back on, or reset the
programmable controller CPU.
The following table shows how the programmable controller CPU operates
when changing the parameter setting method without turning the power
supply to the programmable controller system off and back on, or resetting
the programmable controller CPU.
Parameter setting method Parameter setting method
Error notification method Continuity of data link
(before change) (after change)
The G(P).RLPASET
Parameter setting with GX Parameter setting with the
instruction completes with Data link continues.
Developer G(P).RLPASET instruction
an error.
LINK.PARA.ERR occurs in
Parameter setting with the Parameter setting with GX
the programmable controller Data link stops.
G(P).RLPASET instruction Developer
CPU.
Note that data link continues to be performed if the designation of
operation at CPU down ((S1) + 5) of the G(P).RLPASET instruction is
set to "Continue."

(k) When the programmable controller CPU is switched from RUN to STOP,
RY of the master station and outputs to the remote, local, intelligent device
and standby master stations are retained (for the QJ61BT11N whose first 5
digits of serial number is "09111" or earlier).

4 - 26 4 - 26
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3 Functions for Improving System Reliability

This section explains the functions for improving the reliability of the CC-Link system.

4.3.1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal
stations (Slave station cut-off function)

This function disconnects remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations,
and a standby master station that have become data link faulty due to power off, and
continues the data link among normal remote stations, local stations, intelligent device
stations, and standby master station (no setting is required).

Master Local Local

Down
station station station

Remote Remote
station station

Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor

Continues data link excluding faulty stations.

POINT
In the event of cable disconnection, the data link cannot be performed because
there is no terminal resistor ("ERR." LED lights up).

Master Local Local

station station station

Remote Remote
station station

Terminal Disconnection Terminal

resistor resistor

4 - 27 4 - 27
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to
normal (Automatic return function)

This function allows remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and a
standby master station that have been disconnected from the data link due to power
off to automatically reconnect to the data link when they return to the normal status.

[Setting method]
Set the "Automatic reconnection station count" value in the network
parameters using the GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see
Sections 6.3 to 6.5.

4 - 28 4 - 28
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station programmable
controller CPU
(Data link status setting when the master station programmable controller CPU has an
error)

This function sets the data link status when the master station programmable controller
CPU falls into an error that stop the operation. It is possible to continue the data link
among the local stations.

POINT
(1) The data link continues when the master station programmable controller CPU
falls into an "error that stops the operation".
(2) If a standby master station is being set, the data link will not continue when the
master station programmable controller CPU is down even when the data link
status at CPU down is set to "Continue". The standby master function
overrides and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station.

[Setting method]
Set the above data link status with the "PLC down select" value in the
network parameters using GX Developer. For more details on the setting,
see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

4 - 29 4 - 29
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station

(Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station)

This function sets the input (receiving) data from a data link faulty station.

(1) Applicable input (receiving) data

The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas.
Remote I/O station Remote device station Local station Local station
Master station (station number 1) (station number 2) (station number 3) (station number 4)

Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)

Station number 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote input (RX) Station number 2 Station number 2
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)

Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote output (RY) Station number 2 Station number 2
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Remote register Remote register Remote register

(RWw) (RWr) (RWr)
Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote register Station number 2 Station number 2
(RWw)
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Remote register Remote register Remote register

(RWr) (RWw) (RWw)
Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote register Station number 2 Station number 2
(RWr)
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Target areas for clear/hold

Areas retained regardless of the setting

The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output
RY in local stations either clear or retain data from faulty stations according to the
setting. The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote register RWw
and remote register RWr in local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of
the setting.

POINT
When the data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station, input data (remote
input RX) from that station is retained regardless of the setting.

(2) Setting method

Set the "Operational setting" value in the network parameters using the GX
Developer. For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

4 - 30 4 - 30
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.5 Clearing data in case of programmable controller CPU STOP (Slave station
refresh/compulsory clear setting in case of programmable controller CPU STOP)

This function compulsorily clears output (send) data to slave stations when the
programmable controller CPU comes to STOP.
Remote output RY refresh device setting in the automatic refresh parameter dialog box
provides the following choices.
When "Y" is specified, the remote output RY is cleared regardless of the parameter
setting.
When specifying any device other than "Y" (e.g. M or L), make parameter setting
whether the remote output RY will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared.
When using GX Developer for setting, use Version 8.03D or later.

(1) Target output (send) data

The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas.
Remote I/O station Remote device station Local station Local station
Master station (station number 1) (station number 2) (station number 3) (station number 4)

Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)

Station number 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote input (RX) Station number 2 Station number 2
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)

Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote output (RY) Station number 2 Station number 2
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Remote register Remote register Remote register

(RWw) (RWr) (RWr)
Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote register Station number 2 Station number 2
(RWw)
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Remote register Remote register Remote register

(RWr) (RWw) (RWw)
Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Remote register Station number 2 Station number 2
(RWr)
Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Area of refresh/compulsory clear setting target

Area refreshed independently of setting

The remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the

setting when the programmable controller CPUs for the master and local stations
come to STOP.
The remote input RX, remote register RWw and remote register RWr are
refreshed regardless of the setting when the programmable controller CPUs for
the master and local stations come to STOP.

4 - 31 4 - 31
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

POINT
(1) Specifying compulsory clear disables compulsory output to slave stations at
CPU STOP using GX Developer.
(2) This setting is also valid when the TO instruction is used for RY refresh.

(2) Setting method

Set the "Operational setting" value in the network parameters using the GX
Developer. For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

4 - 32 4 - 32
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty
(Standby master function)

This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby
master station (meaning a backup station for the master station) if a system down
occurs in the master station due to a malfunction in the programmable controller CPU
or power supply.
The master station can return to normal mode and to system operation as the standby
master station, even during data-link control by the standby master station, thus
preparing itself for a standby master station system down (master station duplex
function).

4 - 33 4 - 33
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Controlling: Controlling the data link of the CC-Link system

Standby: Standing by in case the station controlling the data link of the CC-Link system becomes faulty.
Standby master station
Data link control by the master station Station number 1
Master station Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Standby
Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 0 1

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station returns to normal mode and system operation Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down
Master station Standby master station
Station number 0 1 2 Occupies 1 station
Station number 0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station
Standby Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

To the next page

1: When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station,
the station number of the standby master station becomes "0".
2: When the master station returns to system operation as a standby master station, the station number of the master
station becomes the one specified in the "Standby master station number" in the network parameters.

4 - 34 4 - 34
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Continued from the previous page

Problem occurs in the standby master station Data link control by the master station
Master station
Station number 1 0 Standby master station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station
Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Standby master station returns to normal mode and system operation Standby master station prepares itself for master
station system down Standby master station
Station number 1
Master station Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Controlling Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station Standby

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

4 - 35 4 - 35
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Overview of link data transmission when the standby master

function is used
The following shows an overview of link data transmission when the standby
master function is used.

(a) When the master station controls the data link

1) Master station output

Standby master station (standby)

Station number 1
Master station(controlling) Occupies 1 station
Remote Remote Remote Remote
input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
Station number 2
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station number 3
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent from the master station to the remote input RX and remote
register RWr in the standby master station (shown by the shaded areas
in the figure above) is used as output data when the master station
becomes faulty; it should be saved in another device using the sequence
program.
When the master station becomes faulty, the saved data is transferred to
the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master
station using the sequence program.

2) Master station input

Standby master station (standby)

Station number 1
Master station(controlling) Occupies 1 station
Remote Remote Remote Remote
input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station number 2
Occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F Station number 3
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
standby master station is used as input data by the standby master
station when local stations are operating; thus, it does not need to be
saved in another device.

4 - 36 4 - 36
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) When the master station is faulty and the standby master station is
controlling the data link

1) Standby master station output

Standby master station

(controlling)
Master station Station number 1 0
Remote Remote Remote Remote
input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
Station number 2
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Occupies 1 station Remote I/O station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Station number 3
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
standby master station by the sequence program is sent to other
stations as output data.

2) Standby master station input

Standby master station

(controlling)
Master station Station number 1 0
Remote Remote Remote Remote
input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
Station number 2
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Occupies 1 station Remote I/O station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F
Station number 3
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or
retained according to the "Data link faulty station setting" in the network
parameters.

4 - 37 4 - 37
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(c) When the master station has returned to system operation and the standby
master station is controlling the data link

1) Standby master station output

Master station (standby) Standby master station

Station number 0 1 (controlling)
Occupies 1 station Station number 0

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station number 2
Occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station number 3
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent from the standby master station to the remote input RX and
remote register RWr in the standby master station (shown by the shaded
areas in the figure above) is used as output data when the master
station becomes faulty; it should be saved in another device using the
sequence program.
When the standby master station becomes faulty, the saved data is
transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
master station using the sequence program.

2) Standby master station input

Master station (standby) Standby master station

Station number 0 1 (controlling)
Occupies 1 station Station number 0

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F Station number 2
Occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F Station number 3
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
master station is being used as input data by the master station when
local stations are operating; thus, it does not need to be saved in another
device.

4 - 38 4 - 38
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(d) When the standby master station becomes faulty and the master station
controls the data link

1) Master station output

Master station (controlling)

Station number 1 0 Standby master station

Remote Remote Remote Remote

input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F
Station number 2
Occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
Station number 3
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the
master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as
output data.

2) Master station input

Master station (controlling)

Station number 1 0 Standby master station
Remote Remote Remote Remote
input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote I/O station
RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F RX00 to RX0F RY00 to RY0F Station number 2
Occupies 1 station
RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F RX10 to RX1F RY10 to RY1F Remote I/O station
RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F RX20 to RX2F RY20 to RY2F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F Station number 3
Occupies 1 station
RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F RX30 to RX3F RY30 to RY3F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F
RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F RX40 to RX4F RY40 to RY4F X00 to X0F Y00 to Y0F
RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F RX50 to RX5F RY50 to RY5F X10 to X1F Y10 to Y1F

Data in the shaded areas in the master station is either input or retained
according to the "Operational settings" in the network parameters.

4 - 39 4 - 39
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting method

Perform the setting using the GX Developer.
(a) Setting the master station
First, set "Type" in the network parameters.
Master station that was down returns to system operation: Master station
(Duplex function)
Master station that was down does not return to system operation: Master
station
Next, set the "Standby master station No." of the network parameter.
Setting range: 1 to 64 (blank means no specification for standby master
station)
Default : blank (no specification for standby master station)

(b) Setting the standby master station

Set "Type" in the network parameters to "Standby master station".
Set the mode according to the mode setting of the master station.

4 - 40 4 - 40
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Precautions on using the standby master function

(a) Only one standby master station exists in a single data link system.

(b) If an error is detected at the master station in the initial status (before
parameter communication starts), switching to the standby master station
will not be executed.

(c) When the master station becomes faulty, the data link control will
automatically be transferred to the standby master station, but the refresh
instruction of the cyclic data will not be issued. Specify the cyclic data refresh
using the sequence program. Once specified, the information prior to the
error detection at the master station will be output to each station.

(d) When the data link is being controlled by the standby master station, the
master station's parameters cannot be updated.

(e) An error (error code: B39AH) occurs at the standby master station if there is
a difference between the station number setting of the station number setting
switches of the standby master station and the station number setting of the
network parameter "standby master station number" of the master station.
If an error has occurred, change the parameter setting of the master station
or the station number setting switch setting of the standby master station,
and then reset the programmable controller CPU of the standby master
station.

(f) If the terminal block of the master station is removed and then replaced in its
original position without turning the power off when the master station is
controlling the data link, both the master and standby master stations
operate as master stations. An error occurs since the data link control has
been transferred to the standby master station ("ERR." LED lights up).

(g) When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is
transferred to the standby master station, the "ERR." LED of the standby
master station flashes. (This is because the station number of the standby
master station will change from the one set with a parameter to "0" and the
standby station becomes nonexistent. Data link itself is performed normally.)
To avoid this situation, set the standby master station to be an error invalid
station.

(h) The number and range of devices that will be saved by the sequence
program among the data sent from (the station operating as) the master
station to (the station operating as) the standby station may differ according
to the system used.

4 - 41 4 - 41
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(4) Link special relays/registers (SB and SW) relating to the standby
master function
The following explains the link special relays and registers relating to the standby
master function. These are stored in the buffer memory.
When the standby master station is controlling the data link, its applicability is
basically identical to that of the master station. When the standby master station
is operating as a local station, its applicability is identical to that of the local
station.

(a) Link special relays (SB)

The link special relays (SB) relating to the standby master function are as
follows : The figures in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer
memory addresses and bit locations.
Example: When the buffer memory address is 5E0H and the bit location is 0:
(5E0H, b0)

Table 4.5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function (1/2)
Applicability
( : Applicable, : Not applicable)
Number Name Description
Master
Local station Offline
station
Gives refresh instruction for cyclic data after the data link control
SB0001 Refresh instruction at is transferred to the standby master station.
(5E0H, b1) standby master switching 0: No instruction
1: Instructed
Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master
station that controls the data link to the master station that stands
SB000C
Forced master switching by in case the standby master station becomes faulty.
(5E0H, b12)
0: No request
1: Requested
Refresh instruction Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master
SB0042 acknowledgement status switching has been acknowledged or not.
(5E4H, b2) at standby master 0: Not acknowledged
switching 1: Instruction acknowledged
Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master
Refresh instruction
SB0043 switching is complete or not.
complete status at standby
(5E4H, b3) 0: Not complete
master switching
1: Switching complete
Indicates whether the forced master switching (SB000C) signal
SB0046 Forced master switching can be executed or not.
(5E4H, b6) executable status OFF: Cannot be executed.
ON: Can be executed.
Indicates the acknowledgement status of the standby master
station when it has received a master switching request from the
SB005A Master switching request
line.
(5E5H, b10) acknowledgement
OFF: Not acknowledged
ON: Request acknowledged
Indicates whether or not the switch from the standby master
SB005B Master switching request station to the master station is complete.
(5E5H, b11) complete OFF: Not complete
ON: Complete
Indicates whether a forced master switching request has been
SB005C Forced master switching acknowledged or not.
(5E4H, b12) request acknowledgement 0: Not acknowledged
1: Instruction acknowledged

4 - 42 4 - 42
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Table 4.5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function (2/2)
Applicability
( : Applicable, : Not applicable)
Number Name Description
Master
Local station Offline
station
Indicates whether a forced master switching request
SB005D Forced master switching acknowledgement is complete or not.
(5E5H, b13) request complete 0: Not complete
1: Switching complete
Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists
SB0062 Host standby master for the host.
(5E6H, b2) station setting information 0: No setting
1: Setting exists
Shows the data link status.
SB0070
Master station information 0: Data link control by the master station
(5E7H, b0)
1: Data link control by the standby master station
Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station.
SB0071 Standby master station
0: No standby master station
(5E7H, b1) information
1: Standby master station exists
Indicates whether the "Type" setting in the network parameters is
SB0079 Master station return set to "Master station" or "Master station (Duplex function)."
(5E7H, b9) specification information OFF: Master station
ON: Master station (Duplex function)
Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby
SB007B Host master/standby master station.
(5E7H, b11) master operation status OFF: Operates as a master station (controlling data link)
ON: Operates as a standby master station (standby)

(b) Link special registers (SW)

The following describes the link special registers (SW) relating to the
standby master function. The figures in parentheses in the number column
indicate buffer memory addresses.

Table 4.6 List of link special registers relating to the standby master function
Applicability
( : Applicable, : Not applicable)
Number Name Description
Master
Local station Offline
station
Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby
Refresh instruction at
SW0043 master switching.
standby master switching
(643H) 0 : Normal
result
Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the execution result of the forced master switching
SW005D Forced master switching instruction with SB000C.
(65DH) instruction result 0 : Normal
Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
SW0073 Standby master station Stores the station number of the standby master station.
(673H) number 1 to 64 (station)

4 - 43 4 - 43
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(5) On/off timings of link special relays (SB) relating to the standby
master function
The following shows the on/off timings of the link special relays (SB) relating to
the standby master function.

ON
SB70 OFF
(Master station information)

SB7B ON
(Host master/standby master operation status) OFF
ON
SB5A
(Master switching request acknowledgement) OFF

ON
SB5B
(Master switching request complete) OFF

ON
SB01(User operation)
(Refresh instruction at standby master switching) OFF

SB42 ON
(Refresh instruction acknowledgement status OFF
at standby master switching)
ON
SB43
(Refresh instruction complete status at standby OFF
master switching)

When SB5B is turned on, the program switches RX to RY and RWr to RWw.
In addition, the program turns SB01 on.

4 - 44 4 - 44
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(6) Program example when the standby master function (master

station duplex function) is used
A program example is created under the following conditions when the standby
master function (master station duplex function) is used.
(a) System configuration
Standby master station
Station number 1
Master station Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 Station number 4
Occupies 2 stations Occupies 1 station

(b) Parameter settings of the master station

(c) Parameter settings of the standby master station

4 - 45 4 - 45
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Program example when standby master function (master station duplex
function) is used
Control start relay used when master station is operating..................M10
Control start relay used when standby master station is operating....M11
Control start relay when the master
station is operating
Initial device set
Control start relay when the station
master station is (local station) is
operating

Save remote input RX and emote

register RWr data to W device

Set the saved data to remote

Control ladder when output RY and remote register RWr
the master station is
operating
Refresh change instruction request ON

Refresh change instruction

request OFF

Control program when the master station is operating

Control ladder when

the standby master Control program when the standby master operation is operating
station is operating (local station operation)
(Local station operating)

(e) When forcibly switching the data link control right from the standby master
station to the master station
The areas enclosed by the broken and dotted lines in the program example
shown in (d) must be modified as shown below.
Forced master switching request.........................................................M200

Control program when the master station is operating

Control program when the standby master operation is operating

(local station operation)

4 - 46 4 - 46
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.7 Data link start by standby master station (First 5 digits of serial No. is 07112 or later)

This function allows data link to start by turning on either of the master or standby
master station.
When the standby master station is turned on, even if no power is applied to the
master station, data link will start.
To enable this function, the same parameters and programs must be set to the master
and standby master stations.
When using the standby station as a backup for the master station, utilize the standby
master function explained in Section 4.3.6.
Controlling : Controlling the data link of the CC-Link system
Standby status : Standing by, waiting for a failure of the station controlling the data link of the CC-Link system

When standby master station only is started, it controls data link. Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 0*1

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 :Occupies 1 station Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Master station joins the network. It stands by waiting for a standby master station failure.
Master station Standby master station
Station number 0 1*2, Occupies 1 station Station number 0

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Standby status Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 :Occupies 1 station Controlling

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

To the next page

*1 When the master station becomes faulty and the standby master station takes over the data link control,
the number of the standby master station is changed to "0".
*2 When the master station returns to the system as a standby master station,
its station number is the one specified in the "Standby master station number" in the network parameters.

4 - 47 4 - 47
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Continued from the previous page

Error occurred in standby master station Master station controls data link.
Master station
Station number 1 0 Standby master station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Controlling Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 : Occupies 1 station

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online

It stands by waiting for a master station failure Standby master station
Master station Station number 1 : Occupies 1 station

Remote device station Intelligent device station

Controlling Station number 2 : Occupies 2 stations Station number 4 : Occupies 1 station Standby status

Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication

4 - 48 4 - 48
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting method

The following shows how to make settings.
(a) Set station No.0 for the master station, and any of station 1 to 64 for the
standby master station.
(b) Configure the same system (the same programmable controller CPU, I/O
modules, and/or intelligent function modules) for the master and standby
master stations.
(c) Select "Master station (Duplex function)" for "Type" in the network
parameters on GX Developer.
(d) Set other network parameter items.

(e) Write the same parameters and sequence programs to the master and
standby master stations.

(2) Precautions when starting data link by the standby master station
(a) Be sure to set the same parameters and programs to the master and
standby master stations.
Otherwise, correct operation cannot be guaranteed.
(b) When replacing the standby master station module, be sure to use a module
whose first 5 digits of serial No. is 07112 or later. If it is 07111 or earlier, the
LINK PARA.ERROR (Error code 3105) will be generated on the standby
master station.
(c) When data link has started by the standby master station, Line test 1 and 2
are not executable. To perform these line tests, use GX Developer.

4 - 49 4 - 49
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.3.8 Guaranteeing the cyclic data for each slave station (block guarantee of cyclic data per
station)

This function allows guaranteeing of the cyclic data for each slave station according to
the parameter setting. (This function is supported by the QJ61BT11N with first 5 digits
of serial No. 08032 or later. For compatible CPU module versions, refer to Section
2.2.1.)
Cyclic data could be separated into new data and old data in 2-word (32-bit) units
depending on the auto refresh timing. Using this function guarantees the data
consistency for each slave station.
Set this function to master stations, local stations and standby master stations.
Note that the consistency of 2-word data is also guaranteed in the QJ61BT11N whose
first five digits of serial No. is 08031 or earlier. To ensure the consistency of data
exceeding two words, use this function.

The following example shows the range in which data of remote register RWw is
secured when this function is set in the remote net Ver.1 mode.
Programmable
controller CPU Master station Remote station
Station number 1
Device Remote register
RWw0
RWw1
RWw2
RWw3
RWw4

Automatic RWw5
refresh RWw6

W RWw7 4 stations occupied

RWw8
RWw9
RWwA
RWwB
RWwC
RWwD

RWwE

RWwF

For slave station number 1 that has setting of "4 stations occupied" in the remote net
Ver.1 mode, remote register data in the range RWw0 to RWwF are guaranteed.
Data are guaranteed in the same way for other remote devices (RX, RY and RWr).
They are also guaranteed for remote devices (RX, RY, RWr and RWw) in the remote
I/O network mode.

4 - 50 4 - 50
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

The following example shows the range in which data of remote register RWw are
guaranteed when this function is set in the remote net Ver.2 mode.
Programmable
controller CPU Master station Remote station
Station number 1

Device Remote register

RWw0

Automatic
refresh
4 stations occupied
W
Octuple setting

RWw7F

For slave station number 1 that has setting of "4 stations occupied" and "octuple" in the
remote net Ver.2 mode, remote register data in the range RWw0 to RWw7F are
guaranteed.
Data are guaranteed in the same way for other remote devices (RX, RY and RWr).
They are also guaranteed for remote devices (RX, RY, RWr and RWw) in the remote
net additional mode.

4 - 51 4 - 51
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting method

The following describes the setting method.
(a) Click the Operational settings button for the network parameters in GX
Developer.

(b) The [Operational settings] screen is displayed. Check the [Block guarantee
of cyclic data per station] checkbox.

(c) Make the auto refresh settings for each remote device.

4 - 52 4 - 52
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Precautions when using the block guarantee of cyclic data per
station
(a) When using this function, be sure to make the auto refresh settings.
If the auto refresh settings have not been made for all devices, remote input
(RX), remote output (RY) and remote registers (RWr, RWw) in the buffer
memory may not be refreshed.
The following message is displayed if the auto refresh settings have not
been completed.
If this message is displayed, check the settings.

(b) When replacing the QJ61BT11N, use a module whose first 5 digits of the
serial No. are 08032 or later.
When a QJ61BT11N whose first 5 digits of the serial No. are 08031 or
earlier is used, the LINK PARA.ERROR (error code 3105) occurs on the
programmable controller CPU after the network parameters are written to
the programmable controller.

4 - 53 4 - 53
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(c) When this function is used, the transmission delay time increases
(compared with when this function is not used).
When designing a new system by using an existing system as it is, confirm
the delay time of the data from the remote station before starting the
system.

POINT
For the formula for calculating the transmission delay time when the block
guarantee of cyclic data per station is used, refer to Section 5.2.

The following shows examples of how to calculate the transmission delay

time when this function is used and not used.

1) Maximum transmission delay time in input RX from remote I/O station

Conditions:
Asynchronous mode
Master station’s sequence scan time, 20ms
Link scan time, 3ms
Remote I/O response time, 1.5ms

(When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is used)

(SM × n) + (LS × 2) + Rio
= (20 × 1) + (3 × 2) + 1.5 = 27.5ms

(When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is not used)
SM + (LS×2) + Rio
= 20 + (3×2) + 1.5 = 27.5ms

The meanings of symbols in the formula are as follows:

SM: Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
Rio: Remote I/O response time

4 - 54 4 - 54
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

2) Maximum transmission delay time in output from master station to

Ver.2-compatible local station
Conditions:
Asynchronous mode
Master station sequence scan time, 20ms
Link scan time, 3ms
Expanded cyclic setting, "double"
Local station scan time, 10 ms

(When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is used)

(SM×n) + [LS×{(2×m) +1}]+{SL× (k+1)}
= (20×1) + [3×{(2×3) +1}]+{10× (1+1)} =61ms

(When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is not used)
SM×n+ [LS×{(2×m) +1}]+{SL× (k+1)}
20+ [3×{(2×3) +1}]+10=51ms

The meanings of symbols in the formula are as follows:

SM: Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
SL : Local station sequence program scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
t : LS x m÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to
the nearest integer.)
k : LS÷SL (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
m : Constant according to the extended cyclic setting

4 - 55 4 - 55
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(d) When this function is used, the link refresh time increases (compared with
when this function is not used).
When designing a new system by using an existing system as it is, confirm
the link refresh time before starting the system.

POINT
For a formula for calculating the link refresh time when the block guarantee of cyclic
data per station is used, refer to Section 5.4.

The following shows examples of how to calculate the link refresh time
when this function is used and not used.
Conditions:
A Q06HCPU is used with the QJ61BT11N mounted on the main base and
is defined as a master station in remote net Ver.1 mode.
Data of 2048 RX points, 2048 RY points, 256 RWw points, 256 RWr points,
512 SB points, and 512 SW points are refreshed to areas other than file
registers.

(When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is used)

RX + RY + SB + RWw + RWr + SW
KM1+KM2
16
2048 + 2048 + 512
= 0.24 + 0.00043 + 256 + 256 + 512
16
= 0.24 + 0.00043 1312
= 0.80416
= 0.80 [ms]
(When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is not used)
RX+RY+SB
KM1+KM2 +RWw+RWr+SW
16
2048+2048+512
=0.22+0.00043 +256+256+512
16
=0.22+0.00043 1312
=0.78416
=0.78 [ms]
The meanings of symbols in the formula are as follows:
RX : Number of remote input (RX) points refreshed by the master
station
RY : Number of remote output (RY) points refreshed by the master
station
RWw : Number of remote register (RWw) points refreshed by master
station
RWr : Number of remote register (RWr) points refreshed by master
station
SB : Number of link special relay (SB) points refreshed by master
station
SW : Number of link special register (SW) points refreshed by master
station
KM1, KM2, KM3 : Constants

4 - 56 4 - 56
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4 Handy Functions

This section explains some handy functions of the QJ61BT11N.

4.4.1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations (Remote
device station initialization procedure registration function)

The initial settings of remote device stations, which in previous models were done
using the sequence program, can now be performed using the GX Developer for
registration to the programmable controller CPU.
The QJ61BT11N instructs registration of remote device station initialization procedure,
and then stores the number of the currently executing procedure to the buffer memory.
For this reason, when processing has stopped, the relevant information such as the
procedure number or target station number can be confirmed. For details on procedure
numbers, refer to (1)(b)(9) in this section.
Also, if a running remote device station is replaced due to a failure, initial processing
that has been done for all stations before can be performed for the replaced remote
device station by specifying it. Remote device stations other than the specified station
continue to operate.
Settings such as "A-D conversion enable/disable" and "Averaging processing
specification" can be performed easily with the AJ65BT-64AD.
For an example of an initialization procedure using the GX Developer, see Sections
10.1.3, 10.2.3 and 10.3.3.
Check if this function is available for the remote device station to be used. The function
is currently available for the following remote device stations. (As of November 2007)
• AJ65BT-64AD • AJ65BT-64DAI • AJ65BT-64DAV
• AJ65BT-64RD3 • AJ65BT-64RD4 •AJ65BT-68TD
• AJ65BT-D35ID2 • AJ65SBT-62DA • AJ65SBT-64AD
• AJ65VBTCU-68ADIN • AJ65VBTCU-68ADVN • AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

(1) Number of setting items for initialization procedures

Initial settings can be executed up to 16 items per remote device station.
If setting 17 items or more is necessary, execute initial setting with the sequence
program.
Remote device station initialization procedure registration and initial settings with
the sequence program cannot be executed at the same time.
If they are executed at the same time, remote device station may malfunction.
Initial settings can be executed up to 16 stations.
When 17 or more remote device stations are connected, execute the initial
settings for the 17th and subsequent stations using the sequence program.

4 - 57 4 - 57
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Initialization procedure setting method

The initial settings are performed using the "Remote device station initial setting"
in the network parameters.

(a) In "Target", set the station number of a module for which the initial settings
are to be performed.
Setting range: 1 to 64

(b) Set the initialization procedure in "Regist procedure".

1) Input format
Set the data input format for "Write data" in details of execution.
Setting range: DEC.
HEX.
Default: DEC.

2) Execute Flag
Set whether or not to execute the specified initialization procedure.
Setting range: Execute
Only set (use as a memo when the execution conditions
are the same as when the execution flag is set as
"Execute", but the content of execution is different.)
Default: Execute

4 - 58 4 - 58
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

3) Operational condition
Specify whether new settings or the previous settings are used for the
initialization conditions.
Setting range: Set new
Same as prev. set
Default: Set new
When "Same as prev. set" is selected, the processing is performed as
follows:
Example)

RX1
0 SET RY3

M0V K15 RWw2

4) Executional condition settings "Condition Device"

Set the device to be used for the initialization condition.
Setting range: RX
SB

5) Executional condition settings "Device Number"

Set the device number to be used for the initialization condition.
Even if the target station number is different, the same number must be
set.
Setting range: When RX is selected 0 to 37F (H)
When SB is selected 0 to FF (H)

6) Executional condition settings "Execute Condition"

Set the conditions under which initialization is performed.
Setting range: ON
OFF

7) Details of execution "Write Device"

Set the device to which the contents of the initial setting are written.
Setting range: RY
RWw

8) Details of execution "Device Number"

Set the device number to which the contents of the initial settings are
written.
Even if the target station number is different, the same number must be
set.
Setting range: When RY is selected 0 to 37F (H)
When RWw is selected 0 to 0F (H)

4 - 59 4 - 59
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

9) Details of execution "Write Data"

Set the contents of the initial settings.
Setting range: When RY is selected ON/OFF
When RWw is selected 0 to 65535 (Decimal),
0 to FFFF (Hexadecimal)

The following shows the procedure registration screen appeared after

setting of (1) to (9).
For procedure numbers, the first line of the screen is regarded as
procedure number 1.

Item of procedure

Item of procedure
number2

4 - 60 4 - 60
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Method for initializing only a specified station (specification of

remote device station to be initialized)
When a running remote device station is replaced due to a failure, initial
processing that has been done for all stations conventionally can be performed
for the replaced remote device station by specifying it. Remote device stations
other than the specified station continue their operations. (This function is
supported by the QJ61BT11N with first 5 digits of serial No. 08032 or later.)

The following shows an example in which remote device station number 3 is

specified to be initialized.

Remote device station (2)

(3) (station number 1)
GX Developer (1)
Initial procedure Station number 3
registered station Initial processing by initial Replace
numbers 1, 3, 5, 7 procedure registration
Remote device station
QJ61BT11N (station number 3)
master station

Remote device station

(station number 5)

Remote device station

(station number 7)

1) First of all, register the initialization procedures for all remote device
stations (station numbers 1, 3, 5, 7).

2) When a failure occurs on remote device station number 3 during

operation, replace the failed remote device station.

3) Specify the replaced station number 3 as a remote device station to be

initialized. Then, register the initialization procedure.
During initial processing of station number 3, control of the other
stations (station numbers 1, 5, 7) is continued.

(a) How to specify the remote device station to be initialized

Set the station to be initialized in the " specification of remote device station
to be initialized (SW0014 to SW0017)" in the link special register.
To set this, turn ON the bit corresponding to the specified station number
within SW0014 to SW0017 (only the bit of the head station number).
When all bits are OFF, initial processing is performed on all stations that are
set in the remote device station initial setting in the network parameters.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0014 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW0015 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
SW0016 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
SW0017 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.

4 - 61 4 - 61
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(4) Enable initial settings

Before creating a program for communication with remote device stations, create
a program to enable the initial settings using SB000D (remote device station
initialization procedure registration instruction) and SB005F (completion status of
remote device station initialization procedure execution).
For details, refer to Sections 10.1.4, 10.2.4 and 10.3.4.

Procedure for the remote device station initialization procedure registration

(a) Turn SB000D ON, and start initialization procedure registration.
During execution of initialization procedure registration, SB005E (remote
device station initialization procedure execution status) stays ON.
Also, the execution procedure numbers and target station numbers of the
registration are stored to SW0110 to SW011F (remote device station
initialization procedure registration execution individual information).

(b) When initial processing of all preset stations is completed, SB005F turns ON.
Also, the execution result is stored to SW005F (remote device station
initialization procedure instruction result).
The execution procedure numbers in SW0110 to SW011F become FF00H.

(d) When SB000D is turned OFF on completion of initial processing (SB005F :

ON), SB005F, and SW0110 to SW011F are cleared.

The following shows operation of the link special relays and link special registers
when remote device station initialization procedure registration is performed.
Performed by QJ61BT11N
Performed by sequence program

Specification of remote device SW0014

station to be initialized to
SW0017

ON
Remote device station
initialization procedure SB000D
registration instruction OFF

ON
Remote device station
initialization procedure SB005E
OFF
registration execution status
ON
Remote device station initialization
procedure registration completion SB005F OFF
status

Remote device station SW00110

initialization procedure registration to
execution individual information SW0011F

4 - 62 4 - 62
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(5) Preparation for communication with remote device stations

1) Register the network parameters and the created program in the
programmable controller CPU.
2) Reset the programmable controller CPU or turn the power from off to on.
3) Instruct the master station to register the remote device station initialization
procedure. (This instruction may not be necessary in some cases such as
when the remote input RX is set as a startup condition.)

POINT
(1) Because one step is performed per link scan, as the number of settings
increases the processing time will extend beyond that specified in the sequence
program.
(2) While SB0D (remote device station initialization procedure registration
instruction) is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and remote registers
stops.
(3) When the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction
(SB000D) turns OFF after completion of the initial processing, all of RY signals
that have turned ON during the registration turn OFF.
Therefore, for signals that should be kept ON (e.g. CH. Conversion enable
flag of the AJ65BT-64RD3/4), turn them ON in the sequence program.
(4) The remote device station initialization procedure registration completion status
(SB005F) does not turn ON unless all of procedure registration for the stations
specified in the remote device station initialization procedure registration station
specification (SW0014 to SW0017) is completed normally.
If any error station exists, turn OFF the remote device station initialization
procedure registration instruction (SB000D) depending on the status of the
other stations.
(5) The remote device station initialization procedure registration is not allowed for
the standby master station.
When replacing a remote device station while the standby master station is
operating as a master, perform initial setting on the sequence program.

4 - 63 4 - 63
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(6) Link special relays and registers (SB, SW) relating to remote device
station initialization procedure registration
The following describes the link special relays and link special registers relating
to remote device station initialization procedure registration.
The information of link special relays and link special registers is stored in the
buffer memory.
(a) Link special relays (SB)
The following describes the link special relays (SB) relating to remote device
station initialization procedure registration.
Numerical values in parentheses "()" under relay numbers indicate the buffer
memory addresses and bit positions.
Example : Bit 13 of buffer memory address 5E0H
(5E0H, b13)

Table 4.7 List of link register relays relating to the remote device station initialization
procedure registration function
Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description Online
Master Local Offline
station station
Starts the initial processing using the information
registered during the initialization procedure registration.
Remote device station
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output 1
initialization procedure
(5E0H, b13) and remote registers stops.
registration instruction
OFF : Not instructed
ON : Instructed
Indicates the execution status of the initialization
Execution status of
SB005E procedure. 1
remote device station
(5E5H, b14) OFF : Not executed
initialization procedure
ON : Being executed
Indicates the completion status of the initialization
Completion status of
SB005F procedure execution. 1
remote device station
(5E5H, b15) OFF : Not complete
initialization procedure
ON : Complete
1 Parameter setting is required in the case of a standby master station. (First 5 digits of serial No. must be
07112 or later.)

4 - 64 4 - 64
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Link special registers (SW)

The following describes the link special registers (SW) relating to remote
device station initialization procedure registration.
Numerical values in parentheses "()" under register numbers indicate the
buffer memory addresses.

Table 4.8 List of link special registers relating to the remote device station initialization
procedure registration function (1/3)
Availability
( : Available, : Not
available)
Number Name Description
Online
Master Local Offline
station station
Specifies the station to be initialized using the information saved by
initialization procedure registration.
SW0014
0: Initial processing not performed
(614H)
1: Initial processing performed
SW0015 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

(615H) Specification of
SW0014 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW0015 1
remote device station 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
SW0016 SW0016 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
to be initialized
(616H) SW0017 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

SW0017 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.

(617H) Not necessary to set for the number of occupied stations.
Error invalid stations, reserved stations and station of number 65 or higher are
not specified.
Remote device
Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration instruction of
station initialization SB000D.
SW005F 1
procedure 0 : Normal
(65FH)
registration Other than 0 : Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
instruction result
Remote device
station initialization
SW0110 procedure
(710H) registration execution
individual information
(target 1)
Remote device
station initialization
Stores the execution information of initialization procedure registration.
SW0111 procedure 1
High: Next execution procedure number (FFH at completion)
(711H) registration execution
Low: Targeted station number
individual information
(target 2)
Remote device
station initialization
SW0112 procedure
(712H) registration execution
individual information
(target 3)

4 - 65 4 - 65
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Table 4.8 List of link special registers relating to the remote device station initialization
procedure registration function (2/3)
Availability
( : Available, : Not
available)
Number Name Description
Online
Master Local Offline
station station
Remote device
station initialization
SW0113 procedure
(713H) registration execution
individual information
(target 4)
Remote device
station initialization
SW0114 procedure
(714H) registration execution
individual information
(target 5)
Remote device
station initialization
SW0115 procedure
(715H) registration execution
individual information
(target 6)
Remote device
station initialization
SW0116 procedure
(716H) registration execution
individual information Stores the execution information of initialization procedure registration.
(target 7) High: Next execution procedure number (FFH at completion) 1

Remote device Low: Targeted station number

station initialization
SW0117 procedure
(718H) registration execution
individual information
(target 8)
Remote device
station initialization
SW0118 procedure
(718H) registration execution
individual information
(target 9)
Remote device
station initialization
SW0119 procedure
(719H) registration execution
individual information
(target 10)
Remote device
station initialization
SW011A procedure
(71A)H registration execution
individual information
(target 11)
1 Parameter setting is required in the case of a standby master station. (First 5 digits of serial No. must be
07112 or later.)

4 - 66 4 - 66
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Table 4.8 List of link special registers relating to the remote device station initialization
procedure registration function (3/3)
Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description Online
Master Local Offline
station station
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW011B
registration execution
(71BH)
individual information
(target 12)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW011C
registration execution
(71CH)
individual information
(target 13)
Remote device station
Stores the execution information of initialization procedure
initialization procedure
SW011D registration. 1
registration execution
(71DH) High: Next execution procedure number (FFH at completion)
individual information
Low: Targeted station number
(target 14)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW011E
registration execution
(71EH)
individual information
(target 15)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW011F
registration execution
(71FH)
individual information
(target 16)
1 Parameter setting is required in the case of a standby master station. (First 5 digits of serial No. must be
07112 or later.)
(6) Replacing a faulty QJ61BT11N
When replacing a faulty QJ61BT11N with a new one, do not use any of the
modules whose first five digits of serial number is 08031 or earlier.
Doing this by mistake and specifying a remote device station to be initialized may
result in the following operation behavior:

Master/Remote
Operation behavior
device station
Master station Ignores the specification of remote device station to be initialized (SW0014 to SW0017)
and initializes all of the remote device stations that are set in the network parameter
setting.
Remote device The remote device station replacing a faulty one completes the initial processing.
station Normally operating remote device stations may not complete their initial processing.
If this happens, check the remote device station initialization procedure registration
execution individual information (SW0110 to SW011F).

4 - 67 4 - 67
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.2 Performing high-speed processing (Event issuance for the interrupt program)

This function issues events (signals to execute an interrupt program) according to

factors such as the on/off status of specified RX, RY and SB devices and the
match/mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data, in order to allow the
programmable controller CPU to execute the interrupt program.
Because the conditions for issuing the events are set using the GX Developer, the
number of program steps is reduced, thus shortening the scan time.
Events can be issued for all stations.
A maximum of 16 event issuance conditions can be set.

(1) Event issuance conditions

Events are issued under the following conditions:
On/off status of specified RX, RY and SB devices
Match/mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data
When the link scan is completed

(2) Event issuance condition setting method

(a) First, set the "Interrupt setting" in the network parameters.

1) Input format
Set the data input format for "Word device".
Setting range: DEC.
HEX.
Default: DEX.

2) Device code
Set the device to be used for the event issuance conditions.
Setting range: RX
SB
RY
RWr
SW
Scan completed

3) Device No.
Set the device number to be used for the event issuance conditions.
Setting range: When RX or RY is selected 0 to 1FFF (H)
When SB or SW is selected 0 to 01FF (H)
When RWr is selected 0 to 00FF (H)

4) Detection method
Set the detection method for the event issuance conditions.
Setting range: Edge detect (Issues event only at rise and fall.)
Level detect (Issues each link scan event when the event
issuance conditions are established.)

4 - 68 4 - 68
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

5) Interrupt condition
Set the conditions under which events are issued.
Setting range: When RX, SB or RY is selected ON/OFF
When RWr or SW is selected Equal/Unequal
6) Word device
Set the conditions under which events are issued when RWr or SW is
selected.
Setting range: 0 to 65535 (Decimal)
0 to FFFF (Hexadecimal)
7) Interrupt (SI) No.
Set the intelligent function module interrupt pointer number.
(SI is an interrupt pointer for an intelligent function module and not a
device used in an actual program.)
Setting range: 0 to 15

POINT
Only one event issuance condition can be set for each interrupt program.

(b) Set the "PLC parameter" -- "PLC system" -- "Intelligent function module
setting" -- "Interrupt pointer settings".
1) "Interrupt pointer start No." on the PLC side.
Set the interrupt pointer start number for the CPU.
Setting range: 50 to 255
2) "Interrupt pointer No. of units" on the PLC side
Set the number of event issuance conditions specified in the "Interrupt
settings" of the Network parameters
Setting range: 1 to 16
3) "Start I/O No." on the Intelli. unit side
Set the start input/output number for the intelligent function module for
which the interrupt setting was performed.
Setting range: 0 to 0FF0 (H)

4 - 69 4 - 69
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4) "Start SI No." on the intelli. unit side

Set the smallest number for intelligent function module interrupt pointers
specified in "Interrupt (SI) No." of the "Interrupt settings" in the Network
parameters.
Setting range: 0 to 15

(3) Simulation of the interrupt program

When the event issuance conditions are established in the master station using
the GX Developer, the interrupt program is executed even when the
corresponding modules are not connected, and then the interrupt program can
be simulated.
(Example) A case where an event is issued when RX01 turns on, and then an
interrupt program is executed.

Remote device station

Programmable (Station number 1:
controller CPU Master station number of occupied stations: 2)

2) The event
issuance
3) The interrupt conditions are
program is established. 1) Turns on RX01
executed. using the GX
Developer.

4 - 70 4 - 70
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on (Automatic CC-Link startup)

When the QJ61BT11N is used in a system configuration including not only remote I/O
stations but also remote device stations and intelligent device stations, the CC-Link
startup and data refresh are performed only by powering up the system and without
creating sequence programs.
Use this function to make an operation check when constructing a system. When
performing control, always set the network parameters.

1) Power ON/Reset 5) STOP RUN

Programmable Programmable
controller CPU Master station controller CPU Master station
2) Identifies
QJ61BT11N

3) CC-Link
startup
4) CPU refresh processing

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(first module) (64th module) (first module) (64th module)

(1) Contents of default parameter settings at automatic CC-Link startup

The following lists the contents of the default automatic refresh parameter
settings and network parameter settings when the automatic CC-Link starts up.

Content of default automatic refresh parameter settings

QCPU (Q mode) side
Master station/ Master station/
(Except Direction Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU side Direction
local station side local station side
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU)
X1000 to X17FF RX0000 to RX07FF X400 to X7FF RX000 to RX3FF
Y1000 to Y17FF RY0000 to RY07FF Y400 to Y7FF RY000 to RY3FF
W1E00 to W1EFF RWr00 to RWrFF W600 to W67F RWr00 to RWr7F
W1F00 to W1FFF RWw00 to RWwFF W700 to W77F RWw00 to RWw7F
SB0600 to SB07FF SB0000 to SB01FF SB200 to SB3FF SB0000 to SB01FF
SW0600 to SW07FF SW0000 to SW01FF SW200 to SW3FF SW0000 to SW01FF

Content of default network parameter settings

Mode setting Remote net ver.1 mode
Total number of connected
64 stations
stations
Number of retries 3 times
Number of automatic return
1 module
modules
Standby master station number No standby master station specified.
CPU down specification Data link stop when a master station CPU error occurs
Scan mode setting Asynchronous
Delay time setting 0

4 - 71 4 - 71
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

Content of buffer memory size specification for intelligent device station

Send buffer 64 words
Receive buffer 64 words
Automatic update buffer 128 words

POINT
(1) Perform an automatic CC-Link startup in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
(2) When the automatic CC-Link startup is executed on a local station, the local
station operates occupying 1 station.
(3) Make sure to perform line tests for all stations if an automatic CC-Link startup is
performed and changes such as replacement of a module, etc. are made to the
system during data link operation.
Stations whose data link has already been established (only stations whose
station numbers overlap) may also go down if stations with overlapping head
station numbers return to the system.
(4) If an automatic CC-Link startup was performed, a temporary error invalid
station cannot be used.
(5) In case of a multiple CPU system where each CPU controls several
QJ61BT11N modules, the automatic CC-Link startup is performed on the
QJ61BT11N that has the smallest head I/O number.
(6) In the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, automatic refresh is performed for stations No.1 to
32 only.
Because automatic refresh is not performed for station No. 33 or higher, use
FROM/TO instructions to read/write data.

(2) Execution conditions

(a) When the parameters are not set, the automatic CC-Link startup function is
applicable only to one "QJ61BT11N". Even when more than one
QJ61BT11N is mounted on the base unit, the automatic CC-Link startup
function is applicable only to the first one. It is applied to the QJ61BT11N
that has the smallest start I/O number, as seen from the programmable
controller CPU side.

(b) In the case of automatic CC-Link startup, the total number of CC-Link IE
controller network modules and MELSECNET/H modules that are
connectable to the master station’s CPU is as follows:

Number of CC-Link IE controller network modules + MELSECNET/H

modules 3

4 - 72 4 - 72
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.4 Communicating with intelligent device stations (Remote net mode)

The remote net mode allows communication with all stations (remote I/O stations,
remote device stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and standby master
stations). Furthermore, it allows not only cyclic transfer, but also transient transmission,
which transfers data at an arbitrary timing, to intelligent and local stations.

[Setting method]
Set the remote net mode in "Mode" of the network parameters using the
GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.5.

4.4.5 Speeding up the response from remote I/O stations (Remote I/O net mode)

The remote I/O net mode can be used for a system consisting of only the master
station and remote I/O stations. The remote I/O net mode allows cyclic transmission at
high speed, thus shortening the link scan time.
The table below lists the link scan times for both the remote I/O net mode and the
remote net mode.

Table 4.9
Number of stations Remote I/O net mode Remote net mode
8 0.61 ms 1.2 ms
16 0.94 ms 1.6 ms
32 1.61 ms 2.3 ms
64 2.94 ms 3.8 ms
(Transmission speed: at 10 Mbps)

[Setting method]
Set the remote I/O net mode in "Mode" of the network parameters
using GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see Section 6.6.

4 - 73 4 - 73
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future (Reserved station
function)

This function prevents remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and a
standby master station that are not actually connected (but to be connected in the
future) from being treated as "data link faulty stations" by the master station and local
stations.
When the master station is placed in the remote net ver.2 mode, points for reserved
stations can be set to 0.
Use GX Developer to set 0 points for reserved stations.
Although dedicated instructions are not usable for this setting, if reading from or writing
to reserved stations is disabled when refreshing cyclic data with FROM/TO
instructions, the same result is obtained.
Station that will be connected in the future

(Reserved station)
Station number 4

Local station
Master (occupies (Reserved station)
station 4 stations)
Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 8 Station number 10
Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station)

POINT
If a connected remote station, local station, intelligent device station, or standby
master station is specified as a reserved station, data link with the specified station
becomes disabled.

[Setting method]
Set the reserved function in "Station information setting" of the network
parameters using the GX Developer.
Make reserved station setting by choosing "Station information setting" -
"Reserve/invalid station select".
Make 0 points setting for the reserved station by choosing "Station
information setting" - "Remote station points".
For more details on the setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.5.

4 - 74 4 - 74
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection (Error invalid station setting
function)

This function prevents remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and a
standby master station that are powered off in the system configuration from being
treated as "data link faulty stations" by the master station and local stations, using the
network parameter settings.
Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station, problems occurring in that station
can no longer be detected. In addition, the error invalid station settings cannot be
changed while online because they are set with the network parameters.

Stations set as error invalid stations

Station number 4 Station number 7

Master Local station Local station

(occupies (occupies
station 1 station) 4 stations)
Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)

The station does not become data link faulty.

Station number 4 Station number 7

Local station Local station

Master (occupies (occupies
station 1 station) 4 stations)
Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations)

POINT
(1) If a remote station, a local station, an intelligent device station or the standby
master station that is set as an error invalid station is "specified as a reserved
station," the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting
function.

(2) If errors are generated at all the stations when they are set as error-invalid
stations, the "ERR." LED will light.

[Setting method]
Set the error invalid station setting function in "Station information setting"
of the network parameters using the GX Developer. For more details on the
setting, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

4 - 75 4 - 75
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan (Scan synchronous function)

This function selects whether or not the link scan should be synchronized with the
sequence scan.

(1) Synchronous mode

Performs data linking using the scan that is synchronized with the sequence
program.
(The sequence scan and link scan start at the same time.)
In the synchronous mode, the link scan interval becomes longer when the
sequence scan takes long because the link scan is synchronized with the
sequence scan.

IMPORTANT
While in the synchronous mode, the sequence scan time must not exceed the time
specified for the corresponding transmission speed, as listed below. If the scan
time exceeds the specified time, a time out error occurs at each station.
Transmission speed Sequence scan time
10 Mbps 50 ms
5 Mbps 50 ms
2.5 Mbps 100 ms
625 Mbps 400 ms
156 Mbps 800 ms

POINT
(1) The asynchronous mode is recommended for a mixed system of local stations
A(1S)J61BT11 and A(1S)J61QBT11 when the QJ61BT11N is used as the
master station. When using the synchronous mode, make sure to observe the
restrictions in (2) and (3) below.
(2) When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in
the synchronous mode and both the A(1S)J61BT11 and A(1S)J61QBT11 as
local stations, set the sequence scan time of the local station CPU to be
shorter than ST. For more details on "ST," see Section 5.1.
(3) When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in
the synchronous mode and both the A(1S)J61BT11 and A(1S)J61QBT11 as
local stations, use XnC as an interlock of the FROM/TO instructions on the
local station CPU side.
(4) When operating in the synchronous mode, the "L RUN" LED may be lit dimly.

(2) Asynchronous mode

Performs data linking without synchronizing with the sequence program.

(3) Setting method

Set the scan synchronous function in "Scan mode setting" of the network
parameters using the GX Developer. For more details on the setting, see
Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

4 - 76 4 - 76
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(4) Data flows in synchronous and asynchronous modes

The data flows in both the synchronous and asynchronous modes are explained
using examples of communications between the master station and remote I/O
stations.

(a) Data flow in the asynchronous mode

Programmable controller
CPU (Sequence scan)

Master station buffer memory

(Remote input RX)

Link scan
Response time of the first station
Response time of the corresponding station
Response time of the final station

Responses from remote

I/O stations

Input 1) Input 2) Input 3)

I II III IV

Transmission delay time

I: Delay time due to response delay of remote I/O station

II: Delay time of transmission from the remote I/O station to the master
station
III: Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer
memory
IV: Delay time until the master station's information is refreshed in the
programmable controller CPU

4 - 77 4 - 77
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Data flow in the synchronous mode

1) Sequence scan > Link scan

Programmable controller
CPU(Sequence scan)

Master station buffer memory

(Remote input RX)

Link scan
Response time of the first station
Response time of the corresponding station
Response time of the final station

Responses from remote

I/O stations

Input 1) Input 2)

I II III IV

Transmission delay time

I: Delay time due to response delay of remote I/O station

II: Delay time of transmission from the remote I/O station to the master
station
III: Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer
memory
IV: Delay time until the master station's information is refreshed in the
programmable controller CPU

4 - 78 4 - 78
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

2) Sequence scan < Link scan

Programmable controller
CPU(Sequence scan)

Master station buffer memory

(Remote input RX)

Link scan
Response time of the first station
Response time of the corresponding station
Response time of the final station

Responses from remote

I/O stations

Input 1) Input 2)

I II III IV

Transmission delay time

I: Delay time due to response delay of remote I/O station

II: Delay time of transmission from the remote I/O station to the master
station
III: Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer
memory
IV: Delay time until the master station's information is refreshed in the
programmable controller CPU

4 - 79 4 - 79
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.9 Replacing modules without error detection (Temporary error invalid station setting
function)

This function prevents remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and
the standby master station that are specified with the GX Developer from being treated
as "data link faulty stations" while online. It allows the replacement of modules while
online without error detection.

(1) Input/output status at temporary error invalid station setting

All the cyclic transmission data of the stations set as temporary error-invalid
stations is refreshed. However, when a station set as a temporary error-invalid
station becomes faulty, the input is retained and the output switches off.

(2) Setting method

Set the "Diagnostics" - "CC-Link / CC-Link/LT Diagnostics" - "Monitoring other
station ..." - "Invalid station if temporary error" using the GX Developer. Place the
cursor at the station to be set as a temporary error invalid station and click
"Setting/Cancel".

4 - 80 4 - 80
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.10 Checking operations for each local station (Data link stop/restart)

This function stops and restarts local data links. If the data link of the master station is
stopped, the data link of the entire system stops.

[Setting method]
Set the "CC-Link / CC-Link/LT Diagnostics" in "Diagnostics" using the GX
Developer.

(a) Specifying applicable module

Specify the module whose data link is stopped or restarted in "Module
setting".
Specification method: Module No.
I/O Address

(b) Execution of data link stop/restart

Perform these operations by setting "Start Data Link" or "Stop Data Link" in
the network test.

4 - 81 4 - 81
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.11 Station number overlap checking function

This function investigates the status of connected stations and checks for the
overlapping numbers of number of occupied stations and whether or not more than
one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system.

(1) Number of occupied station number overlap checking

Checks whether or not occupied station numbers duplicate.
(Example)
Local station (station number 1, Station Station Station Station
number of occupied stations: 4) number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4

Duplicate
Remote device station
Station Station
(station number 4, number of occupied stations: 2)
number 4 number 5

1) When there is an duplicate, the "ERR." LED flashes, and the duplicate status
is stored in SW0098 to SW009B (Station number overlap status).
2) Even if an overlap exists, the data link continues with the remaining normally
functioning stations.
3) By correcting the switch setting to normal and resetting the programmable
controller CPU of the master station, the "ERR." LED is turned off and the
data in SW0098 to SW009B can be cleared.

However, if the starting station number overlaps, it is excluded from the overlap
checking.
(Example)
Local station (station
Station Station Station Station Station Station
number 1, number of
number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5 number 6
occupied stations: 4)

Duplicate

Remote device station

Station Station
(station number 1, number
number 1 number 2
of occupied stations: 2)

Check the other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) for a data link
error. The station number setting of the station where a data link error has
occurred may be wrong.

(2) Station number 0 station overlap checking

Checks whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0
exists in the system.
1) When duplicating, the "ERR." LED lights up, an error code is stored in
SW006A (switch setting status), and SB006A (switch setting status) turns on.
2) By correcting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link, the
"ERR." LED is turned off and the data in SW006A can be cleared.

4 - 82 4 - 82
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.12 Multiple CPU system support

This function allows monitoring and reading/writing programs from/to any CPU in a
multiple CPU system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or other
station CPUs.
This is illustrated by the following example.
It is possible to monitor CPU4 of the local station from peripheral device A connected
to the AJ65BT-G4-S3 and read the programs of CPU2 of the master station from
peripheral device B connected to CPU3 of the local station.
This function cannot be used with function version A.
Master station

Power CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 QJ61

I/O I/O I/O
supply BT11N

Terminal
Peripheral
resistor
AJ65BT-G4-S3 device A

Reading of
programs

Monitoring

Local station

Power CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 QJ61

I/O I/O I/O
supply BT11N

Terminal
resistor

Peripheral
device B

POINT
Access source CPUs must be control CPUs in order to make an access.

4 - 83 4 - 83
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I/O stations (Remote I/O station points
setting)

The points of each remote I/O station can be set to 8, 16 or 32 points.

This saves the refresh device points of the programmable controller CPU.
The remote I/O station points setting can be used in the remote net ver. 2 mode only.
For parameter setting, use GX Developer of version 8.03D or later.
This function cannot be executed if the dedicated instruction is used for parameter
setting. This function can be executed when read/write from/to the CPU devices is
performed according to the I/O points of each station at cyclic data refresh using the
FROM/TO instruction.

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
Programmable (Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 4:
controller CPU Master station Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
Station Station Y07 to Y00
number 2 number 1
Station number 3
Y
Station Y07 to Y00
number 4
Y0F to Y00
to
Y0F to Y00
Y1F to Y10

8-point output module 8-point output module 16-point output module 32-point output module

Device area when remote I/O points setting is made

Device area when remote I/O points setting is not made

POINT
Set points to even-numbered 8-point setting remote I/O stations consecutively. If
points are set to odd-numbered 8-point setting remote stations, select 8 points + 8
points reserved in the "remote station points" setting of the last of the consecutive
remote I/O stations.
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 4:
Master station Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
Station Station Y07 to Y00
number 2 number 1
Station
reserved number 3
Station Y07 to Y00
number 4

8points+8points Y07 to Y00

(reserved)
Y0F to Y00
to
Y1F to Y10

8-point output module 8-point output module 8-point output module 32-point output module

Odd-numbered 8-point setting remote stations cannot be set for 8 remote station
points.
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 4:
Master station Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote output RY
Station Station Y07 to Y00
number 2 number 1
Station
number 3
Station number 4 Y07 to Y00

Y07 to Y00
Cannot be set.

to Y0F to Y00
Y1F to Y10

8-point output module 8-point output module 8-point output module 32-point output module

Refer to Section 6.4 for parameter setting.

4 - 84 4 - 84
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Setting method]
Using GX Developer, make setting by choosing "Station information
setting" - "Remote station points" in the network parameter dialog box.
For more details on the setting, see Section 6.4.

(1) Precautions for setting the remote I/O station points

The number of parameter-set remote I/O station points should be equal to or
greater than the number of I/O points of the mounted remote I/O stations. If it is
less than the number of I/O points of the mounted remote I/O stations, the
inputs/outputs after the set number of points will not operate normally.

4 - 85 4 - 85
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.4.14 Increasing the number of cyclic points (Remote net ver.2 mode)

This function increases the number of cyclic points.

When increasing the number of cyclic points, select one from the following two modes.
Remote net ver.2 mode .............. Mode suitable for configuring a new system
Remote net additional mode....... Mode suitable for adding a ver. 2 compatible
slave station to the existing ver. 1 system

In the remote net ver. 1 mode, the number of cyclic points cannot be increased.
When using GX Developer for setting, use Version 8.03D or later.

The number of cyclic points per module can be increased as indicated in the following
table.

Table 4.10
Expanded cyclic setting
single double quadruple octuple
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
Occupies 1 station
Remote register (RWw , RWr) 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points
Occupies 2 stations
Remote register (RWw , RWr) 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points
Occupies 3 stations
Remote register (RWw , RWr) 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points
Remote I/O (RX, RY) 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points
Occupies 4 stations
Remote register (RWw , RWr) 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points

4 - 86 4 - 86
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Remote net ver.2 mode

This mode is designed to configure a new system.
The number of cyclic points can be increased as indicated below.
Per station, RX/RY can be increased to up to 128 points and RWw/RWr to up to
32 points.
Per CC-Link network, RX/RY can be increased to up to 8192 points and
RWw/RWr to up to 2048 points.

Remote device station Local station Remote device station

Remote I/O station Ver. 2 compatible Ver.2 mode Ver. 2 compatible
Master station (Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 7:
Ver.2 mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 4 stations) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
Ver. 2 Station number 1 Output Station number 1
compatible
remote Station number 2 Remote output RY Station number 2
output RY
Station number 3 Station number 3

Station number 4 Station number 4

Station number 5 Station number 5

Station number 6 Station number 6

Station number 7 Station number 7 Remote output RY

to to

quadruple double octuple

POINT
(1) In the remote net ver. 2 mode, the remote registers of the remote I/O station are
set to 0 points.
(2) When the ver. 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted, the refresh
devices of the programmable controller CPU will vary by the number of points
set to the added or deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station
numbers after the added or deleted slave station. Confirm the varying number of
points in Table 4.8.

[Setting method]
Using GX Developer, set the network parameters.
For more details on the setting, see Section 6.4.

4 - 87 4 - 87
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Remote net additional mode

This mode is designed for use when slave stations including a ver. 2 compatible
station is added to the existing ver. 1 system.
The program of the existing system can be used as is.

Remote device station Local station Remote device station

Remote I/O station Ver. 1 compatible additional mode Ver. 2 compatible
Master station (Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 4: (Station number 8:
additional mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 2 stations) Occupies 4 stations) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
Ver. 1 Station number 1 Output Station number 1
compatible Station number 2 Station number 2
remote Station number 3 Remote output RY
Station number 3
output RY

to to

Ver. 2
compatible
remote
output RY
Station number 4 Station number 4

Station number 5 Station number 5

Station number 6 Station number 6

Station number 7 Station number 7

Station number 8 Station number 8 Remote output RY

to to

double octuple

POINT
(1) Set the station numbers of the slave stations to be added after the last station
number used in the existing system.
In the above example, the slave stations are added to and after station No. 4
since the existing system uses up to station No. 3.
(2) When the ver. 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted, the refresh
devices of the programmable controller CPU will vary by the number of points
set to the added or deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station
numbers after the added or deleted slave station. Confirm the varying number of
points in Table 4.8.
(3) In the remote net additional mode, the ver. 2 compatible slave station must be
placed in the latter half as described in (1).
When there is a possibility that ver. 1 compatible slave stations will be added in
the future in the remote net additional mode, set multiple reserved stations after
the ver. 1 compatible slave station to ensure ease of expanding the system.
(4) For the system that includes a standby master station, it is recommended to
change for the remote net ver. 2 mode.
When the remote net additional mode is used, the sequence program for the
standby master station must be corrected.

[Setting method]
Using GX Developer, set the network parameters.
For more details on the setting, see Section 6.5.

4 - 88 4 - 88
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Precautions for cyclic points increase setting

(a) Whether system can be configured or not
The following table indicates whether cyclic transmission can be made or not
in each station.

QJ61BT11 3
Slave station
AJ61BT11,
A1SJ61BT11,
QJ61BT11N AJ61QBT11, Remote station
A1SJ61QBT11, Intelligent device station
A80BD-J61BT11,
A80BD-J61BT13
Standby
Local Remote I/O
Local station Standby master station master Remote device station
station station station

Ver.2 Additional Ver.1 Ver.2 Additional Ver.1 Ver.1 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.1
Master station
mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible

1 1
Ver.2 mode
QJ61BT11N

2 1 1
Additional mode

Ver.1 mode
3
QJ61BT11

Ver.1 mode

: Cyclic transmission enabled, : Cyclic transmission enabled on condition, : Cyclic transmission disabled

1 When the master station is the QJ61BT11N in remote net Ver.2 mode or remote
net additional mode, and when the local station is the QJ61BT 11N in remote net
Ver.1 mode or the QJ61BT11, the local station can communicate with the master
station. However, Ver.2 compatible stations are recognized as faulty so that data
of these stations cannot be confirmed.

Local station Local station Remote device station Remote device station
Ver. 2 mode Ver. 1 mode Ver. 2 compatible Ver. 1 compatible
Master station (Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 4:
Ver. 2 mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX All 0s
Station number 1
Station number 2
Station number 3
Station number 4 Remote output RY
Ver. 2 compatible Ver. 2 compatible
remote output RY remote input RX
Station number 1 Station number 1
Station number 2 Station number 2
Station number 3 Station number 3 Remote output RY
Station number 4 Station number 4

to to

double quadruple

4 - 89 4 - 89
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

2 When the master station is in the remote net additional mode of the QJ61BT11N
and the local station is in the remote net ver. 2 mode of the QJ61BT11N, a link is
performed as shown in the following areas.

Local station Local station Local station Standby master station

Ver. 1 mode Ver. 2 mode additional mode additional mode
Master station (Station number 1: (Station number 2: (Station number 3: (Station number 7:
additional mode Occupies 1 station) Occupies 1 station) Occupies 4 stations) Occupies 1 station)
Remote input RX
Ver. 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 1
compatible Station number 2
remote
Station number 3
output RY
Station number 4
to Station number 5 to to
Station number 6
Station number 7
to

Ver. 2 Station number 1

compatible Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 2
remote
output RY Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3
Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4

Station number 5 Station number 5 Station number 5 Station number 5

Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 6

Station number 7 Station number 7 Station number 7 Station number 7

to to to to

double double octuple

3 The remote net ver. 2 mode and remote net additional mode cannot be used with
the QJ61BT11.

4 Data link is not available when the version set in the station type of the master
station information is different from that of the remote station.
For example, when the station type of the master station information is set as
"Ver.1 remote device station" although the actual remote device station is set to
"Ver.2 remote device station", data link cannot be performed with the "ERR." LED
on the master station flashing and the "L RUN" LED on the remote device station
turned OFF.

4 - 90 4 - 90
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Whether send/receive is enabled or not

The following table indicates whether send/receive of cyclic data is enabled
or not.

QJ61BT11N
Receive station
Master station

Ver.2 mode Additional mode Ver.1 mode

Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1
Send station compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible
area area area area area area
Ver.2 Ver. 2 compatible area — — — — — —
mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
Master Additional Ver. 2 compatible area — — — — — —
station mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
Ver.1 Ver. 2 compatible area — — — — — —
mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
QJ61BT11N
Ver.2 Ver. 2 compatible area — —
mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
Local Additional Ver. 2 compatible area — — — —
station mode Ver. 1 compatible area — — — — — —
Ver.1 Ver. 2 compatible area — — — — — —
mode Ver. 1 compatible area — —
Master
Ver.1 compatible — — — — — —
station
QJ61BT11
Local
Ver.1 compatible — —
station
Ver.2 compatible — —
Intelligent device station
Ver.1 compatible — —
Ver.2 compatible — —
Remote device station
Ver.1 compatible — —
Remote I/O station Ver.1 compatible — —

4 - 91 4 - 91
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 Remote

Intelligent device Remote device
Master Local I/O
Local station station station
station station station
Ver.2 mode Additional mode Ver1 mode
Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 1 Ver.1 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.1 Ver.1
compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible
area area area area area area
— — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — —
— — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — —

— — —

— — — — — — —

— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —

: Cyclic transmission enabled, : Cyclic transmission disabled, —:Prohibited

4 - 92 4 - 92
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

(4) Mismatch in number of points between parameter-set expanded

cyclic setting and installation status
If there is a mismatch in the number of points between the parameter-set
expanded cyclic setting and installation status, the QJ61T11N stores the error
code into SW0069. Also, it stores the matching status of each station into
SW009C.

(5) Precautions for modes between the master and local/standby

master stations
At any of the following settings, an error (error code: B3A0H) will occur at the
local station/standby master station.
If the error has occurred, correct the mode in the parameter of the master
station/local station/standby master station, and reset the programmable
controller CPU.
The mode set at the master station differs from the mode set at the standby
master station.
When the master station is set to the remote net ver. 1 mode, the local station is
set to the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode.
When the master station is set to the remote net ver. 2 mode, the local station is
set to remote net additional mode.

(6) Automatic refresh setting

(a) By specifying refresh devices, automatic refresh is performed in the END
processing of the programmable controller CPU.
The automatic refresh covers the areas from station No.1 to the station No.
set with the network parameter (including occupied stations).
(b) When the remote net additional mode is selected, data of station No.1 to the
last Ver.1 compatible station (including occupied stations) and data of Ver.2
compatible stations from its first station No. (the last Ver.1 compatible station
No. +1) to the last station No. are automatically refreshed to devices
specified in the first and last halves respectively.
(c) In the Ver.2 compatible remote register, data in the area up to the last
remote device or intelligent device station No. are refreshed.
(Example) In the case where the remote net additional mode, Ver.1
compatible station: No. 1 to 8, Ver.2 compatible station: No. 9 to
16 (occupying 1 station, quadruple setting), refresh devices
(first half): Y1000, and refresh devices (last half): Y1100 are set

Master station
remote output
Programmable 160H Station No.1
controller CPU
Y0000
16FH Station No.8
Y1000

Y10FF
Y1100

Master station
Ver.2 compatible remote output
Y12FF 4200H

4210H Station No.9

421FH Station No.16

4 - 93 4 - 93
4 FUNCTIONS
MELSEC-Q

4.5 Transient Transmission Functions

This section explains the transient transmission functions.

4.5.1 Performing transient transmission (Dedicated instructions)

The following dedicated instructions can be used for transient transmission.

Applicable Reference
Instruction Description
station section
Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified station
Appendix
G(P).RIRD or a programmable controller CPU device of a specified
2.2
Master station station.
Local station Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station or
Appendix
G(P).RIWT a programmable controller CPU device of a specified
2.3
station.
Appendix
G(P).RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified station.
2.2
Appendix
G(P).RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station.
2.3
Automatically performs a handshake with the specified
station and reads data from that station's buffer memory. Appendix
G(P).RIRCV
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. 2.4
AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Automatically performs a handshake with the specified
Intelligent station and writes data to that station's buffer memory. Appendix
G(P).RISEND
device station Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. 2.5
AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Reads data from the automatic update buffer of a
specified station. Appendix
G(P).RIFR
Available for modules that have the automatic update 2.6
buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Writes data to the automatic update buffer of a specified
station. Appendix
G(P).RITO
Available for modules that have the automatic update 2.7
buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).

4 - 94 4 - 94
 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME

This chapter explains the data link processing time such as the link scan time and
transmission delay time.

5.1 Link Scan Time

This section explains the CC-Link scan time. The following describes the method for
calculating the normal value and maximum value for the remote net mode or remote
I/O net mode.

[Link scan time (LS)]

(1) For remote net mode
LS = BT {27 + (NI 4.8) + (NW 9.6) + (N 30) + (ni 4.8) + (nw 9.6)} +
ST + EX + F + TR (μ s)
BT: Constant (transmission speed)

Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BT 51.2 12.8 3.2 1.6 0.8
5 NI: The final station number in A, B and C
(It includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the
reserved stations, and must be a multiple of 8.)
A: Last station number of remote I/O stations
B: Last station number of remote device stations (including the
number of occupied stations)
C: Last station number of local, standby master and intelligent device
stations (including the number of occupied stations)
NW: The final station number in B and C
(Includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved
stations, and must be a multiple of 8.)

Final station number 1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64

NI, NW 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64
N: Number of connected stations (excluding reserved stations)
ni: a + b + c (excluding reserved stations)
a: Total number of occupied stations for remote I/O stations
b: Total number of occupied stations for remote device stations
c: Total number of occupied stations for local stations, standby
master station and intelligent device stations
nw: b + c (excluding reserved stations)
ST: Constant
(The largest value found in 1) to 3) below. However, 2) is
disregarded when B = 0 and 3) is disregarded when C = 0)
1) 800 + (A 15)
2) 900 + (B 50)
3) For C ≤ 26 : 1200 + (C 100)
For C > 26 : 3700 + {(C - 26) 25}

5-1 5-1
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

EX: Constant (only when remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional
mode is used)
50 + total in the following table
Number of occupied
Occupies Occupies Occupies Occupies
stations
1 station 2 stations 3 stations 4 stations
Expanded cyclic setting
single 0 0 0 0
70 Number of 80 Number of 90 Number of 100 Number
double
stations stations stations of stations
90 Number of 110 Number 130 Number 150 Number
quadruple
stations of stations of stations of stations
110 Number 160 Number 210 Number 260 Number
octuple
of stations of stations of stations of stations

F: Return processing time {only when there is a faulty station (including

error invalid and temporary error invalid stations)}
Number of faulty stations 118 BT (1 + number of retries)

TR: Transient processing time (only when a transient request is made) 5

When there is a transient request from the master station
180 BT
When there is a transient request from the local station
40.8 BT number of transient transmission stations

(Example) Using the following system configuration when the transmission speed
is 10 Mbps (assuming that there is no faulty station or transient
transmission.)
Station
number 8 3
Station Station Station Station
number 1 1 number 2 2 number 4 3 number 12 1
Master Local
station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote
I/O station device station device station I/O station

1: (occupies 1 station) 2: (occupies 2 stations) 3: (occupies 4 stations)

quadruple single

BT = 0.8 ST = 2300 EX = 50 + 110 1 = 160

NI = 12 16 1) 800 + (12 15) = 980
NW = 11 16 2) 900 + (3 50) = 1050
N=5 3) 1200 + (11 100) = 2300
ni = 12 A = 12, B = 3, C = 11
nw = 10
LS = 0.8 {27 + (16 4.8) + (16 9.6) + (5 30) + (12 4.8) + (10 9.6)} +
2300 + 160
= 2908.8 [μ s]
= 2.91 [ms]

5-2 5-2
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) For remote I/O net mode

LS = BT {27 + (NI 4.8) + (N 30) + (ni 4.8)} + ST + F [μ s]
BT: Constant (transmission speed)

Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BT 51.2 12.8 3.2 1.6 0.8
NI: NI: Final station number (must be a multiple of 8)
Final station number 1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64
NI 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64
N: Number of connected modules
ni: Total number of occupied stations
ST: Constant
250 + (ni 10)
F: Return processing time {only when there is a faulty station (including
error invalid and temporary error invalid stations)}
Number of faulty stations 118 BT (1 + number of retries)

(Example) Using the following system configuration when the transmission speed
is 10 Mbps (assuming that there is no faulty station)

Station Station Station

number 1 1 number 2 1 number 3 1

Master
station Remote Remote Remote
I/O station I/O station I/O station

1: (occupies 1 station)

BT = 0.8 ST = 250 + (ni 10)

NI = 3 8 = 250 + (3 10)
N =3 = 280
ni = 3
LS = 0.8 {27 + (8 4.8) + (3 30) + (3 4.8)} + 280
= 415.84 [μ s]
= 0.42 [ms]

5-3 5-3
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.2 Transmission Delay Time

This section explains the transmission delay time (the time until data is transmitted).

5.2.1 Master station Remote I/O station

(1) Master station (RX) Remote I/O station (input)

This indicates the time from the moment a signal is input to a remote I/O station
until the corresponding CPU device turns ON (OFF).

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
Rio : Remote I/O response time

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rio {(SM×n)×1}+Rio SM+(LS×1)+Rio {(SM×n)×1}+Rio
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rio {(SM×n)×2}+Rio SM+(LS×2)+Rio {(SM×n)×2}+Rio

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
remote I/O response time of 1.5ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5 {(20×1)×1}+1.5 20+(3×1)+1.5 {(20×1)×1}+1.5
value = 24.5ms = 21.5ms = 24.5ms = 21.5ms
(20×1)+(3×2)+1.5 {(20×1)×2}+1.5 20+(3×2)+1.5 {(20×1)×2}+1.5
Max. value
= 27.5ms = 41.5ms = 27.5ms = 41.5ms

5-4 5-4
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) Master station (RY) Remote I/O station (output)

This indicates the time from the moment a CPU device turns ON (OFF) until a
remote I/O station output turns ON (OFF).

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
Rio : Remote I/O response time

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rio (SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rio SM+(LS×1)+Rio (SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rio
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rio (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rio SM+(LS×2)+Rio (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rio

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
remote I/O response time of 1.5ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5 20+(3×1)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5
value = 24.5ms = 24.5ms = 24.5ms = 24.5ms
(20×1)+(3×2)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×2)+1.5 20+(3×2)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×2)+1.5
Max. value
= 27.5ms = 27.5ms = 27.5ms = 27.5ms

5-5 5-5
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.2.2 Master station Remote device station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station)

(1) Master station (RX) Remote device station (RX),(RWr)

This indicates the time from when a signal is input to a remote device station until
the corresponding CPU device turns ON (OFF) or CPU device data is changed.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
Rd : Remote device station processing time

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rd {(SM×n)×1}+Rd SM+(LS×1)+Rd {(SM×n)×1}+Rd
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rd {(SM×n)×2}+Rd SM+(LS×2)+Rd {(SM×n)×2}+Rd

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
remote device station processing time of 1.5ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5 {(20×1)×1}+1.5 20+(3×1)+1.5 {(20×1)×1}+1.5
value = 24.5ms = 21.5ms = 24.5ms = 21.5ms
(20×1)+(3×2)+1.5 {(20×1)×2}+1.5 20+(3×2)+1.5 {(20×1)×2}+1.5
Max. value
= 27.5ms = 41.5ms = 27.5ms = 41.5ms

5-6 5-6
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) Master station (RY) Remote device station (RY),(RWr)

This indicates the time from when the CPU device turns ON (OFF) until the
remote device station output turns ON (OFF), or the time from when data are set
to a CPU device until the corresponding data on the remote device station is
changed.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
Rd : Remote device station processing time

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rd (SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rd SM+(LS×1)+Rd (SM×n)+(LS×1)+Rd
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rd (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rd SM+(LS×2)+Rd (SM×n)+(LS×2)+Rd

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
remote device station processing time of 1.5ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5 20+(3×1)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×1)+1.5
value = 24.5ms = 24.5ms = 24.5ms = 24.5ms
(20×1)+(3×2)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×2)+1.5 20+(3×2)+1.5 (20×1)+(3×2)+1.5
Max. value
= 27.5ms = 27.5ms = 27.5ms = 27.5ms

5-7 5-7
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.2.3 Master station Remote device station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station)

(1) Master station (RX) Remote device station (RX),(RWr)

This indicates the time from when a signal is input to a remote device station until
the corresponding CPU device turns ON (OFF) or CPU device data is changed.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
t : LS×m÷SM (Digits the past decimal point are rounded up to
the nearest integer.)
Rd : Remote device station processing time
m : Constant set in the extended cyclic setting

Expanded cyclic setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple

m 1 3 7 15

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×1×m)+Rd {(SM×t)×1}+Rd SM+(LS×1×m)+Rd {(SM×t)×1}+Rd
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×2×m)+Rd {(SM×t)×2}+Rd SM+(LS×2×m)+Rd {(SM×t)×2}+Rd

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms, and
the expanded cyclic setting "double".

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+(3×1×3)+1.5 {(20×1)×1}+1.5 20+(3×1×3)+1.5 {(20×1)×1}+1.5
value = 30.5ms = 21.5ms = 30.5ms = 21.5ms
(20×1)+(3×2×3)+1.5 {(20×1)×2}+1.5 20+(3×2×3)+1.5 {(20×1)×2}+1.5
Max. value
= 39.5ms = 41.5ms = 39.5ms = 41.5ms

5-8 5-8
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) Master station (RY) Remote device station (RY),(RWr)

This indicates the time from when a CPU device turns ON (OFF) until a remote
device station output turns ON (OFF), or the time from when data is set to a CPU
device until the corresponding data on the remote device station is changed.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
t : LS×m÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to
the nearest integer.)
Rd : Remote device station processing time
m : Constant set in the extended cyclic setting

Expanded cyclic setting Single Double Quadruple Octuple

m 1 3 7 15

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+[LS×{(1×m)+1}]+Rd (SM×t)+(LS×m)+Rd SM+[LS×{(1×m)+1}]+Rd (SM×t)+(LS×m)+Rd
value
Max. value (SM×n)+[LS×{(2×m)+1}]+Rd (SM×t)+(LS×m)+Rd SM+[LS×{(2×m)+1}]+Rd (SM×t)+(LS×m)+Rd

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
the expanded cyclic setting "double".

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+[3×{(1×3)+1}]+1.5 (20×1)+(3×3)+1.5 20+[3×{(1×3)+1}]+1.5 (20×1)+(3×3)+ 1.5
value = 33.5ms = 30.5ms = 33.5ms = 30.5ms
(20×1)+[3×{(2×3)+1}]+1.5 (20×1)+(3×3)+1.5 20+[3×{(2×3)+1}]+1.5 (20×1)+(3×3)+1.5
Max. value
= 42.5ms = 30.5ms = 42.5ms = 30.5ms

5-9 5-9
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.2.4 Master station Local station (Ver. 1 compatible slave station)

(1) Master station (RX) Local station (RY), Master station (RWr)
Local station (RWw)
This indicates the time from the moment a local station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the corresponding master station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
Or, it indicates the time from when data is set in a local station CPU device until
data is stored to a master station CPU device.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
SL : Local station sequence program scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
k : LS÷SL (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×2)+{SL×(k+1)} {(SM×n)×2}+LS+{SL×(k+1)} SM+(LS×2)+SL {(SM×n)×2}+LS+SL
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×3)+{SL×(k+1)} {(SM×n)×3}+LS+{SL×(k+1)} SM+(LS×3)+SL {(SM×n)×3}+LS+SL

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
local station sequence scan time of 10ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1)+(3×2)+{10×(1+1)} {(20×1)×2}+{10×(1+1)} 20+(3×2)+10 {(20×1)×2}+10
value = 46ms = 60ms = 36ms = 50ms
(20×1)+(3×3)+ {10×(1+1)} {(20×1)×3}+{10×(1+1)} 20+(3×3)+10 {(20×1)×3}+10
Max. value
= 49ms = 80ms = 39ms = 70ms

5 - 10 5 - 10
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) Master station (RY) Local station (RX), Master station (RWw)
Local station (RWr)
This indicates the time from the moment a master station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the corresponding local station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
Or, it indicates the time from when data is set to a master station CPU device
until data is stored in the corresponding local station CPU device.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
SL : Local station sequence program scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
k : LS÷SL (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal
(SM×n)+(LS×2)+{SL×(k+1)} (SM×n)+ (LS×2)+{SL×(k+1)} SM+(LS×2)+SL (SM×n)+(LS×2)+SL
value
Max. value (SM×n)+(LS×3)+{SL×(k+1)} (SM×n)+(LS×2)+{SL×(k+1)} SM+(LS×3)+SL (SM×n)+(LS×2)+SL

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms and
local station sequence scan time of 10ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (20×1) + (3×2) +{10×(1+1)} (20×1) + (3×2) +{10×(1+1)} 20+ (3×2) +10 (20×1) + (3×2) +10
value =46ms =46ms =36ms =36ms
(20×1) + (3×3) +{10×(1+1)} (20×1) + (3×2) +{10×(1+1)} 20+ (3×3) +10 (20×1) + (3×2) +10
Max. value
=49ms =46ms =39ms =36ms

5 - 11 5 - 11
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.2.5 Master station Local station (Ver. 2 compatible slave station)

(1) Master station (RX) Local station (RY), Master station (RWr)
Local station (RWw)
This indicates the time from the moment a local station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the corresponding master station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
Or, it indicates the time from when data is set to a local station CPU device until
the data is stored to the corresponding master station CPU device.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
SL : Local station sequence program scan time
n : LS SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
t : LS x m SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
k : LS SL (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
m : Constant set in the extended cyclic setting

Expanded cyclic
Single Double Quadruple Octuple
setting
m 1 3 7 15

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (SM×n) + [LS×{(1×m) {(SM×t)×2}+{SL×(k+1)} SM+ [LS×{(1×m) +1}]+SL (SM×t)×2
value +1}]+{SL×(k+1)}
(SM×n) + [LS×{(2×m) {(SM×t)×3}+{SL×(k+1)} SM+ [LS×{(2×m) +1}]+SL (SM×t)×3
Max. value
+1}]+{SL×(k+1)}

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms,
expanded cyclic setting of "double", and local station sequence scan
time of 10ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
(20×1) + [3×{(1×3) {(20×1)×2}+{10×(1+1)} 20+ [3×{(1×3) +1}]+10 (20×1)×2
Normal
+1}]+{10×(1+1)} =60ms =41ms =40ms
value
=52ms
(20×1) + [3×{(2×3) {(20×1)×3}+{10×(1+1)} 20+ [3×{(2×3) +1}]+10 (20×1)×3
Max. value +1}]+{10×(1+1)} =80ms =51ms =60ms
=61ms

5 - 12 5 - 12
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) Master station (RY) Local station (RX), Master station (RWw)
Local station (RWr)
This indicates the time from the moment a master station CPU device turns ON
(OFF) until the corresponding local station CPU device turns ON (OFF).
Or, it indicates the time from when data is set to a master station CPU device
until the data is stored to the corresponding local station CPU device.

[Expression]
The meanings of symbols in the table are as follows:
SM : Master station sequence program scan time
LS : Link scan time
SL : Local station sequence program scan time
n : LS÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
t : LS x m÷SM (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the
nearest integer.)
k : LS÷SL (Digits past the decimal point are rounded up to the nearest
integer.)
m : Constant set in the extended cyclic setting

Expanded cyclic
Single Double Quadruple Octuple
setting
m 1 3 7 15

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
Normal (SM×n) + [LS×{(1×m) {(SM×t)×1}+{SL×(k+1)} SM+ [LS×{(1×m) +1}]+SL {(SM×t)×1}+SL
value +1}]+{SL×(k+1)}
(SM×n) + [LS×{(2×m) {(SM×t)×2}+{SL×(k+1)} SM+ [LS×{(2×m) +1}]+SL {(SM×t)×2}+SL
Max. value
+1}]+{SL×(k+1)}

Calculation example:
Master station sequence scan time of 20ms, link scan time of 3ms,
expanded cyclic setting of "double", and local station sequence scan
time of 10ms

Calculation With block guarantee of cyclic data per station Without block guarantee of cyclic data per station
value Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode
(20×1) + [3×{(1×3) {(20×1)×1}+{10×(1+1)} 20+ [3×{(1×3) +1}]+10 {(20×1)×1}+10
Normal value +1}]+{10×(1+1)} =40ms =42ms =30ms
=52ms
(20×1) + [3×{(2×3) {(20×1)×2}+{10×(1+1)} 20+ [3×{(2×3) +1}]+10 {(20×1)×2}+10
Max. value +1}]+{10×(1+1)} =60ms =51ms =50ms
=61ms

5 - 13 5 - 13
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.2.6 Master station Intelligent device station

The transmission delay time between the master station and an intelligent device
station varies by the type of intelligent device station used.
See the User's Manual for the intelligent device module to be used.

5 - 14 5 - 14
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions

This indicates the dedicated instruction processing time (the time from the moment an
instruction is issued until a response is received).

5.3.1 Master station Local station

(1) Master station local station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master
station until a response from the local station is received.

[Expression]
[Maximum value]
(a) G(P).RIRD instruction
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL + (WT RT
2
1000) [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant
Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SL: Local station sequence program scan time
(0 when reading buffer memory in the CC-Link)
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the read
points are 20 words (buffer memory in the CC-Link), the monitoring
time is 10 s, and the number of retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL +
(WT RT 1000) [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + 0 + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}] + 0
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
1: Round up below the decimal point
2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

5 - 15 5 - 15
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(b) G(P).RIWT instruction

OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + SL + (WT RT
2
1000) [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant
Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SL: Local station sequence program scan time
(0 when writing buffer memory in the CC-Link)
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the write
points are 20 words (buffer memory in the CC-Link), the monitoring
time is 10 s, and the number of retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + SL + (WT
RT 1000) [ms]
1
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/72} 1.13] + 0 + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {1 1.13}] + 0
= 66.15
= 66.2 [ms]

1: Round up below the decimal point

2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

(2) Local station Master station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the local
station until a response from the master station is received.

[Expression]
[Maximum value]
(a) G(P).RIRD instruction
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + SM + (WT RT
2
1000) [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant

Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SM: Master station sequence program scan time
(0 when reading buffer memory in the CC-Link)
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

5 - 16 5 - 16
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the read
points are 20 words (buffer memory in the CC-Link), the monitoring
time is 10 s, and the number of retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + SM + (WT
RT 1000) [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + 0 + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {1 1.13}] + 0
= 66.15
= 66.2 [ms]
1: Round up below the decimal point
2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

(b) G(P).RIWT instruction

OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SM + (WT RT
2
1000) [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant

Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SM: Master station sequence program scan time
(0 when writing buffer memory in the CC-Link)
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5ms, the write
points are 20 words (buffer memory in the CC-Link), the monitoring
time is 10 s, and the number of retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SM + (WT
RT 1000) [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + 0 + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}] + 0
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]

1: Round up below the decimal point

2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

5 - 17 5 - 17
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.3.2 Local station Local station

(1) Local station Local station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is executed by one local
station until a response from another local station is received.

[Expression]
[Maximum value]
(a) G(P).RIRD instruction
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL + (WT RT
2
1000) [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant
Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SL: Target station sequence program scan time
(0 when reading buffer memory in the CC-Link)
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the read
points are 20 words (buffer memory in the CC-Link), the monitoring
time is 10 s, and the number of retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL + (WT
RT 1000) [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + 0 + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}] + 0
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
1: Round up below the decimal point
2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

5 - 18 5 - 18
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(b) G(P).RIWT instruction

OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL + (WT RT
2
1000) [ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant
Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
SL: Target station sequence program scan time
(0 when writing buffer memory in the CC-Link)
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the write
points are 20 words (buffer memory in the CC-Link), the monitoring
time is 10 s, and the number of retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + SL + (WT
RT 1000) [ms]
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + 0 + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}] + 0
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]

1: Round up below the decimal point

2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

5 - 19 5 - 19
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.3.3 Master station Intelligent device station

(1) Master station Intelligent device station

This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master
station and a response from an intelligent device station is received.

[Expression]
[Maximum value]
(a) G(P).RIRD instruction
1
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1.067] + (WT RT 1000)
2
[ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant
Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the read
points are 20 words, the monitoring time is 10 s, and the number of
retries is zero..
OT + LS [BC + {(read points + 16)/16} 1 1.067] + (WT RT
1000) [ms]
1
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/16} 1.067] + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {3 1.067}] + 0
= 76.505
= 76.5 [ms]
1: Round up below the decimal point
2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

5 - 20 5 - 20
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(b) G(P).RIWT instruction

1
OT + LS × [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1.13] + (WT RT 1000)
2
[ms]
OT: QCPU (Q mode) dedicated instruction processing time
Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU: 1 [ms]
QCPU (Q mode) (except Basic model QCPU, Q02CPU): 0.5 [ms]
LS: Link scan time (see Section 5.1)
BC: Constant

Transmission speed 156 kbps 625 kbps 2.5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps
BC 6 7 9 11 12
WT: Monitoring time set in SW0009 (see Section 8.4.2.)
RT: Number of retries set in SW000B (see Section 8.4.2.)

(Example) When the programmable controller CPU type is Q06HCPU, the

transmission speed is 10 Mbps, the link scan time is 5 ms, the write
points are 20 words, the monitoring time is 10 s, and the number of
retries is zero.
OT + LS [BC + {(write points + 16)/72} 1 1.13] + (WT RT
1000) [ms]
1
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {(20 + 16)/72} 1.13] + (10 0 1000)
= 0.5 + 5 [12 + {1 1.13}] + 0
= 66.15
= 66.2 [ms]

1: Round up below the decimal point

2: Time elapsed when retries of a dedicated instruction occur

5 - 21 5 - 21
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.4 Link Refresh Time

This section indicates link refresh time (increase of END processing time at the
programmable controller CPU).

5.4.1 Master station/local station

This section indicates the link refresh time of the master/local station.

(1) Remote net ver. 1 mode, remote net ver. 2 mode

[Expression]
KM1+(KM2+KM3) E+(No. of CC-Link modules-1) KM4 [ms]

RX+RY+SB
E= +RWw+RWr+SW
16
RX : Total points of the remote input (RX) refreshed by the master/local
station
RY : Total points of the remote output (RY) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWw : Total points of the remote register (RWw) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWr : Total points of the remote register (RWr) refreshed by the master/local
station
SB : Total points of the link special relay (SB) refreshed by the master/local
station
SW : Total points of the link special register (SW) refreshed by the
master/local station

KM1 : Constant
1) Master station
KM1
Constant
CPU type With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of cyclic
cyclic data per station data per station
Q00JCPU – 0.83
Q00CPU – 0.68
Q01CPU – 0.66
Q02CPU 0.58 0.51
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 0.24 0.22
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU – 0.22
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.32 0.31
Q02UCPU 0.32 0.31
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
0.25 0.13
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU

-: Does not support the block guarantee of cyclic data per station.

5 - 22 5 - 22
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

1
2) Local station

KM1
Constant With block guarantee of Without block guarantee of cyclic
CPU type cyclic data per station data per station function not set
function set
Q00JCPU – 1.05
Q00CPU – 0.86
Q01CPU – 0.79
Q02CPU 0.81 0.74
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, 0.31 0.29
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.70 0.60
Q02UCPU 0.70 0.60
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU,
0.43 0.30
Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU,
Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU

-: Does not support the block guarantee of cyclic data per station.
1 For the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU, local station setting is not available.

KM2, KM3, KM4 : Constant

Not influenced by the block guarantee of cyclic data per station
1) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit
-3
Constant KM3 ( 10 ) KM4
CPU type When file When file
-3
KM2 ( 10 ) register on register on
memory card memory card
is used is not used
Q00JCPU 0.91 – –
Q00CPU 0.83 – –
Q01CPU 0.79 – –
Q02CPU 0.48 0.32 – 0.5
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, 0.43 0.14 – 0.2
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU 0.43 0.14 – 0.2
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.39 – 0.2
Q02UCPU 0.39 0.05 – 0.2
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, 0.23 0.03 – 0.2
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU

5 - 23 5 - 23
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

2) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit

-3
Constant KM3 ( 10 ) KM4
CPU type When file When file
-3
KM2 ( 10 ) register on register on
memory card memory card
is used is not used
Q00JCPU 1.62 – –
Q00CPU 1.57 – –
Q01CPU 1.55 – –
Q02CPU 1.02 0.08 – 0.5
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, 0.98 0.06 – 0.2
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU 0.98 0.06 – 0.2
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 1.02 – 0.2
Q02UCPU 1.02 0.05 – 0.2
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, 0.90 0.03 – 0.2
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU

(Example)
When the programmable controller CPU type is the Q06HCPU, the
QJ61BT11N is mounted on the main base and used as the master
station, and 2048 points of RX, 2048 points of RY, 256 points of RWw,
256 points of RWr, 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed
besides the file register.

(a) When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is enabled
RX+RY+SB
E= +RWw+RWr+SW
16
2048+2048+512
= +256+256+512
16
=1312

KM1+(KM2+KM3) E+(No. of CC-Link modules-1) KM4

=0.24+(0.00043+0) 1312+(1-1) 0.2
=0.80416
=0.80 [ms]

(b) When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is not
enabled
KM1+(KM2+KM3) E+(No. of CC-Link modules-1) KM4

=0.22+(0.00043+0) 1312+(1-1) 0.2

=0.78416
=0.78 [ms]

5 - 24 5 - 24
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

(2) Remote net additional mode

[Expression]
KM1+(KM2+KM3) E+(No. of CC-Link modules-1) KM4 [ms]

E= RX+RX2+RY+RY2+SB +RWw+RWw2+RWr+Rwr2+SW
16
RX : Points of the remote input (RX) refreshed by the master/local station
RX2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote input (RX) refreshed by the master/local
station
RY : Points of the remote output (RY) refreshed by the master/local station
RY2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote output (RY) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWw : Points of the remote register (RWw) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWw2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote register (RWw) refreshed by the master/local
station
RWr : Points of the remote register (RWr) refreshed by the master/local station
RWr2 : Points of the ver. 2 remote register (RWr) refreshed by the master/local
station
SB : Points of the link special relay (SB) refreshed by the master/local station
SW : Points of the link special register (SW) refreshed by the master/local
station
KM1 : Constant
1) Master station

KM1
Constant
With block guarantee of cyclic Without block guarantee of
CPU type
data per station cyclic data per station
Q00JCPU – 1.05
Q00CPU – 0.86
Q01CPU – 0.80
Q02CPU 0.75 0.68
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 0.30 0.28
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU – 0.28
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.88 0.85
Q02UCPU 0.55 0.43
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, 0.25 0.17
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU

-: Does not support the block guarantee of cyclic data per station.

5 - 25 5 - 25
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

1
2) Local station
KM1
Constant With block guarantee of cyclic Without block guarantee of
CPU type data per station function set cyclic data per station function
not set
Q00JCPU – 1.27
Q00CPU – 1.04
Q01CPU – 0.93
Q02CPU 0.94 0.87
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 0.40 0.38
Q25PHCPU
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.91 0.85
Q02UCPU 0.73 0.60
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, 0.47 0.35
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU

-: Does not support the block guarantee of cyclic data per station.
1 For the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU, local station setting is not available.

KM2, KM3, KM4 : Constant

Not influenced by the block guarantee of cyclic data per station function
1) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit
-3
Constant KM3 ( 10 )
CPU type When file When file
-3
KM2 ( 10 ) register on register on KM4
memory card memory card
is used is not used
Q00JCPU 0.91 ---- ----
Q00CPU 0.83 ---- ----
Q01CPU 0.79 ---- ----
Q02CPU 0.48 0.32 ---- 0.5
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 0.43 0.14 ---- 0.2
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU 0.43 0.14 ---- 0.2
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.33 ---- 0.2
Q02UCPU 0.33 0.05 ---- 0.2
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
0.23 0.03 ---- 0.2
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU

5 - 26 5 - 26
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

2) When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit

-3
Constant KM3 ( 10 )
CPU type When file When file
-3
KM2 ( 10 ) register on register on KM4
memory card memory card
is used is not used
Q00JCPU 1.62 ---- ----
Q00CPU 1.57 ---- ----
Q01CPU 1.55 ---- ----
Q02CPU 1.02 0.08 ---- 0.5
Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, 0.98 0.06 ---- 0.2
Q25PHCPU
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU 0.98 0.06 ---- 0.2
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU 0.95 ---- 0.2
Q02UCPU 0.95 0.05 ---- 0.2
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q26UDHCPU, Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU,
0.90 0.03 ---- 0.2
Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU,
Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU

(Example)
When the programmable controller CPU type is the Q06HCPU, the
QJ61BT11N is mounted on the main base and used as the master
station, and 1024 points of RX, 896 points of RX2, 1024 points of RY,
896 points of RY2, 128 points of RWw, 128 points of RWw2, 128 points
of RWr, 128 points of RWr2, 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are
refreshed besides the file register.

(a) When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is enabled
RX+RX2+RY+RY2+SB
E= +RWw+RWw2+RWr+RWr2+SW
16
1024+896+1024+896+512
= +128+128+128+128+512
16
= 1296

KM1+(KM2+KM3) E+(No. of CC-Link modules-1) KM4

= 0.30+(0.00043+0) 1296+(1-1) 0.2
= 0.85728
= 0.86 [ms]

(b) When the block guarantee of cyclic data per station is not
enabled
KM1+(KM2+KM3)+ E+(No. of CC-Link modules-1) KM4
= 0.28+(0.00043+0) 1296+(1-1) 0.2
= 0.83728
= 0.84 [ms]

5 - 27 5 - 27
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.5 Station Status at Error Occurrence

This section explains the status of each station at error occurrence.

5.5.1 Status of the master station, standby master station (when the master station is
operating) and remote I/O station at error occurrence

Table 5.1 lists the operation of the master station, standby master station (when the
master station is operating) and remote I/O station upon the occurrence of an error.
Table 5.1 The status of the master station, standby master station
(when the master station is operating) and remote I/O station at error occurrence
Master station, standby master station
Remote I/O station
(when the master station is operating)
Data link status
Remote output Remote Remote register
Remote input (RX) Input Output
(RY) register (RWw) (RWr)
When data link is stopped due to an error generated
1 1
by the master station programmable controller CPU Continue Continue Hold Continue
(data link continue)
When data link is stopped due to an error generated
2
by the local station programmable controller CPU Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue
(data link continue)
The GX Developer
When data link for Clear Clear
data link faulty By external
the entire system is Undefined Undefined Hold All points OFF
station is set (master signals
stopped Hold Hold
station setting)
Clears the receive area
from the remote I/O
When a Clear Continues Continues
The GX Developer station having a
communication error operation of operation of
data link faulty communication error By external
(power off, etc.) Continue areas other than areas other than All points OFF
station is set (master Retains the receive signals
occurs in a remote the remote I/O the remote I/O
station setting) area from the remote
I/O station Hold station station
I/O station with a
communication error
Clears the receive
Retains the Continue Continue
area from the remote
When a Clear receive area (Not affected by (Not affected by
The GX Developer device station with a
communication error from the remote the the
data link faulty communication error
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue device station communication communication
station is set (master Retains the receive
occurs in a remote with a status of the status of the
station setting) area from the remote
device station Hold communication remote device remote device
device station with a
error station) station)
communication error.
Clears the receive
area from the local Retains the Continue Continue
When a Clear
The GX Developer station with a receive area (Not affected by (Not affected by
communication error
data link faulty communication error from the local the the
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue
station is set (master Retains the receive station with a communication communication
occurs in a local
station setting) area from the local communication status of the status of the
station Hold
station with a error local station) local station)
communication error

1: If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions, the data is
held. If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer, the data is cleared
when the RY refresh device is set to Y, the data is cleared or held when the RY
refresh device is set to other than Y. (See Section 4.3.5.)
2: When the RY refresh device is set to "Y" for the local station that has stopped,
only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station ; the receive area is
retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y. (See
Section 4.3.5.) Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations.

5 - 28 5 - 28
5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME
MELSEC-Q

5.5.2 Status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station (when the
local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence

Table 5.2 lists the status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station
(when the local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence.
Table 5.2 The status of the remote device station, local station, standby master station
(when the local station is operating) and intelligent device station at error occurrence
Remote device station, Local station, standby master station
intelligent device station (when local station is operating)
Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote
Remote Remote Remote Remote output
register register register register
input (RX) output (RY) input (RX) (RY)
(RWw) (RWr) (RWw) (RWr)
When data link is stopped due to an error generated
1
by the master station programmable controller CPU Continue Continue Continue Clear Continue Continue Continue
(data link continue)
When data link is stopped due to an error generated
3
by the local station programmable controller CPU Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue
(data link continue)
Clears the receive
The GX Developer Clear Clear areas from other Retains the
When data link for
data link faulty All points stations receive area
the entire system is Undefined Undefined Undefined Hold
station is set (local OFF Retains the receive from other
stopped
station setting) Hold Hold areas from other stations
stations
Clears the receive
area from a remote
Clear I/O station with a
When a
The GX Developer communication
communication error
data link faulty error
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue
station is set (local Retains the receive
occurs in a remote
station setting) area from a remote
I/O station
Hold I/O station with a
communication
error
Clears the receive
Retains the
area from a remote
receive area
Clear device station with
When a from a
The GX Developer a communication
communication error remote
data link faulty error
(power off, etc.) Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Continue device Continue
station is set (local Retains the receive
occurs in a remote station with
station setting) area from a remote
device station a
Hold device station with
communica-
a communication
tion error
error
Clears the receive
area from a local
Retains the
Clear station with a
When a receive area
The GX Developer communication
communication error from a local
data link faulty error
(power off, etc.) Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station with Continue
station is set (local Retains the receive
occurs in a local a
station setting) area from a local
station communica-
Hold station with a
tion error
communication
error

1: If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions, the data is
held. If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer, the data is clear
when the RY refresh device is set to Y, the data is cleared or held when the RY
refresh device is set to other than Y. (See Section 4.3.5.)
2: When the RY refresh device is set to "Y" for the local station that has stopped,
only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station; the receive area is
retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y. (See
Section 4.3.5.) Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations.
5 - 29 5 - 29
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6 PARAMETER SETTINGS

This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perform data link with
the CC-Link.

6.1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup

The following explains the procedure from setting the parameters to starting the data
link.

6.1.1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory

The following explains the relationship between the CPU parameter area and the
master station's parameter memory.

(1) CPU parameter area

This area is used to set the basic values for controlling the programmable
controller system and the network parameters that control the CC-Link system.

(2) Master station parameter memory

This area stores the network parameters for the CC-Link system.
When the module is powered off or the programmable controller CPU is reset,
the network parameters are erased.
6
Programmable
controller CPU Master station

Parameter area Parameter memory

Power ON
CC-Link system CPU reset CC-Link system
network network
parameter area parameter area

6-1 6-1
 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.1.2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer

Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup:
Programmable
GX Developer controller CPU Master station
The GX Developer is used
to create the network CC-Link system
parameters and parameter area Parameter memory
automatic refresh Network Network Network
parameters, which are parameters parameters parameters
then written to the Automatic refresh Automatic refresh
programmable controller parameters parameters
CPU.

When the programmable Programmable

controller system is GX Developer controller CPU Master station
powered ON or the
programmable controller CC-Link system
CPU is reset, the network parameter area Parameter memory
parameters in the Network Network Network
programmable controller parameters parameters parameters
CPU are transferred to
Automatic refresh Automatic refresh
the master station and
parameters parameters
the data link is
automatically started.

6
6.1.3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction

Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup:
Programmable
GX Developer is used to GX Developer controller CPU Master station
create the PLC parameters
(I/O assignment setting)
and a sequence program Program memory
(containing the G(P).
RLPASET instruction), PLC parameter PLC parameter Parameter area
which are then written to
Sequence program Sequence program Network
the programmable (G(P).RLPASET instruction) (G(P).RLPASET instruction)
controller CPU. parameter

Turn the power supply to

the programmable
controller system on, or Programmable
reset the programmable GX Developer controller CPU Master station
controller CPU. Stop
and then run the
programmable controller Program memory
CPU to execute the
sequence program. The PLC parameter PLC parameter
network parameters are Parameter area
set and the data link is Sequence program Sequence program Network
started by the (G(P).RLPASET instruction) (G(P).RLPASET instruction) parameter
G(P).RLPASET instruction.
The G(P).RLPASET
instruction is completed
after the data link is started.

6-2 6-2
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.2 Parameter Setting Items

Table 6.1 lists the items to be stored in the master station parameter memory.
Table 6.1 Parameter setting items (1/2)
Standby
Reference Master Local
Setting item Description master
section station station station
Sets the input data status from the data link disorder station.
Data link
Default value : Clear Section
disorder station
Setting range : Hold input data 4.3.4
setting
: Clear
Sets whether slave stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared in case of
programmable controller CPU STOP.
Case of CPU Section
Default value : Refresh
STOP setting 4.3.5
Setting range : Refresh
: Clears compulsorily
Block Specifies whether or not to secure cyclic data on a per-station basis.
guarantee of Default value : Disable Section
cyclic data per Setting range : Disable 4.3.8
station Enable
Number of Sets the number of occupied local and standby master stations.
occupied Default value : Occupies 1 station ———
stations Setting range : Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Makes the expanded cyclic setting of the local station.
Expanded Section
Default value : single
cyclic setting 4.4.14
Setting range : single, double, quadruple, octuple
Sets the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations
Number of and standby master station that are connected to the master station (including
connected reserved stations). ———
modules Default value : 64 (modules)
Setting range : 1 to 64 (modules)
Sets the number of retries when a communication error occurs.
Number of
Default value : 3 (times) ———
retries
Setting range : 1 to 7 (times)
Sets the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations
Number of and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single
Section
automatic link scan.
4.3.2
return modules Default value : 1 (module)
Setting range : 1 to 10 (modules)
Standby Specifies the station number of the standby master station.
Section
master station Default value : Blank (no standby master station specified)
4.3.6
specification Setting range : Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Specifies the data link status when a master station programmable controller CPU
Operation
error occurs.
specification Section
Default value : Stop
when CPU is 4.3.3
Setting range : Stop
down
: Continue
Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan.
Scan mode Default value : Asynchronous Section
specification Setting range : Asynchronous 4.4.8
: Synchronous
Delay time
Set 0 for the delay time. ———
setting
Specifies the reserved station.
Reserved
Default value : Not specified Section
station
Setting range : Not specified 4.4.6
specification
: Specified
Specifies the error invalid station.
Error invalid
Default value : Not specified Section
station
Setting range : Not specified 4.4.7
specification
: Specified
"Number of exclusive stations" on the screen is described as "Number of occupied stations" in this manual.
"Exclusive station 1" on the screen is described as "Occupies 1 station" in this manual.

6-3 6-3
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

Table 6.1 Parameter setting items (2/2)

Standby
Reference Master Local
Setting item Description master
section station station
station
Set the station information according to the connected remote station, local station,
intelligent device station and standby master station.
Default value : Ver.1 remote I/O station, occupies 1 station,
station number 1 to Ver.1 remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station, station number 64
Station
Setting range ———
information
Station type : Remote I/O station, remote device station,
intelligent device station/Ver.1, Ver.2 (single,
double, quadruple, octuple)
Number of occupied stations : 1 to 4
Station number : 1 to 64
Specifies the assignments of buffer memory sizes during transient transmission to
a local station, a standby master station and an intelligent device station.
Default values
Send buffer size : 40H (64) (word)
Receive buffer size : 40H (64) (word)
Assignments of Automatic update buffer size : 80H (128) (word)
communication Setting range
buffer and Communication buffer size : 0H (0) (word) (Not specified), or 40H (64) (word) to ———
automatic 1000H (4096) (word)
update buffer However, the total communication buffer size
must be 1000H (4096) (word) or less.
Automatic update buffer : 0H (0) (word) (Not specified), or 80H (128) (word)
to 1000H (4096) (word)
However, the total automatic buffer size must be
1000H (4096) (word) or less.

POINT
(1) For the communication buffer size, specify the size that is calculated by adding
seven words to the data size to be sent or received.
For the automatic update buffer size, specify the size required for each
intelligent device station.
(2) The network parameters other than operational settings and mode setting are
also made valid when the programmable controller CPU is switched from
STOP to RUN.
(3) When changing the parameters and settings of master station or slave station,
stop the data link by the master station and then make the changes.
(4) When changing the parameters and settings of slave station, change the
parameters of master station along with the slave station change.

6-4 6-4
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

Table 6.2 indicates the reference sections for the detailed explanation of the parameter
setting methods.
Table 6.2
Reference
Mode
section
Remote net ver.1 mode Section 6.3
Parameter setting with Remote net ver.2 mode Section 6.4
GX Developer Remote net additional mode Section 6.5
Remote I/O net mode Section 6.6
Remote net ver.1 mode
Parameter setting with
Remote net ver.2 mode Section 6.7
dedicated instruction
Remote net additional mode

6-5 6-5
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.1 mode)

This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer. For more details
on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system
configuration.
Station
number 4 Station
Station Station Station number 9
Master number 1 number 2 Local station number 8 Intelligent
station Remote Remote (occupies Reserved device station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station device station 4 stations) station (occupies
(occupies (occupies (occupies
1 station) 2 station) 1 station)
4 stations)

6.3.1 Master station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module " for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Modules for the parameter setting with the G(P).RLPASET
instruction should not be included in the setting for "No. of
boards in module ".
Example) Set 1 (Board).
(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the master station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.

6-6 6-6
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(c) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings." (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkM".

(d) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(e) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6-7 6-7
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(g) Set the station type for "Type".

Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Master station.

(h) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".

Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Ver.1 mode).

(i) Set the total number of connected stations in the CC-Link system including
reserved stations for "All connect count".
Default value : 64 (modules)
Setting range: 1 to 64 (modules)
Example) Set to 5 (modules).

(j) Set the number of retries for "Retry count", when a communication error
occurs.
Default value : 3 (times)
Setting range: 1 to 7 (times)
Example) Set to 5 (times).

6-8 6-8
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(k) Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single
link scan for "Automatic reconnection station count".
Default value : 1 (module)
Setting range: 1 to 10 (modules)
Example) Set to 2 (modules).
(l) Set the station number for the standby master station for "Standby master
station No.".
Default value : Blank (No standby master station specified)
Setting range: Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
specified)
Example) Set to blank (No standby master station specified).

(m) Set the data link status for "PLC down select", when a master station
programmable controller CPU error occurs.
Default value : Stop
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Example) Set to Stop.

(n) Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or
asynchronous for "Scan mode setting".
Default value : Asynchronous
Setting range: Asynchronous
Synchronous
Example) Set to Asynchronous.

(o) Set 0 for the delay time.

6-9 6-9
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(p) Set the station data for "Station information settings".

Default value : Remote I/O station, single, Occupies 1 station, 32
points, or no setting for reserved stations/error
invalid.
Setting range: Station type - No setting
Remote I/O station
Remote device station
Intelligent device station (including
local station and standby master
station)
Expanded cyclic setting (cannot be changed)-
single
Number of occupied stations -
No setting
Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Remote station points (cannot be changed)-
32 points [when occupies 1 station]
64 points [when occupies 2 stations]
96 points [when occupies 3 stations]
128 points [when occupies 4 stations]
Reserved/invalid station select -
No setting
Reserved station
Invalid station (error invalid station)
Intelligent buffer select (word) -
No setting
Send 0, 64 to 4096
Receive 0, 64 to 4096
Automatic 0, 128 to 4096
Example) Set the station data according to the system configuration
specified in Section 6.3.

6 - 10 6 - 10
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(3) The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update
buffer assignments.

1000H First module (station number 4) 2000H First module (station number 4)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Send buffer Automatic update buffer
103FH 207FH
1040H First module(station number 4) 2080H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Receive buffer Automatic update buffer
107FH 20FFH
1080H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station
Send buffer
10BFH
10C0H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station
Receive buffer
10FFH

6 - 11 6 - 11
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.3.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following shows an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W0.

6 - 12 6 - 12
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W100.

(e) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

(f) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only. Devices
are automatically assigned until the last station number including reserved
stations and occupied stations.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, the last station
number is "12". Therefore, total of remote I/O points is 384 points (32 x 12 =
384) and total of remote register points is 48 points (4 x 12 = 48). If refresh
device of remote input (RX) is set to "X1000" and that of remote register (RWr)
is set to "W0", the end devices will be "X117F" and "W2F" respectively.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 13 6 - 13
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.3.3 Local station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module " for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Example) Set 1 (Board).

(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the local station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.
(c) Set the station type for "Type".
Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Local station.

6 - 14 6 - 14
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings". (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkL".

(e) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(f) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6 - 15 6 - 15
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(g) Set the number of occupied local stations in "Number of occupied stations".
Default value : Occupies 1 station
Setting range: Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Example) Set to Occupies 4 stations

(h) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(i) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".

Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Ver.1 mode).

6 - 16 6 - 16
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.3.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W0.

6 - 17 6 - 17
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W100.

(e) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

(f) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only. Devices
are automatically assigned until the last station number including reserved
stations and occupied stations.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, the last station
number is "12". Therefore, total of remote I/O points is 384 points (32 x 12 =
384) and total of remote register points is 48 points (4 x 12 = 48). If refresh
device of remote input (RX) is set to "X1000" and that of remote register (RWr)
is set to "W0", the end devices will be "X117F" and "W2F" respectively.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 18 6 - 18
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net ver.2 mode)

This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer. For more details
on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system
configuration.
Station Station Station
number 2 number 4 number 9
Station Ver. 2 Ver. 2 Station Ver. 1
compatible compatible compatible
Master number 1 remote device number 8
local station intelligent
station Remote station (occupies 4 Reserved device station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station (occupies 2 station
stations) stations) (occupies 4
(occupies double (occupies stations)
1 station) quadruple 1 station)

6.4.1 Master station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module " for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Modules for the parameter setting with the G(P).RLPASET
instruction should not be included in the setting for "No. of
boards in module".
Example) Set 1 (Board).
(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the master station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.

6 - 19 6 - 19
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(c) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings." (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkM".

(d) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(e) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6 - 20 6 - 20
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(g) Set the station type for "Type".

Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Master station.
(h) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".
Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Ver.2 mode).

(i) Set the total number of connected stations in the CC-Link system including
reserved stations for "All connect count".
Default value : 64 (modules)
Setting range: 1 to 64 (modules)
Example) Set to 5 (modules).

(j) Set the number of retries for "Retry count", when a communication error
occurs.
Default value : 3 (times)
Setting range: 1 to 7 (times)
Example) Set to 5 (times).

6 - 21 6 - 21
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(k) Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single
link scan for "Automatic reconnection station count".
Default value : 1 (module)
Setting range: 1 to 10 (modules)
Example) Set to 2 (modules).
(l) Set the station number for the standby master station for "Standby master
station No.".
Default value : Blank (No standby master station specified)
Setting range: Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
specified)
Example) Set to blank (No standby master station specified).

(m) Set the data link status for "PLC down select", when a master station
programmable controller CPU error occurs.
Default value : Stop
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Example) Set to Stop.

(n) Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or
asynchronous for "Scan mode setting".
Default value : Asynchronous
Setting range: Asynchronous
Synchronous
Example) Set to Asynchronous.

(o) Set 0 for the delay time.

6 - 22 6 - 22
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(p) Set the station data for "Station information settings".

Default value : Ver.1 Remote I/O station, single, Occupies 1 station,
32 points, or no setting for reserved stations/error
invalid.
Setting range: Station type - No setting
Ver.1 Remote I/O station
Ver.1 Remote device station
Ver.1 Intelligent device station (Local
and standby master stations included)
Ver.2 Remote device station
Ver.2 Intelligent device station (Local
and standby master stations included)
Expanded cyclic setting -
[When station type is ver. 1 compatible station]
single (cannot be changed)
[When station type is ver. 2 compatible station]
single
double
quadruple
octuple
Number of occupied stations -
No setting
Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Remote station points -
[When station type is ver. 1 remote I/O station]
0 points (reserve station)
8 points
8points+8points(reserved)
16 points
32 points
[When station type is other than ver. 1 remote
I/O station]
0 points (reserve station)
n points
n : Calculated automatically by GX
Developer according to the number
of occupied stations and expansion
cyclic setting. Refer to Section 3.1
for the number of points.
Reserved/invalid station select -
No setting
Reserved station
Invalid station (error invalid station)

6 - 23 6 - 23
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

Intelligent buffer select (word) -

No setting
Send 0, 64 to 4096
Receive 0, 64 to 4096
Automatic 0, 128 to 4096
Example) Set the station data according to the system configuration
specified in Section 6.4.

(3) The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update
buffer assignments.

1000H First module (station number 4) 2000H First module (station number 4)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Send buffer Automatic update buffer
103FH 207FH
1040H First module(station number 4) 2080H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Receive buffer Automatic update buffer
107FH 20FFH
1080H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station
Send buffer
10BFH
10C0H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station
Receive buffer
10FFH

6 - 24 6 - 24
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.4.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following shows an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W0.

6 - 25 6 - 25
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W1000.

(e) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

(f) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only. Devices
are automatically assigned until the last station number including reserved
stations and occupied stations.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, total of remote I/O
points is 608 points and total of remote register points is 88 points.
If refresh device of remote input (RX) is set to "X1000" and that of remote
register (RWr) is set to "W0", the end devices will be "X125F" and "W57"
respectively.
For link points of each station, refer to the table 3.2.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 26 6 - 26
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.4.3 Local station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module" for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Example) Set 1 (Board).

(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the local station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.
(c) Set the station type for "Type".
Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Local station.

6 - 27 6 - 27
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings". (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkL".

(e) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(f) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6 - 28 6 - 28
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(g) Set the number of occupied local stations in "Number of occupied stations".
Default value : Occupies 1 station
Setting range: Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Example) Set to Occupies 4 stations

(h) Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station in "Expanded cyclic
setting".
Default value : single
Setting range: single
double
quadruple
octuple
Example) Set to double.

6 - 29 6 - 29
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(i) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(j) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".

Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Ver.2 mode).

6 - 30 6 - 30
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.4.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W0.

6 - 31 6 - 31
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W1000.

(e) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

(f) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only. Devices
are automatically assigned until the last station number including reserved
stations and occupied stations.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, total of remote I/O
points is 608 points and total of remote register points is 88 points.
If refresh device of remote input (RX) is set to "X1000" and that of remote
register (RWr) is set to "W0", the end devices will be "X125F" and "W57"
respectively.
For link points of each station, refer to the table 3.2.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 32 6 - 32
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote net additional mode)

This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer. For more details
on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system
configuration.
Station Station Station Station
number 2 number 4 number 8 number 9
Ver. 1 Ver. 2 Ver. 2
Station Ver. 2 compatible
compatible compatible remote device compatible
Master number 1 remote device station intelligent
local station
station Remote station (occupies 4 Reserved device station
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station (occupies 2 station (occupies 4
stations) stations) (occupies stations)
(occupies double 1 station)
1 station) quadruple octuple

6.5.1 Master station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module" for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Modules for the parameter setting with the G(P).RLPASET
instruction should not be included in the setting for "No. of
boards in module".
Example) Set 1 (Board).
(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the master station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.

6 - 33 6 - 33
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(c) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings." (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkM".

(d) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(e) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6 - 34 6 - 34
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(g) Set the station type for "Type".

Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Master station.

(h) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".

Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Additional mode).

(i) Set the total number of connected stations in the CC-Link system including
reserved stations for "All connect count".
Default value : 64 (modules)
Setting range: 1 to 64 (modules)
Example) Set to 5 (modules).

(j) Set the number of retries for "Retry count", when a communication error
occurs.
Default value : 3 (times)
Setting range: 1 to 7 (times)
Example) Set to 5 (times).

6 - 35 6 - 35
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(k) Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single
link scan for "Automatic reconnection station count".
Default value : 1 (module)
Setting range: 1 to 10 (modules)
Example) Set to 2 (modules).
(l) Set the station number for the standby master station for "Standby master
station No.".
Default value : Blank (No standby master station specified)
Setting range: Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
specified)
Example) Set to blank (No standby master station specified).

(m) Set the data link status for "PLC down select", when a master station
programmable controller CPU error occurs.
Default value : Stop
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Example) Set to Stop.

(n) Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or
asynchronous for "Scan mode setting".
Default value : Asynchronous
Setting range: Asynchronous
Synchronous
Example) Set to Asynchronous.

(o) Set 0 for the delay time.

6 - 36 6 - 36
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(p) Set the station data for "Station information settings".

Default value : Ver.1 Remote I/O station, single, Occupies 1 station,
32 points, or no setting for reserved stations/error
invalid.
Setting range: Station type - No setting
Ver.1 Remote I/O station
Ver.1 Remote device station
Ver.1 Intelligent device station (Local
and standby master stations included)
Ver.2 Remote device station
Ver.2 Intelligent device station (Local
and standby master stations included)
Expanded cyclic setting -
[When station type is ver. 1 compatible station]
single (cannot be changed)
[When station type is ver. 2 compatible station]
single
double
quadruple
octuple
Number of occupied stations -
No setting
Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Remote station points -
[When station type is ver. 1 remote I/O station]
0 points (reserve station)
8 points
8points+8points(reserved)
16 points
32 points
[When station type is other than ver. 1 remote
I/O station]
0 points (reserve station)
n points
n : Calculated automatically by GX
Developer according to the number
of occupied stations and expansion
cyclic setting. Refer to Section 3.1
for the number of points.
Reserved/invalid station select -
No setting
Reserved station
Invalid station (error invalid station)

6 - 37 6 - 37
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

Intelligent buffer select (word) -

No setting
Send 0, 64 to 4096
Receive 0, 64 to 4096
Automatic 0, 128 to 4096
Example) Set the station data according to the system configuration
specified in Section 6.5.

(3) The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update
buffer assignments.

1000H First module (station number 4) 2000H First module (station number 4)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Send buffer Automatic update buffer
103FH 207FH
1040H First module(station number 4) 2080H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station Intelligent device station
Receive buffer Automatic update buffer
107FH 20FFH
1080H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station
Send buffer
10BFH
10C0H Second module (station number 9)
Intelligent device station
Receive buffer
10FFH

6 - 38 6 - 38
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.5.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following shows an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W0.

6 - 39 6 - 39
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W100.

(e) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote input (RX) refresh device for "Ver. 2 remote
input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1500.

(f) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote output (RY) refresh device for "Ver. 2 remote
output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1500.

(g) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Ver. 2
remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W1000.

(h) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Ver. 2
remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W1500.

(i) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

6 - 40 6 - 40
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(j) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only. Devices
are automatically assigned until the last station number including reserved
stations and occupied stations.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, total of remote I/O
points is 96 points, total of remote register points is 12 points, total of Ver.2
compatible remote I/O points is 1184 points, and total of Ver.2 compatible
remote register points is 176 points.
If refresh devices of remote input (RX), remote register (RWr), Ver.2 compatible
remote input (RX) and Ver.2 compatible remote register (RWr) are set to
"X1000", "W0", "X1500", and "W1000" respectively, the end devices will be
"X105F", "WB", "X199F", and "W10AF".
For link points of each station, refer to the table 3.2.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 41 6 - 41
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.5.3 Local station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in Boards" for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Example) Set 1 (Board).

(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the local station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.
(c) Set the station type for "Type".
Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Local station.

6 - 42 6 - 42
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings". (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkL".

(e) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(f) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6 - 43 6 - 43
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(g) Set the number of occupied local stations in "Number of occupied stations".
Default value : Occupies 1 station
Setting range: Occupies 1 station
Occupies 2 stations
Occupies 3 stations
Occupies 4 stations
Example) Set to Occupies 4 stations

(h) Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station in "Expanded cyclic
setting".
Default value : single
Setting range: single
double
quadruple
octuple
Example) Set to double.

6 - 44 6 - 44
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(h) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(i) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".

Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote net (Additional mode).

6 - 45 6 - 45
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.5.4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W0.

6 - 46 6 - 46
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W100.

(e) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote input (RX) refresh device for "Ver. 2 remote
input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1500.

(f) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote output (RY) refresh device for "Ver. 2 remote
output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1500.

(g) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWr) refresh device for "Ver. 2
remote register (RWr)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W1000.

(h) Set the ver. 2 compatible remote register (RWw) refresh device for "Ver. 2
remote register (RWw)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
R, or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to W1500.

(i) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

6 - 47 6 - 47
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(j) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only. Devices
are automatically assigned until the last station number including reserved
stations and occupied stations.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, total of remote I/O
points is 96 points, total of remote register points is 12 points, total of Ver.2
compatible remote I/O points is 1184 points, and total of Ver.2 compatible
remote register points is 176 points.
If refresh devices of remote input (RX), remote register (RWr), Ver.2 compatible
remote input (RX) and Ver.2 compatible remote register (RWr) are set to
"X1000", "W0", "X1500", and "W1000" respectively, the end devices will be
"X105F", "WB", "X199F", and "W10AF".
For link points of each station, refer to the table 3.2.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 48 6 - 48
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer (Remote I/O net mode)

This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer. For more details
on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual.
The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system
configuration.

Station Station Station Station Station

Master number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5
station Remote Remote Remote Remote Remote
(X/Y00 to 1F) I/O station I/O station I/O station I/O station I/O station
(occupies (occupies (occupies (occupies (occupies
1 station) 1 station) 1 station) 1 station) 1 station)

6.6.1 Master station network parameter settings

(1) The following describes an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the network parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the "No. of boards in module" for which the network parameters are to be
set.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0 to 8 (Boards)
Modules for the parameter setting with the G(P).RLPASET
instruction should not be included in the setting for "No. of
boards in module".
Example) Set 1 (Board).
(b) Set the "Start I/O No." for the master station.
Default value : None
Setting range: 0000 to 0FE0
Example) Set 0000.

6 - 49 6 - 49
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(c) Set the Parameter name in "Operational settings." (Even if the Parameter
name is not set, this will not affect the operation of the CC-Link system).
Default value : None
Setting range: 8 characters or less
Example) Set "CC-LinkM".

(d) Set the input status for the data link error station in "Operational settings".
Default value : Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Setting range: Hold ("Hold input data" checked)
Clear ("Hold input data" not checked)
Example) Set to Clear ("Hold input data" not checked).

(e) Set the slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting at programmable

controller CPU STOP in "Operational settings".
Default value : Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Setting range: Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked)
Clears compulsorily ("Clears compulsorily"
checked)
Example) Set to Refresh ("Clears compulsorily " not checked).

6 - 50 6 - 50
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Set the block guarantee of cyclic data per station in "Operational settings".
Default value: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Setting range: Disable ("Enable setting" not checked)
Enable ("Enable setting" checked)
Example) Set to Disable ("Enable setting" not checked).

(g) Set the station type for "Type".

Default value : Master station
Setting range: Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Local station
Standby master station
Example) Set to Master station.

(h) Set the CC-Link mode for "Mode".

Default value : Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Setting range: Remote net(Ver.1 mode)
Remote net(Ver.2 mode)
Remote net(Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Example) Set to Remote I/O net mode.

(i) Set the data link status for "PLC down select", when a master station
programmable controller CPU error occurs.
Default value : Stop
Setting range: Stop
Continue
Example) Set to Stop.

(j) Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or
asynchronous for "Scan mode setting".
Default value : Asynchronous
Setting range: Asynchronous
Synchronous
Example) Set to Asynchronous.

6 - 51 6 - 51
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.6.2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings

(1) The following shows an example of the parameter settings. See (2) for actual
settings.

(2) Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure.

(a) Set the remote input (RX) refresh device for "Remote input (RX)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to X1000.

(b) Set the remote output (RY) refresh device for "Remote output (RY)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
W, R or ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to Y1000.

(c) Set the link special relay (SB) refresh device for "Special relay (SB)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SB0.

6 - 52 6 - 52
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(d) Set the link special register (SW) refresh device for "Special register (SW)".
Default value : None
Setting range: Device name - Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or
ZR.
Device number - Within the range of the device
points that the CPU has.
Example) Set to SW0.

POINT
(1) For the automatic refresh parameter setting, set the start device only.
Devices are automatically assigned until the last station number.
In the example of the system configuration in this section, the last station
number is "5". Therefore, total of remote I/O points is 160 points (32 x 5 = 160).
If refresh device of remote input (RX) is set to "X1000", the end device will be
"X109F".
For link points of each station, refer to the table 3.2.
(2) When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that
they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

6 - 53 6 - 53
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

6.7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction

This section explains the parameter setting with the G(P).RLPASET instruction. For
more details on the GX Developer operation, refer to the GX Developer Operational
Manual. The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the
system configuration.
Station number 1

Local Station number 2 Station number 3

Master
station
station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(occupies
(X/Y00 to 1F) (Error invalid station) (Reserved station)
1 station)
(occupies 1 station) (occupies 1 station)

POINT
Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters, if the network
parameters of all the modules are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction.
Change the "No. of boards in module" setting to blank if the network parameters
have been already set by GX Developer.
Moreover, in case a system includes both a module for which the network
parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network
parameters are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction, the module for which the
network parameters are set by the G(P).RLPASET instruction should not be
included in the "No. of boards in module" setting of GX Developer.

6 - 54 6 - 54
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(1) PLC parameter setting

(a) I/O assignment setting screen

Set the following for the slot in which the master
module is mounted.
The type setting is required; set other items as
needed.
Type : Select "intelli."
Model name : Enter the module model name.
Points : Select 32 points
Start XY : Enter the start I/O number for
the master module.

(b) Intelligent function module switch setting

Click the Switch Setting button in the I/O
assignment setting screen to display the screen
shown to the left.
Set the input format to hexadecimal and enter
values for switches 3, 4. The switch settings are
indicated in the following table.
If switches 3, 4 have not been set or the
settings are not as indicated in the following
table, the G(P).RLPASET instruction is
completed with an error.
In this case, the QJ61BT11N with the smallest
start I/O number seen from the programmable
controller CPU starts CC-Link automatically.
Do not make any settings for other than
switches 3, 4.
Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if
settings other than for switch 4 are made.

Mode Setting in case of Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5

*1
CPU STOP
Remote net ver.2 mode Refresh 0200 0100
Clears compulsorily 0200 0300
Refresh 0100 0100
Remote net additional mode
Clears compulsorily 0100 0300
Refresh 0000 or blank 0100
Remote net ver.1 mode
Clears compulsorily 0000 or blank 0300
1 "Clears compulsorily" for the case of CPU STOP setting (Setting of "Refresh" or "Clears
compulsorily" for slave station in case of Programmable Controller CPU STOP) can be
set in the QJ61BT11N whose first 5 digits of serial number is "09112" or later.

6 - 55 6 - 55
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Program example

Refresh of SB/SW
SB0020 to SB01FF are read
to SB0020 to SB01FF.
SW0020 to SW01FF are read
to SW0020 to SW01FF.
Parameter setting

Instruct to set parameters

G(P).RLPASET instruction
· Control data

Clear complete status.

All setting data: Valid

Number of connected modules

involved in communication: 3

Number of retries: 3 times

Number of automatic return

modules: 1 module

Operation specification when

CPU is down: stop

Scan mode specification:

Asynchronous

Delay time setting: 0

· Slave station setting data

First: Local station, occupies

1 station, station
number 1 *1
Second: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
Third: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
· Reserved station specification data station number 3

Reserved station specification:

station number 3
· Error invalid station specification data

Error invalid station specification:

station number 2
· Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data

First (station number 1) local station

Send buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Receive buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Automatic refresh buffer: 0 word
*1 Set the station number in hexadecimal. (Example) Set 14H for station No. 20.

6 - 56 6 - 56
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

· Parameter registration (data link startup)

Dedicated instruction
(G(P).RLPASET)
Processing at completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction

Turn the parameter setting

instruction off.
Instruct to refresh at normal
completion of the
G(P).RLPASET instruction.
Instruct to start the control
program at normal completion
of the G(P).RLPASET
Performs abnormal instruction.
completion processing
Parameter setting change
Parameter
change
instruction
Instruct to stop data link

Turn the data link stop

instruction off

Instruct to stop refreshing

Instruct to change parameters

G(P).RLPASET instruction
· Control data

Clear complete status

Slave station setting data/send,

receive and automatic refresh
buffer assignment data: Valid
Number of connected modules
involved in communication: 3

Number of retries: 3 times

Number of automatic return

modules: 1 module

Operation specification when

CPU is down: Stop

Scan mode specification:

Asynchronous

Delay time setting: 0

· Slave station setting data

First: Local station, occupies

1 station, station
number 1 *1
Second: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
Third: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 3
*1 Set the station number in hexadecimal. (Example) Set 14H for station No. 20.

6 - 57 6 - 57
6 PARAMETER SETTINGS
MELSEC-Q

· Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data

First (station number 1) local station
Send buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Receive buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Automatic refresh buffer: 0 word
· Parameter registration (data link startup)
Dedicated instruction
(G(P).RLPASET) *2
Processing at completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction

Turn the parameter setting

instruction off.
Instruct to refresh at normal
completion of the
G(P).RLPASET instruction.
Instruct to start the control
program at normal completion
of the G(P).RLPASET
Performs abnormal completion processing instruction.

Start of the control program

Refresh of RX
RX00 to RX5F are read to
X1000 to X105F.
Refresh of RWr
RXr0 to RWr3 are read to
D1000 to D1003.
Station number 1 control program

Station number 1 control program

Station number 2 control program

Station number 2 control program

Station number 3 control program

Station number 3 control program

Refresh of RWw
D2000 to D2003 are written into
RWw0 to RWw3
Refresh of RY
Y1000 to Y105F are written into
RY00 to RY5F

Refresh of SB/SW

SB0000 to SB001F are refreshed.

SW0000 to SW001F are refreshed.

*2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices.

6 - 58 6 - 58
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK

This chapter explains the procedure from the module installation to the data link startup.

7.1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link

The following describes the procedure from the module installation to the CC-Link data
link startup.
Start

Mount the master module, local module and

standby master module on the base unit.

Mount the remote modules on the control board

and machine.

Check the master module, local module and

standby master module individually to see if · · · · · · · See Section 7.4.
they operate normally (hardware test).

Connect the modules with the CC-Link dedicated

cable. Connect a terminal resistor that matches · · · · · · · See Section 7.5.
the cable type to the modules located at both ends.

Check items prior to turning power ON:

Check the module installation status
Check the input power voltage
Verify that the programmable controller CPU
switch is set to "STOP"
Verify that the programmable controller CPU
7
RESET switch is set to the "middle position" *1

Set the switches on the master module, local

module and standby master module
(see Sections 7.3 and 7.7).
Station number setting (see Section 7.7.1)
Transmission speed, mode setting
(see Section 7.7.2)

Turn the power ON

To the next page

*1 Only for the High Performance model QCPU and Process CPU.

7-1 7-1
 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

From the previous page

When performing When performing
parameter setting with parameter setting with
GX Developer dedicated instruction
Set the parameters with the GX Developer Set the PLC parameter with the GX Developer.
(see Section 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6). (see Section 6.7)
(1) When remote net ver. 1 mode is used Create a program in which the G(P).RLPASET
(a) Network parameters
instruction is used.
(see Sections 6.3.1 and 6.3.3)
(b) Automatic refresh parameters (see Section 6.7)
(see Sections 6.3.2 and 6.3.4)
(2) When remote net ver. 2 mode is used
(a) Network parameters
(see Sections 6.4.1 and 6.4.3)
(b) Automatic refresh parameters
(see Sections 6.4.2 and 6.4.4)
(3) When remote net additional mode is used
(a) Network parameters
(see Sections 6.5.1 and 6.5.3)
(b) Automatic refresh parameters
(see Sections 6.5.2 and 6.5.4)
(4) When remote I/O net mode is used
(a) Network parameters
(see Sections 6.6.1)
(b) Automatic refresh parameters
(see Sections 6.6.2)

Register the parameters to the programmable Register PLC parameter/program to the

controller CPU programmable controller CPU

Set the programmable controller CPU switch Set the programmable controller CPU switch
from "RESET" to "Middle position" or turn the from "RESET" to "Middle position" or turn the
power from OFF to ON power from OFF to ON

Turn the switch of the programmable controller

CPU to "RUN"

7
Check operation using the LED display
(master station):
When data link is normal: L RUN LED is lit
When the data link is faulty: L ERR LED is lit

Check the connection status of each module

(line test). (see Section 7.8)
Check operation using the CC-Link diagnosis.
(see Section 13.4)

Register the control program in the

programmable controller CPU

Set the programmable controller CPU switch

from "RESET" to "Middle position" or turn the
power from OFF to ON

System operation

End

7-2 7-2
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.2 Installation

The following section explains the precautions when handling the master and local
modules, from the time they are unpacked until they are installed.
For more details on the module installation, see the user's manual for the CPU module
used.

7.2.1 Handling precautions

(1) Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of
resin.
(2) Do not remove the PCB of each module from its case. This may cause a
failure in the module.
(3) Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.
(4) A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign
matter, such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring. Do not
remove this film until the wiring is complete. Remove it for heat dissipation
before system operation.
(5) Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal
block. It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the
solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation
tube.
(6) Before handling the module, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the
static electricity from the human body.
Failure to do so may cause the module to rail or malfunction.
(7) Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal screws within the following
torque ranges.
Screw location Tightening torque range
*1
Module fixing screws (M3 screws) 0.36 to 0.48 N · m
Terminal block screws (M3 screws) 0.42 to 0.58 N · m
Terminal block mounting screws (M3.5 screws) 0.66 to 0.89 N · m

*1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module.
However, it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is
subject to significant vibration or shock.

(8) To mount the module on the base unit, fully insert the module fixing latch
into the fixing hole in the base unit and press the module using the hole as a
fulcrum. Improper installation may result in a module malfunction, or may
cause the module to fall off.
POINT
(1) Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or
removing the terminal block.
If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply
to the applicable station, correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed.
(2) Always make sure to power off the system in advance when removing the
terminating resistor to charge the system. If the terminating resistor is removed
and mounted while the system is energized, normal data transmission will not
be guaranteed
7-3 7-3
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.2.2 Installation environment

For further details, see the user's manual for the CPU module used.

7.3 Part Names and Settings

The following section describes the parts names of the master and local modules, and
the contents of the LED display and switch settings.

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

7-4 7-4
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

Number Name Description

1) LED indicators The data link status can be checked with each ON/OFF status.
LED name Description
On : Operating normally
RUN
Off : Watchdog timer error
On: All stations have a communication error
Also lights up when the following errors occur.
Switch type setting is incorrect
There are more than one master station on the same line
There is an error in the parameter contents
The data link monitoring timer was activated
ERR. The cable is disconnected
QJ61BT11N Or, the transmission path is affected by noise.
RUN L RUN To check the source of the error, see Section 13.4.
MST S MST
SD RD Or, see Section 8.4.2 for details regarding SW0058 (detailed
ERR. L ERR. LED display status)
Flashing: A communication error station identified, or remote
station No. duplicated.
MST On: Operating as a master station (in data link control)
S MST On: Operating as a standby master station (in standby status)
L RUN On: Data link is being executed
On : Communication error (host)
Flashing at fixed intervals: The settings of switches 2) and 3)
were changed while the power is on.
L ERR.
Flashing irregularly: The terminal resistor is not attached. The
module and CC-Link dedicated cable are
affected by noise.
SD On: Data being sent
RD On: Data being received
2) Station number setting switches Set the module station number (Factory default: 0)
<Setting range>
STATION
NO.
Master station :0
x10 Local station : 1 to 64
Standby master station : 1 to 64
x1 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set, the "ERR." LED lights up.

"MST" and "S MST" LED indicator lamp status and station types
Operation status
Type of station set Operating as a master station Operating as a standby master
(controlling data link) station (standing by)
Master station MST S MST MST S MST
Standby master station MST S MST MST S MST
Local station ——— ———
: On, : Off

7-5 7-5
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

Number Name Description

3) Transmission speed/mode setting Set the transmission speed and operating conditions for the module
switch (Factory default: 0)
Setting
Transmission speed settings Mode
value
0 Transmission speed 156 kbps
1 Transmission speed 625 kbps
Online
2 Transmission speed 2.5 Mbps
(see Section 7.7.2)
3 Transmission speed 5 Mbps
4 Transmission speed 10 Mbps
5 Transmission speed 156 kbps Line test (see Section 7.8)
MODE
6 Transmission speed 625 kbps When the station number setting
7 Transmission speed 2.5 Mbps switch is set to 0: Line test 1
8 Transmission speed 5 Mbps When the station number setting

9 Transmission speed 10 Mbps switch is set to 1 to 64: Line test 2

A Transmission speed 156 kbps

B Transmission speed 625 kbps
Hardware test
C Transmission speed 2.5 Mbps
(see Section 7.4)
D Transmission speed 5 Mbps
E Transmission speed 10 Mbps
F Setting not allowed
4) Terminal block A CC-Link dedicated cable is connected for data linking.
For the connection method, see Section 7.5.

NC Terminals SLD and FG are connected inside the module.

NC Since a 2-piece type terminal block is used, the module can be replaced
DA
without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block.
SLD
(Replace the module after turning its power OFF.)
DB

(FG)

DG

5) Serial No. label The serial No. of the QJ61BT11N is indicated.

POINT
The settings of the station number setting switch and the transmission speed/mode
setting switch become valid when the module power is turned from OFF to ON or
the programmable controller CPU is reset. Thus, if the settings were changed while
the module power was ON, turn the module power from OFF to ON or reset the
programmable controller CPU again.

7-6 7-6
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.4 Checking the Module Status (Hardware Test)

The hardware test checks whether or not each module works properly by itself. Always
perform this hardware test before configuring the system and for each module by itself
without connecting the cable. Otherwise, the hardware test will not be executed
properly.

Execute the hardware test using the following procedure.

Start

Connect the terminal resistor attached to the

module between the DA and DB terminals of
the master/local module.

Check items prior to turning the power ON:

Check the module installation status
Check the input power voltage
Verify that the programmable controller CPU
switch is set to "STOP"
Verify that the programmable controller CPU
RESET switch is set to the "Middle position" *1

Set the "transmission speed/mode setting

switch" for the master/local module to "A to E
(the transmission speed should be the same as
when the system is operating)".

Power ON

Reset the programmable controller CPU by the

following procedure.
1) Set the switch to RESET.
RESET

2) Set the switch to the middle position.

RESET

"MST" LED is flashing (test in progress)

To the next page

*1 Only for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and C Controller module.

7-7 7-7
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

From the previous page

The test result is displayed using the "LED"

indicator lamps of the master/local module and
the CPU module.
[When normal]
The programmable controller CPU "ERR."
LED flashes
(to check the operation of the watchdog timer).

[When abnormal]
The "MST" LED lights up and the "ERR."
LED flashes.

Replace the module since there is a hardware

malfunction.
(Check once again to see that the terminal
resistor that comes with the module is
connected between terminals DA and DB.)

End

POINT
When the switch of the programmable controller CPU is set to "RUN" and a
hardware test is performed, the system status become SP. UNIT DOWN and the
programmable controller CPU stops to check the operation of the watch dog timer
function. Make sure that the switch of the programmable controller CPU is set to
"STOP" and then perform the hardware test.

7-8 7-8
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC-Link Dedicated Cables

This section explains how to connect the master module, local modules, standby
master module, remote modules and intelligent device modules with the CC-Link
dedicated cables.

(1) Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables, CC-Link dedicated cables

(Ver.1.00) and CC-Link dedicated high-performance cables cannot be used
together. If used together, correct data transmission will not be guaranteed.

(2) CC-Link cables can be connected from any station number.

(3) Connect the shielded wire of the CC-Link dedicated cable to "SLD" of each
module, and ground both ends of the shielded wire using D type grounding via
"FG".
The SLD and FG are connected within the module.

(4) Connect the supplied "terminal resistors" to each module at both ends of the CC-
Link system.
Connect the terminal resistors between "DA" and "DB".
There are restrictions on the case where the A(1S)J61BT11/A(1S)J61QBT11 is
used as the master station in a T-branch system configuration. Refer to Section
7.6.1 for details.

(5) The terminal resistors to be connected vary depending on the types of cables
used in the CC-Link system.
Cable type Terminal resister
CC-Link dedicated cable
110 Ω 1/2 W (brown - brown – brown)
Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable 130 Ω 1/2 W (brown - orange – brown)

(6) The master module can be connected at points other than both ends.

(7) Star connection is not allowed.

(8) The connection method is shown below.

Master module Remote module Local module

(blue) (blue) (blue) (blue)
DA DA DA
Terminal Terminal
resistor (White) (White) (White) (White) resistor
DB DB DB
(Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)
DG DG DG

SLD SLD SLD

CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated cable
FG FG FG

7-9 7-9
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.5.1 Wiring check

The following explains how to check the wiring status between the remote I/O and
external devices.

[Example of wiring check]

Specify the "Remote input (RX)" for the master station to "X1000" and the "Remote
output (RY)" to "Y1000" with the GX Developer.

Master station

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station

(Station number 1, number (Station number 2, number
of occupied stations 1) of occupied stations 1)

AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16T
Input module Output module

X00 ON
ON

Y00

(a) Checking the wiring between the input module and an external device

1) Turn ON the switch corresponding to the external device "X0," which is

connected to the input module of station number 1.
2) Using the GX Developer, set "X1000" in the "Device:" field by choosing
"Online" - "Monitor" - "Device batch" and then click on "Start monitor".
3) If X1000 is ON, the connection between the input module and external
device has been properly performed.

(b) Checking the wiring between the output module and an external device

1) Using the GX Developer, set "Y1020" in the "Device:" field for the "Bit
device" by choosing "Online" - "Debug" - "Device test" and then click on
"FORCE ON".
2) If the connection between the output module and external device is
properly performed, the indicator lamp corresponding to the external
device "Y00" is lit.

POINT
If X corresponding to the switch does not turn on or the lamp corresponding to Y
does not turn on, confirm the slave station offset, size information (buffer memory
address 3E0H, Un\G992) to check the RX/RY/RWw/RWr assignment status of the
module.

7 - 10 7 - 10
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.6 T-Branch Connection

7.6.1 T-Branch system configuration

The following shows a system configuration using T-branch connection.

T-branch terminal
block/connector
(Main line)
Local station/
Remote I/O station/ Master Remote I/O station/ intelligent
remote device station station remote device station device station

(Branch line) (Branch line) (Branch (Branch line)

Terminal resistor Terminal resistor
line)
[between DA and DB] [between DA and DB]

Remote I/O station/

remote device station Remote I/O station/
remote device station

Remote I/O station/

remote device station Local station/
intelligent
device station
Remote I/O station/
remote device station Remote I/O station/ Local station/ Remote I/O station/
remote device station intelligent remote device station
A maximum of 6 stations device station
can be connected
A maximum of 6 stations
can be connected
The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length
per branch line and the overall branch line length.

When the model name and hardware version of the master module are as indicated
below in a T-branch system configuration, change the terminating resistor connection
method as described below.
When using the other master module, connect the terminating resistor packed with the
product.
AJ61BT11 : Hardware version C or earlier
AJ61QBT11 : Hardware version C or earlier
A1SJ61BT11 : Hardware version D or earlier
A1SJ61QBT11 : Hardware version D or earlier

[Connection] 110Ω DA 110 Ω ± 5 %, 1/2W × 4

DB (Connect between DA and DG/DB and DG) … both ends
110Ω
DG
Use a commercially available terminal resistor of
SLD 110 Ω ± 5% and 1/2 W resistance.
FG
110 Ω and 130 Ω resistors that are supplied with the
master/local modules cannot be used.

7 - 11 7 - 11
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.6.2 T-Branch communication specifications list

The following describes the communication specifications for T branch connection.

For communication specifications not listed below, see Section 3.1.
Item Specification Remarks
Transmission speed 625 kbps 156 kbps 10 M/5 M/2.5 Mbps are not allowed.
Indicates the length of the cable between terminal
100 m 500 m
Maximum length of the main line resistors. The length of the T branch cable (branch line
(328.1 ft.) (1640.5 ft.)
length) is not included.
Maximum length of the branch line 8 m (26.25 ft.) Indicates the overall cable length per branch.
Overall branch line length 50 m (164.05 ft.) 200 m (656.2 ft.) Indicates the overall length of the entire branch cable.
Maximum number of connected The total number of connected stations depends on the
6 stations per branch
stations on the branch line CC-Link specifications.
The CC-Link dedicated high-performance cable
cannot be used.
CC-Link dedicated cable Mixing of different brands of CC-Link dedicated
Connection cable
Ver. 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable cables is not allowed.
Mixing of different brands of Ver. 1.10 compatible
CC-Link dedicated cables is allowed.
Terminal block: Off-the-shelf terminal block When wiring cables for the main line side, try not to
T branch terminal block/connector Connector: Connector for the FA sensor remove the covering as much as possible.
(ICE947-5-2) comparable product is recommended
CC-Link dedicated cable, Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (uses 110 Ω terminal resistor)
Length of cable between the
Distance Length of cable between the master/local station or
Maximum length of main line, distance Transmission Maximum length
between T remote I/O stations or remote intelligent device station and
speed of main line
between T branches, and length of branches device stations 1 2
cable between stations the adjacent station(s)
625 kbps 100 m (328.1 ft.) 3
1 m (3.28 ft.) or longer ( )/
No limit 30 cm (11.8 in.) or longer
4
156 kbps 500 m (1640.5 ft.) 2 m (6.56 ft.) or longer ( )
3: The cable length of 1m (3.28 ft.) or longer is for a system configured only with remote I/O stations and remote
device stations.
4: The cable length of 2m (6.56 ft.) or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent
device stations.
Maximum length of main line (not including the branch line length)
Distance between T branches
2 2 2 2
Terminal 1 1 Terminal
resistor resistor
R Master station R R R 2 L/I L/I
2
2 2 R
2 1 1 1 1
R
1
L/I L/I R R R R R
R
(Length of branch line: 8m (26.25 ft.) or shorter)
1
R Indicates a remote I/O station or a remote device station.
R
L/I Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station.
(Length of branch line: 8m (26.25 ft.) or shorter)

7 - 12 7 - 12
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.7 Switch Settings

This section explains how to set the module switches.

7.7.1 Station number setting

The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station, local
station, standby master station, remote station and intelligent device station.
For details on the station number setting switches, see Section 7.3.

Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions.

(1) Specify sequential station numbers

Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are
connected.
For a module occupying two or more stations, specify the first station number.

(2) Specify unique station numbers

If duplicate station numbers are specified, an installation error occurs. (Error
codes are stored in SW0069)

[Setting example] When station numbers are specified by skipping one station
number

Station number "0" Station number "5" Station number "10"

3) Standby 5) Local
Master master station
station station (occupies
Station number "1" Station number "2" (occupies Station number "9" 1 station)
4 stations)

1) Remote I/O 2) Remote device 4) Intelligent

station station device station
(occupies 1 station) (occupies 2 stations) (occupies 1 station)

Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 8 Station number 9 Station number 10

1) Remote 2) Remote device station 3) Standby master station 4) Intelligent 5) Local station
I/O station device station
Data link faulty station
(If this station is set as a reserved station, it will not be treated as a faulty station.)

POINT
Specify unoccupied station numbers as reserved stations. An unoccupied station
number will be treated as a "data link faulty station" (can be verified with link special
registers SW0080 to SW0083).

7 - 13 7 - 13
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.7.2 Transmission speed and mode settings

Transmission speed and mode settings are specified with the "transmission
speed/mode setting switch".
For details on the transmission speed/mode setting switch, see Section 7.3.

The transmission speed that can be set varies depending on the total distance.
For more details, see Sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2.

POINT
(1) Use the same transmission speed for the master station, remote stations, local
stations, intelligent device stations and the standby master station.
If the setting for even one of the stations is different, data link cannot be
established properly.
(2) Transmission speed test can be used to check whether the same transmission
speed is set for all of the master station, remote stations, local stations,
intelligent device stations and standby master station. (See Section 7.9.)

7 - 14 7 - 14
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.8 Checking the Connection Status (Line Test)

After connecting all of the modules with CC-Link dedicated cables, verify that they are
correctly connected and that data linking can be performed with remote stations, local
stations, intelligent device stations and the standby master station.
Line test 1 checks the status of communication with all modules that have been connected.
Line test 2 checks the status of communication with specific modules.
Neither line test 1 nor line test 2 requires parameter settings.
POINT
(1) Line test 2 is performed when an error is generated by line test 1.
Thus, if the result of line test 1 is normal, there is no need to conduct line test 2.
(2) Network parameter setting is required to execute Line test 2 for the standby
master station.
(3) When data link has started by the standby master station, Line test 1 and 2 are
not executable. To perform these line tests, use GX Developer.

(1) Checking the connection status and the status of communication with remote
stations/local stations/intelligent device stations/standby master station (line test 1)
Perform the line test according to the following procedure.

Start

Check items prior to executing line test 1:

Verify that the programmable controller CPU
switch is set to "STOP"
Verify that the programmable controller CPU
RESET switch is set to the "Middle position" *1

Set the "station number setting switch" for the

master/local module to "0".

Set the "transmission speed/mode setting

switch" for the master/local module to "5 to 9
(the transmission speed should be the same as
when the system is operating)".

Reset the programmable controller CPU by

the following procedure.
1) Set the switch to RESET.
RESET

2) Set the switch to the middle position.

RESET

To the next page

7 - 15 7 - 15
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

From the previous page

The test result is displayed using the "LED"

indicator lamps of the master module.
[When test is complete]
The "L RUN" LED lights up.
The "MST" LED flashes.
The test results are stored in SW00B4 to B7
(line test 1 result). However, since line test 1
is performed for 64 stations, disregard the
bit (s) for any unconnected stations.
For the standby master station, the test result is
stored into SB00B4 (standby master station test
result) only.

[When test is incomplete (all stations are

abnormal)]
The "MST" LED lights up and the "ERR."
LED flashes.
The test results are stored in SW00B8
(line test result).

End

*1 Only for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and C Controller module.

7 - 16 7 - 16
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

(2) Checking the status of communication with a specific remote station/local

station/intelligent device station/standby master station (line test 2)
Line test 2 checks whether data linking can be performed normally with a specific
remote station, local station, intelligent device station or standby master station.
Execute line test 2 according to the following procedure.

Start

Check items prior to executing line test 2:

Verify that the programmable controller CPU
switch is set to "STOP"
Verify that the programmable controller CPU
*1
RESET switch is set to the "Middle position"

Set the master module "station number setting

switch" to the station number of the module for
which the test is to be performed.

Set the "transmission speed/mode setting

switch" for the master module to "5 to 9 (the
transmission speed should be the same as
when the system is operating)".

Reset the programmable controller

CPU by the following procedure.
1) Set the switch to RESET.
RESET

2) Set the switch to the middle position.

RESET

To the next page

*1 Only for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and C Controller module.

7 - 17 7 - 17
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

From the previous page

The test result is displayed using the "LED"

indicator lamps of the master module.
[At normal completion of test]
The "L RUN" LED lights up.

[At abnormal completion of test]

The "MST" LED lights up and the "ERR." LED
flashes.

The test results are stored in SW00B8

(line test result).

End

7 - 18 7 - 18
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

7.9 Checking the Transmission Speed (Transmission Speed Test)

Whether or not the same transmission speed is set for slave stations and the master
station can be checked. (This test is available for the module whose first five digits of
serial No. is 10032 or later.)
Since the station No. of the slave station with a different transmission speed setting
can be identified, a communication error can be resolved easily.

(1) Transmission speed test procedure

Perform the transmission speed test by the following procedure.
Start

Connect all of the modules with CC-Link dedicated cables.

Checking prior to transmission speed test

Verify that the programmable controller CPU switch is set to "STOP"
Verify that the programmable controller CPU RESET switch is set to the
"Middle position" *1

Set the "station number setting switch" of the master module to "0".

Set the "transmission speed/mode setting switch" of the master module to

"0 to 4 (the transmission speed should be the same as when the system is
operating)".

Reset the programmable controller CPU by the following procedure.

1) Set the switch to RESET.
RESET

2) Set the switch to the middle position.

RESET

To the next page

*1 Only for the High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU and C Controller module.

7 - 19 7 - 19
7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK
MELSEC-Q

From the previous page

Set SB0002 (Data link stop) to ON to stop data link.

Set SB000B (Transmission speed test request) to ON to start transmission

speed test.
Upon start of the test, SB0185 (Transmission speed test accept status) is
set to ON.

Upon completion of the test, SB0186 (Transmission speed test completion

status) is set to ON.
Transmission speed test is complete in approx. 10 seconds.

By SW0183 (Transmission speed test result), check the transmission speed

test result.
Check if the same transmission speed is set for slave and master stations,
with the following link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW).
[For slave stations (except standby master station)]
SW0184 to SW0187 (Transmission speed test result for each station)
[For standby master station]
SB0184 (Transmission speed test result for standby master station)

After confirming the test results, set SB000B (Transmission speed test
request) to OFF.

End

(2) Timing chart of link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW)
Performed by QJ61BT11N
Performed by sequence program
ON
SB0002 (Data link stop) OFF
ON
SB000B
OFF
(Transmission speed test request)
ON
SB0185 OFF
(Transmission speed test accept status)

Transmission speed test

ON
SB0186
(Transmission speed test completion OFF
status)
SW0183 (Transmission speed test result)
SW0184 to SW0187 (Transmission speed test result for each station) Test result
SB0184 (Transmission speed test result for standby station)

7 - 20 7 - 20
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8 PROGRAMMING

This chapter explains common items relating to programming.

8.1 Precautions on Programming

The following explains precautions on the creation of a program:

Create a program that allows the detection of data-link status and interlocking with the
remote I/O stations, remote device stations, local stations, intelligent device stations,
and standby master station.
In addition, create an error-handling program.

[Program example]
Set the "Special Relay (SB) Refresh Device" to "SB0" and the "Special Register
(SW) Refresh Device" to "SW0" of the master station with GX Developer.

POINT
When setting the refresh devices for special relay (SB) and special register (SW) to
SB and SW respectively, make sure that their device numbers do not duplicate with
those used in the CC-Link IE controller network and MELSECNET/H network.

Module error Module ready Host data link status SW80 to SW83 (Other station data link status)

Xn0 XnF Xn1

BM0V SW80 K4M0 K4

Error-handling program

8
M0
Station number 1 normal operation program

M1
Station number 2 normal operation program

8-1 8-1
 8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.2 I/O Signals for the Programmable Controller CPU

This section explains the input/output signals for the programmable controller CPU of
the master/local module.

8.2.1 I/O signal list

Table 8.1 shows a list of the I/O signals.

The "n" in the table indicates the master/local module's first I/O number, which is
determined by both the installation position and the module installed before the
master/local module.
<Example> When the master/local module's first I/O number is "X/Y30"
Xn0 to X (n + 1) F X30 to X4F
Yn0 to Y (n + 1) F Y30 to Y4F

Table 8.1 I/O signal list

Signal direction: Programmable controller CPU Master/local module Signal direction: Programmable controller CPU Master/local module
Availability Availability
Input number Signal name Output number Signal name
Master station Local station Master station Local station
Xn0 Module error Yn0
Xn1 Host data link status Yn1
Xn2 Use prohibited — — Yn2
Xn3 Other station data link status Yn3
Xn4 Yn4
Xn5 Yn5
Xn6 Yn6
Xn7 Yn7
Xn8 Yn8
Xn9 Use prohibited — — Yn9
XnA YnA
XnB YnB
XnC YnC
XnD YnD
XnE YnE
XnF Module ready YnF
Use prohibited — —
X (n+1) 0 Y (n+1) 0
8 X (n+1) 1 Y (n+1) 1
X (n+1) 2 Y (n+1) 2
X (n+1) 3 Y (n+1) 3
X (n+1) 4 Y (n+1) 4
X (n+1) 5 Y (n+1) 5
X (n+1) 6 Y (n+1) 6
X (n+1) 7 Y (n+1) 7
Use prohibited — —
X (n+1) 8 Y (n+1) 8
X (n+1) 9 Y (n+1) 9
X (n+1) A Y (n+1) A
X (n+1) B Y (n+1) B
X (n+1) C Y (n+1) C
X (n+1) D Y (n+1) D
X (n+1) E Y (n+1) E
X (n+1) F Y (n+1) F

8-2 8-2
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

IMPORTANT
The use-prohibited output signals shown in Table 8.1 are accessed by the system
and cannot be accessed by the user.
In the event these signals are used (turned on/off) by the user, normal operations
cannot be guaranteed.

POINT
In the A/QnA series, data link startup was performed by setting the "Yn6 (Data Link
Startup Request initiated by a buffer memory parameter)" and "Yn8 (Data link
2
Startup Request initiated by an E PROM parameter)".
Do not use "Yn6" and "Yn8" for the Q series because the data link startup is
automatically performed.

8-3 8-3
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.2.2 Details of the I/O signals

The following explains the on/off timings and conditions of the I/O signals shown in
Table 8.1:

(1) Module error: Xn0

This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty.
OFF: Module normal
ON : Module error

Module error
(Xn0)

Module ready
(XnF)

(2) Host data link status: Xn1

This signal indicates the data link status of the host station.
SB006E also represents the same meaning. For programming, use either Xn1 or
SB006E only.
Note that the ON/OFF condition for Xn1 is opposite to that for SB006E.
When Xn1 is used, the condition is as follows:
OFF: Data link is stopped
ON : Data linking in progress

(3) Other station data link status: Xn3

This signal indicates the data link status of other stations (remote, local,
intelligent device and standby master stations).
The SB0080 signal has the same contents. For programming, use either Xn3 or
SB0080 only.
OFF: All stations normal
ON : There is a faulty station (the faulty station status is stored in SW0080 to
SW0083)

POINT
The other station data link status (Xn3) takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a
slave station connected to the master/local station becomes faulty.
The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration, faulty status or
other conditions.

8-4 8-4
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(4) Module ready: XnF

This signal indicates whether the module is ready to operate.
(a) When the module reaches ready-to-operate status, this signal turns ON
automatically.

(b) This signal turns OFF when either of the following conditions occurs:
1) When an error is detected in the switch setting status for the module
2) When the module error signal (Xn0) turns ON
Power ON

Module ready
(XnF)

Module error
(Xn0)

8-5 8-5
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.3 Buffer Memory

The buffer memory transfers data between the master/local module and the
programmable controller CPU.
The reading and writing of data are performed by parameter settings or with dedicated
instructions using the GX Developer.
The contents of the buffer memory return to the default when the power is turned OFF
or the programmable controller CPU is reset.

8.3.1 Buffer memory list

The buffer memory list is shown in Table 8.2.

Table 8.2 Buffer memory list (1/3)

Address Availability
Read/write Reference
Item Description Master Local
Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section
station station
0H 0
Parameter information Section
to to Stores the parameter settings. Read only —
area 8.3.2 (1)
DFH 223
For the master station: Stores the input status
from the remote/local
E0H 224 —
2 /intelligent device/standby
to to Remote input (RX) Read only
master stations.
15FH 351
For the local station : Stores the input status
—
from the master station.
For the master station: Stores the output status to
the remote/local /intelligent Section
Write only —
device/standby master 8.3.2 (2)
stations.
160H 352 For the local station : Stores the output status to
to to Remote output (RY) 2 the master station.
1DFH 479 Also, stores the receive
Read/write
data from the remote/other —
enabled
local/intelligent
device/standby master
stations.
For the master station: Stores the send data to
the remote device/all local
Write only —
/intelligent device/standby
master stations.
Remote register For the local station : Stores the send data to the
(RWw) 2 master/other
1E0H 480 local/intelligent
Master station: Section
to to device/standby master
For sending 8.3.2 (3)
2DFH 735 stations.
Local station: Read/write
Also, stores the receive —
For sending/receiving enabled
data from the remote
device/other
local/intelligent
device/standby master
stations.
: Available, — : Not available

8-6 8-6
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.2 Buffer memory list (2/3)

Address Availability
Read/write Reference
Item Description Master Local
Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section
station station
For the master station: Stores the receive data
Remote register
from the remote
(RWr) 2
2E0H 736 device/local/intelligent —
Master station: Section
to to device/standby master Read only
For receiving 8.3.2 (3)
3DFH 991 stations.
Local station:
For the local station : Stores the receive data
For receiving —
from the master station.
3E0H 992 Stores the offset and size of RX/RY/RWw/RWr
Slave station offset, Section
to to per remote station/local station/intelligent device Read only
size information 8.3.2 (4)
5DFH 1503 station/standby master station.
5E0H 1504 Read/write
enabled
Section
to to Link special relay (SB) Stores the data link status.
(write may
8.3.2 (5)
5FFH 1535
be disabled
600H 1536 depending
Link special register Section
to to Stores the data link status. on the
(SW) 8.3.2 (6)
7FFH 2047 device)
800H 2048
1
to to Use prohibited — — — — —
9FFH 2559
A00H 2560
The specified data is stored and used by Read/write Section
to to Random access buffer
transient transmission. enabled 8.3.2 (7)
FFFH 4095
Stores the send and receive data and control
1000H 4096 data when performing transient transmission
Read/write Section
to to Communication buffers (communication using the communication
enabled 8.3.2 (8)
1FFFH 8191 buffers) with the local station, standby master
station, and intelligent device station.
Stores the automatic update data when
2000H 8192
Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read/write Section
to to —
buffer AJ65BT-R2(N) (communication using the enabled 8.3.2 (9)
2FFFH 12287
automatic update buffer).
3000H 12288
1
to to Use prohibited — — — — —
3FFFH 16383
: Available, — : Not available

8-7 8-7
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.2 Buffer memory list (3/3)

Address Availability
Read/write Reference
Item Description Master Local
Hexadecimal Decimal possibility section
station station
For the master station: Stores the input status
from the remote/local
4000H 16384 —
Ver. 2 compatible /intelligent device/standby
to to 3 Read only
remote input (RX) master stations.
41FFH 16895
For the local station : Stores the input status
—
from the master station.
For the master station: Stores the output status to
the remote/local /intelligent
Write only — Section
device/standby master
8.3.2 (10)
stations.
4200H 16896 For the local station : Stores the output status to
Ver. 2 compatible
to to the master station.
remote output (RY) 3
43FFH 17407 Also, stores the receive
Read/write
data from the remote/other —
enabled
local/intelligent
device/standby master
stations.
For the master station: Stores the send data to
the remote device/all local
Write only —
/intelligent device/standby
master stations.
Ver. 2 compatible For the local station : Stores the send data to the
remote register master/other
4400H 17408 (RWw) 3 local/intelligent
to to Master station: device/standby master
4BFFH 19455 For sending stations.
Read/write
Local station: Also, stores the receive —
enabled
For sending/receiving data from the remote
device/other Section
local/intelligent 8.3.2 (11)
device/standby master
stations.
For the master station: Stores the receive data
Ver. 2 compatible from the remote
remote register device/local/intelligent —
4C00H 19456 (RWr) 3 device/standby master
to to Master station: stations. Read only
53FFH 21503 For receiving
Local station: For the local station : Stores the receive data
—
For receiving from the master station.

5400H 21504
1
to to Use prohibited — — — — —
7FFFH 32767
: Available, — : Not available
1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited. This may cause errors.
2 Used when the remote net ver. 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected.
3 Used when the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected.

8-8 8-8
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.3.2 Buffer memory details

The following explains the details of items shown in Table 8.2, "Buffer Memory List" in
Section 8.3.1.

(1) Parameter information area

Stores the parameter settings.
Do not perform write to the parameter information area. Doing so may cause an
error.

Table 8.3 Parameter Information Area List (1/3)

Address
Item Description
Hex. Dec.

0H 0 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations and
standby master station that are connected to the master station (including reserved
Number of connected
1H 1 stations).
modules
Default value: 64 (modules)
Storage area: 1 to 64 (modules)
Stores the number of retries when a communication error occurs.
2H 2 Number of retries Default value: 3 (times)
Storage area: 1 to 7 (times)
Stores the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations and
Number of automatic standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan.
3H 3
return modules Default value: 1 (module)
Storage area: 1 to 10 (modules)
Stores the station number of the standby master station.
Standby master station
4H 4 Default value: 0 (no standby master station specified)
specification
Storage area: 0 to 64 (0: No standby master station specified)

5H 5 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the data link status when a master station programmable controller CPU error
occurs.
Operation specification
6H 6 Default value: 0 (Stop)
when CPU is down
Storage area: 0 (Stop)
: 1 (Continue)
Stores either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan.
Scan mode Default value: 0 (Asynchronous)
7H 7
specification Storage area: 0 (Asynchronous)
: 1 (Synchronous)

8H 8 Delay time setting Set 0 for the delay time.

Stores the reserved station.

Reserved station
10H to 13H 16 to 19 Default value: 0 (Not specified)
specification
Storage area: Bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
Stores the error invalid station.
Error invalid station
14H to 17H 20 to 23 Default value: 0 (Not specified)
specification
Storage area: Bit corresponding to the station number turns on.

8-9 8-9
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.3 Parameter Information Area List (2/3)

Address
Item Description
Hex. Dec.

18H to 1FH 24 to 31 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the setting status of the types of the connected remote, local,
intelligent device and standby master stations.
Default value: 0101H (Ver.1compatible remote I/O station,
Occupies 1 station, Station number 1) to 0140H
(Ver.1compatible remote I/O station, Occupies 1
station, Station number 64)
Storage area: See below
b15 to b12 b11 to b8b7 to b0
Station type Number of Station number
occupied stations

1H: Occupies 1 station 1 to 64

20H (first module) 32 (first module) 2H: Occupies 2 stations (01H to 40H)
to to Station information 3H: Occupies 3 stations
5FH (64th module) 95 (64th module) 4H: Occupies 4 stations

0H: Ver. 1 compatible remote I/O station

1H: Ver. 1 compatible remote device station
2H: Ver. 1 compatible intelligent device station
5H: Ver. 2 compatible single remote device station
6H: Ver. 2 compatible single intelligent device station
8H: Ver. 2 compatible double remote device station
9H: Ver. 2 compatible double intelligent device station
BH: Ver. 2 compatible quadruple remote device station
CH: Ver. 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device station
EH: Ver. 2 compatible octuple remote device station
FH: Ver. 2 compatible octuple intelligent device station

60H to 7FH 96 to 127 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the buffer memory assignment status at transient
transmission to the local, intelligent device and standby master
stations.
80H(Send buffer) 128(Send buffer) Default value
The first intelligent

The first intelligent

device

device

81H(Receive buffer) 129(Receive buffer) Send buffer size: 40H (64) (word)
82H(Automatic update 130(Automatic update
Receive buffer size: 40H (64) (word)
buffer) buffer)
Automatic update buffer size: 80H (128) (word)
Allocation of
Storage area
communication
to to Communication buffer : 0H (0) (word) (no setting) or 40H (64)
buffer and
(word) to 1000H (4096) (word)
automatic update
The 26th

203(Send buffer)
The 26th

CBH(Send buffer)
intelligent device

intelligent device

Note that the total size of the

CCH(Receive buffer) 204(Receive buffer)
buffer communication buffer is within
CDH(Automatic update 205(Automatic update
buffer) buffer) 1000H (4096) (word).
Automatic update buffer: 0H (0) (word) (no setting) or 80H
(128) (word) to 1000H (4096) (word)
Note that the total size of the
automatic update buffers is within
1000H (4096) (word).

CEH, CFH 206, 207 (Use prohibited) —

Stores the station numbers of the remote I/O stations set as 8
8-point remote points in the remote I/O station points setting. 1, 2
D0H to D3H 208 to 211
I/O station setting Default value: 0 (no setting)
Storage area: Bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
1 Used in the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode.
2 When the setting is "8 points + 8 points (reserved)", the station numbers are stored into both the 8-
point remote I/O station setting and 16-point remote I/O station setting.

8 - 10 8 - 10
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.3 Parameter Information Area List (3/3)

Address
Item Description
Hex. Dec.
Stores the station numbers of the remote I/O stations set as 16
16-point remote points in the remote I/O station points setting. 1, 2
D4H to D7H 212 to 215
I/O station setting Default value: 0 (no setting)
Storage area: Bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
Stores the station numbers of the reserved stations set to 0 points. 1
0 points reserve
D8H to DBH 216 to 219 Default value: 0 (no setting)
station setting
Storage area: Bit corresponding to the station number turns on.

DCH to DFH 220 to 223 (Use prohibited) —

1 Used in the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode.
2 When the setting is "8 points + 8 points (reserved)", the station numbers are stored into both the 8-
point remote I/O station setting and 16-point remote I/O station setting.
(2) Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)
Used when the remote net ver. 1 mode or remote net additional mode is
selected.
(a) Master station remote I/O station/remote device station/local station
1) Master station
The input status from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RX) and local station (RY) is stored.
Two words are used per station.
2) Local station
Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output
(RY) of the address corresponding to the host station number.
The input status from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RX) and other local station is stored.
Two words are used per station.
… The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master
station and the local station.
(In the example below, RY9E and RY9F cannot be used.)

Remote I/O station Local station

Master station (Station number 1: occupies 1 station) (Station number 2: occupies 4 stations)

Address Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Address

For station E0H RX F to RX 0 X0F to X00 RY F to RY 0 160H For station

number 1 E1H RX 1F to RX 10 X1F to X10 RY 1F to RY 10 161H number 1

For station E2H RX 2F to RX 20 RY 2F to RY 20 162H For station

number 2 E3H RX 3F to RX 30 RY 3F to RY 30 163H number 2

For station E4H RX 4F to RX 40 RY 4F to RY 40 164H For station

number 3 E5H RX 5F to RX 50 RY 5F to RY 50 165H number 3

For station E6H RX 6F to RX 60 RY 6F to RY 60 166H For station

number 4 E7H RX 7F to RX 70 RY 7F to RY 70 167H number 4

For station E8H RX 8F to RX 80 RY 8F to RY 80 168H For station

number 5 E9H RX 9D to RX 90 RY 9D to RY 90 169H number 5

to to to to

For station 15CH RX7CF to RX7C0 RY7CF to RY7C0 1DCH For station
number 63 15DH RX7DF to RX7D0 RY7DF to RY7D0 1DDH number 63

For station 15EH RX7EF to RX7E0 RY7EF to RY7E0 1DEH For station
number 64 15FH RX7FF to RX7F0 RY7FF to RY7F0 1DFH number 64

8 - 11 8 - 11
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer-memory
addresses.

[Master station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 E0H to E1H 14 FAH to FBH 27 114H to 115H 40 12EH to 12FH 53 148H to 149H
2 E2H to E3H 15 FCH to FDH 28 116H to 117H 41 130H to 131H 54 14AH to 14BH
3 E4H to E5H 16 FEH to FFH 29 118H to 119H 42 132H to 133H 55 14CH to 14DH
4 E6H to E7H 17 100H to 101H 30 11AH to 11BH 43 134H to 135H 56 14EH to 14FH
5 E8H to E9H 18 102H to 103H 31 11CH to 11DH 44 136H to 137H 57 150H to 151H
6 EAH to EBH 19 104H to 105H 32 11EH to 11FH 45 138H to 139H 58 152H to 153H
7 ECH to EDH 20 106H to 107H 33 120H to 121H 46 13AH to 13BH 59 154H to 155H
8 EEH to EFH 21 108H to 109H 34 122H to 123H 47 13CH to 13DH 60 156H to 157H
9 F0H to F1H 22 10AH to 10BH 35 124H to 125H 48 13EH to 13FH 61 158H to 159H
10 F2H to F3H 23 10CH to 10DH 36 126H to 127H 49 140H to 141H 62 15AH to 15BH
11 F4H to F5H 24 10EH to10FH 37 128H to 129H 50 142H to 143H 63 15CH to 15DH
12 F6H to F7H 25 110H to 111H 38 12AH to 12BH 51 144H to 145H 64 15EH to 15FH
13 F8H to F9H 26 112H to 113H 39 12CH to 12DH 52 146H to 147H — —

[Local station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 160H to 161H 14 17AH to 17BH 27 194H to 195H 40 1AEH to 1AFH 53 1C8H to 1C9H
2 162H to 163H 15 17CH to 17DH 28 196H to 197H 41 1B0H to 1B1H 54 1CAH to 1CBH
3 164H to 165H 16 17EH to 17FH 29 198H to 199H 42 1B2H to 1B3H 55 1CCH to 1CDH
4 166H to 167H 17 180H to 181H 30 19AH to 19BH 43 1B4H to 1B5H 56 1CEH to 1CFH
5 168H to 169H 18 182H to 183H 31 19CH to 19DH 44 1B6H to 1B7H 57 1D0H to 1D1H
6 16AH to 16BH 19 184H to 185H 32 19EH to 19FH 45 1B8H to 1B9H 58 1D2H to 1D3H
7 16CH to 16DH 20 186H to 187H 33 1A0H to 1A1H 46 1BAH to 1BBH 59 1D4H to 1D5H
8 16EH to 16FH 21 188H to 189H 34 1A2H to 1A3H 47 1BCH to 1BDH 60 1D6H to 1D7H
9 170H to 171H 22 18AH to 18BH 35 1A4H to 1A5H 48 1BEH to 1BFH 61 1D8H to 1D9H
10 172H to 173H 23 18CH to 18DH 36 1A6H to 1A7H 49 1C0H to 1C1H 62 1DAH to 1DBH
11 174H to 175H 24 18EH to 18FH 37 1A8H to 1A9H 50 1C2H to 1C3H 63 1DCH to 1DDH
12 176H to 177H 25 190H to 191H 38 1AAH to 1ABH 51 1C4H to 1C5H 64 1DEH to 1DFH
13 178H to 179H 26 192H to 193H 39 1ACH to 1ADH 52 1C6H to 1C7H — —

8 - 12 8 - 12
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(b) Master station remote I/O station/remote device station/local station

1) Master station
The output status to the remote I/O station, remote device station (RY)
and all local stations (RX) is stored.
Two words are used per station.
2) Local station
The data received from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RY) and master station (RY) is stored.
Two words are used per station.

… The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master
station and the local station.
(In the example below, RY9E and RY9F cannot be used.)

Remote I/O station Local station

Master station (Station number 1: occupies 1 station) (Station number 2: occupies 4 stations)

Address Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Address

For station 160H RY F to RY 0 Y0F to Y00 RX F to RX 0 E0H For station

number 1 161H RY 1F to RY 10 Y1F to Y10 RX 1F to RX 10 E1H number 1

For station 162H RY 2F to RY 20 RX 2F to RX 20 E2H For station

number 2 163H RY 3F to RY 30 RX 3F to RX 30 E3H number 2

For station 164H RY 4F to RY 40 RX 4F to RX 40 E4H For station

number 3 165H RY 5F to RY 50 RX 5F to RX 50 E5H number 3

For station 166H RY 6F to RY 60 RX 6F to RX 60 E6H For station

number 4 167H RY 7F to RY 70 RX 7F to RX 70 E7H number 4

For station 168H RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX 80 E8H For station

number 5 169H RY 9D to RY 90 RX 9D to RX 90 E9H number 5

to to to to

For station 1DCH RY7CF to RY7C0 RX7CF to RX7C0 15CH For station
number 63 1DDH RY7DF to RY7D0 RX7DF to RX7D0 15DH number 63

For station 1DEH RY7EF to RY7E0 RX7EF to RX7E0 15EH For station
number 64 1DFH RY7FF to RY7F0 RX7FF to RX7F0 15FH number 64

8 - 13 8 - 13
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory
addresses.

[Master station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 160H to 161H 14 17AH to 17BH 27 194H to 195H 40 1AEH to 1AFH 53 1C8H to 1C9H
2 162H to 163H 15 17CH to 17DH 28 196H to 197H 41 1B0H to 1B1H 54 1CAH to 1CBH
3 164H to 165H 16 17EH to 17FH 29 198H to 199H 42 1B2H to 1B3H 55 1CCH to 1CDH
4 166H to 167H 17 180H to 181H 30 19AH to 19BH 43 1B4H to 1B5H 56 1CEH to 1CFH
5 168H to 169H 18 182H to 183H 31 19CH to 19DH 44 1B6H to 1B7H 57 1D0H to 1D1H
6 16AH to 16BH 19 184H to 185H 32 19EH to 19FH 45 1B8H to 1B9H 58 1D2H to 1D3H
7 16CH to 16DH 20 186H to 187H 33 1A0H to 1A1H 46 1BAH to 1BBH 59 1D4H to 1D5H
8 16EH to 16FH 21 188H to 189H 34 1A2H to 1A3H 47 1BCH to 1BDH 60 1D6H to 1D7H
9 170H to 171H 22 18AH to 18BH 35 1A4H to 1A5H 48 1BEH to 1BFH 61 1D8H to 1D9H
10 172H to 173H 23 18CH to 18DH 36 1A6H to 1A7H 49 1C0H to 1C1H 62 1DAH to 1DBH
11 174H to 175H 24 18EH to 18FH 37 1A8H to 1A9H 50 1C2H to 1C3H 63 1DCH to 1DDH
12 176H to 177H 25 190H to 191H 38 1AAH to 1ABH 51 1C4H to 1C5H 64 1DEH to 1DFH
13 178H to 179H 26 192H to 193H 39 1ACH to 1ADH 52 1C6H to 1C7H — —

[Local station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 E0H to E1H 14 FAH to FBH 27 114H to 115H 40 12EH to 12FH 53 148H to 149H
2 E2H to E3H 15 FCH to FDH 28 116H to 117H 41 130H to 131H 54 14AH to 14BH
3 E4H to E5H 16 FEH to FFH 29 118H to 119H 42 132H to 133H 55 14CH to 14DH
4 E6H to E7H 17 100H to 101H 30 11AH to 11BH 43 134H to 135H 56 14EH to 14FH
5 E8H to E9H 18 102H to 103H 31 11CH to 11DH 44 136H to 137H 57 150H to 151H
6 EAH to EBH 19 104H to 105H 32 11EH to 11FH 45 138H to 139H 58 152H to 153H
7 ECH to EDH 20 106H to 107H 33 120H to 121H 46 13AH to 13BH 59 154H to 155H
8 EEH to EFH 21 108H to 109H 34 122H to 123H 47 13CH to 13DH 60 156H to 157H
9 F0H to F1H 22 10AH to 10BH 35 124H to 125H 48 13EH to 13FH 61 158H to 159H
10 F2H to F3H 23 10CH to 10DH 36 126H to 127H 49 140H to 141H 62 15AH to 15BH
11 F4H to F5H 24 10EH to10FH 37 128H to 129H 50 142H to 143H 63 15CH to 15DH
12 F6H to F7H 25 110H to 111H 38 12AH to 12BH 51 144H to 145H 64 15EH to 15FH
13 F8H to F9H 26 112H to 113H 39 12CH to 12DH 52 146H to 147H — —

8 - 14 8 - 14
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(3) Remote registers (RWw) and (RWr)

Used when the remote net ver. 1 mode or remote net additional mode is
selected.

(a) Master station (RWw) remote device station (RWw)/local station (RWr)

1) Master station
The data to be sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station and the remote registers (RWr) of all local stations are stored.
Four words are used per station.
2) Local station
The data sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station can also be received.
Four words are used per station.

Remote device station Local station

Master station (Station number 1: occupies 1 station) (Station number 2: occupies 4 stations)

Address Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr) Address
1E0H RWw 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 2E0H
For station 1E1H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 2E1H For station
number 1 1E2H RWw 2 RWw 2 RWr 2 2E2H number 1
1E3H RWw 3 RWw 3 RWr 3 2E3H
1E4H RWw 4 RWr 4 2E4H
For station 1E5H RWw 5 RWr 5 2E5H For station
number 2 1E6H RWw 6 RWr 6 2E6H number 2
1E7H RWw 7 RWr 7 2E7H
1E8H RWw 8 RWr 8 2E8H
For station 1E9H RWw 9 RWr 9 2E9H For station
number 3 1EAH RWw A RWr A 2EAH number 3
1EBH RWw B RWr B 2EBH
1ECH RWw C RWr C 2ECH
For station 1EDH RWw D RWr D 2EDH For station
number 4 1EEH RWw E RWr E 2EEH number 4
1EFH RWw F RWr F 2EFH
1F0H RWw 10 RWr 10 2F0H
For station 1F1H RWw 11 RWr 11 2F1H For station
number 5 1F2H RWw 12 RWr 12 2F2H number 5
1F3H RWw 13 RWr 13 2F3H

to to to to

2DCH RWw FC RWr FC 3DCH

For station 2DDH RWw FD RWr FD 3DDH For station
number 64 2DEH RWw FE RWr FE 3DEH number 64
2DFH RWw FF RWr FF 3DFH

8 - 15 8 - 15
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(b) Master station (RWr) ← remote device station (RWr)/local station (RWw)

1) Master station
The send data from the remote register (RWr) of the remote device
station and the remote register (RWw) of the local station is stored.
Four words are used per station.
2) Local station
Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it
in the address corresponding to the host station number.
Data in the remote register (RWr) of the remote device station can also
be received.
Four words are used per station.

Remote device station Local station

Master station (Station number 1: occupies 1 station) (Station number 2: occupies 4 stations)

Address Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWw) Address
2E0H RWr 0 RWr 0 RWw 0 1E0H
For station 2E1H RWr 1 RWr 1 RWw 1 1E1H For station
number 1 2E2H RWr 2 RWr 2 RWw 2 1E2H number 1
2E3H RWr 3 RWr 3 RWw 3 1E3H
2E4H RWr 4 RWw 4 1E4H
For station 2E5H RWr 5 RWw 5 1E5H For station
number 2 2E6H RWr 6 RWw 6 1E6H number 2
2E7H RWr 7 RWw 7 1E7H
2E8H RWr 8 RWw 8 1E8H
For station 2E9H RWr 9 RWw 9 1E9H For station
number 3 2EAH RWr A RWw A 1EAH number 3
2EBH RWr B RWw B 1EBH
2ECH RWr C RWw C 1ECH
For station 2EDH RWr D RWw D 1EDH For station
number 4 2EEH RWr E RWw E 1EEH number 4
2EFH RWr F RWw F 1EFH
2F0H RWr 10 RWw 10 1F0H
For station 2F1H RWr 11 RWw 11 1F1H For station
number 5 2F2H RWr 12 RWw 12 1F2H number 5
2F3H RWr 13 RWw 13 1F3H

to to to to

3DCH RWr FC RWw FC 2DCH

For station 3DDH RWr FD RWw FD 2DDH For station
number 64 3DEH RWr FE RWw FE 2DEH number 64
3DFH RWr FF RWw FF 2DFH

8 - 16 8 - 16
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory
addresses.

[Master station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 2E0H to 2E3H 14 314H to 317H 27 348H to 34BH 40 37CH to 37FH 53 3B0H to 3B3H
2 2E4H to 2E7H 15 318H to 31BH 28 34CH to 34FH 41 380H to 383H 54 3B4H to 3B7H
3 2E8H to 2EBH 16 31CH to 31FH 29 350H to 353H 42 384H to 387H 55 3B8H to 3BBH
4 2ECH to 2EFH 17 320H to 323H 30 354H to 357H 43 388H to 38BH 56 3BCH to 3BFH
5 2F0H to 2F3H 18 324H to 327H 31 358H to 35BH 44 38CH to 38FH 57 3C0H to 3C3H
6 2F4H to 2F7H 19 328H to 32BH 32 35CH to 35FH 45 390H to 393H 58 3C4H to 3C7H
7 2F8H to 2FBH 20 32CH to 32FH 33 360H to 363H 46 394H to 397H 59 3C8H to 3CBH
8 2FCH to 2FFH 21 330H to 333H 34 364H to 367H 47 398H to 39BH 60 3CCH to 3CFH
9 300H to 303H 22 334H to 337H 35 368H to 36BH 48 39CH to 39FH 61 3D0H to 3D3H
10 304H to 307H 23 338H to 33BH 36 36CH to 36FH 49 3A0H to 3A3H 62 3D4H to 3D7H
11 308H to 30BH 24 33CH to 33FH 37 370H to 373H 50 3A4H to 3A7H 63 3D8H to 3DBH
12 30CH to 30FH 25 340H to 343H 38 374H to 377H 51 3A8H to 3ABH 64 3DCH to 3DFH
13 310H to 313H 26 344H to 347H 39 378H to 37BH 52 3ACH to 3AFH — —

[Local station]
Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses
Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory Station Buffer memory
number address number address number address number address number address
1 1E0H to 1E3H 14 214H to 217H 27 248H to 24BH 40 27CH to 27FH 53 2B0H to 2B3H
2 1E4H to 1E7H 15 218H to 21BH 28 24CH to 24FH 41 280H to 283H 54 2B4H to 2B7H
3 1E8H to 1EBH 16 21CH to 21FH 29 250H to 253H 42 284H to 287H 55 2B8H to 2BBH
4 1ECH to 1EFH 17 220H to 223H 30 254H to 257H 43 288H to 28BH 56 2BCH to 2BFH
5 1F0H to 1F3H 18 224H to 227H 31 258H to 25BH 44 28CH to 28FH 57 2C0H to 2C3H
6 1F4H to 1F7H 19 228H to 22BH 32 25CH to 25FH 45 290H to 293H 58 2C4H to 2C7H
7 1F8H to 1FBH 20 22CH to 22FH 33 260H to 263H 46 294H to 297H 59 2C8H to 2CBH
8 1FCH to 1FFH 21 230H to 233H 34 264H to 267H 47 298H to 29BH 60 2CCH to 2CFH
9 200H to 203H 22 234H to 237H 35 268H to 26BH 48 29CH to 29FH 61 2D0H to 2D3H
10 204H to 207H 23 238H to 23BH 36 26CH to 26FH 49 2A0H to 2A3H 62 2D4H to 2D7H
11 208H to 20BH 24 23CH to 23FH 37 270H to 273H 50 2A4H to 2A7H 63 2D8H to 2DBH
12 20CH to 20FH 25 240H to 243H 38 274H to 277H 51 2A8H to 2ABH 64 2DCH to 2DFH
13 210H to 213H 26 244H to 247H 39 278H to 27BH 52 2ACH to 2AFH — —

8 - 17 8 - 17
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(4) Slave station offset, size information

In the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode, the assignment of
RX/RY/RWw/RWr for the station numbers varies according to the expanded
cyclic setting and remote I/O station points setting.

(a) Offset
Stores the head buffer memory address of RX/RY/RWw/RWr assigned to
each station.
When 2 or more stations are occupied, values are stored into only the head
buffer memory address of the station number. (When station No. 1
occupies 2 stations, values are stored into the RX/RY/RWw/RWr offset and
size of station No. 1, and the RX/RY/RWw/RWr offset and size of station
No. 2 remains default.)

(b) Size
Stores the size of RX/RY/RWw/RWr assigned to each station in word unit.
When the size is less than 1 word, it is rounded up and 1 is stored. (When
the remote I/O station points setting is 8 points, 1 is stored.)
Refer to Section 4.4.13 for the remote I/O station points setting method.
For the reserved station, 0000H is stored.

Table 8.4 Correspondence between Station Numbers and

RX/RY/RWw/RWr Offset, Size Buffer Memory Addresses
Buffer memory address
Item Default (Hex.)
Hex. Dec.
3E0H 992 Station No. 1 RX offset 0000H
3E1H 993 Station No. 1 RX size 0000H
to to to —
45EH 1118 Station No. 64 RX offset 0000H
45FH 1119 Station No. 64 RX size 0000H
460H 1120 Station No. 1 RY offset 0000H
461H 1121 Station No. 1 RY size 0000H
to to to —
4DEH 1246 Station No. 64 RY offset 0000H
4DFH 1247 Station No. 64 RY size 0000H
4E0H 1248 Station No. 1 RWw offset 0000H
4E1H 1249 Station No. 1 RWw size 0000H
to to to —
55EH 1374 Station No. 64 RWw offset 0000H
55FH 1375 Station No. 64 RWw size 0000H
560H 1376 Station No. 1 RWr offset 0000H
561H 1377 Station No. 1 RWr size 0000H
to to to —
5DEH 1502 Station No. 64 RWr offset 0000H
5DFH 1503 Station No. 64 RWr size 0000H

8 - 18 8 - 18
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Example) When the local station where expanded cyclic setting has been made and the remote I/O stations
where remote I/O station points setting has been made are connected
Local station
(Station number 1,
Occupies 2 stations,
Expanded cyclic setting:
Master station octuple)
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(Station number 3, (Station number 4,
Occupies 1 station, Occupies 1 station,
Remote I/O station point Remote I/O station point
setting: 8-point setting) setting: 8-point setting)

Buffer memory name Value Description

Station No. 1 RX offset 4000H Head buffer memory address of RX of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RX size 24 (18H) 384 (number of RX points) / 16 = 24 words
Station No. 2 RX offset 4000H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RX size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 3 RX offset 4018H Head buffer memory address of RX of station No. 3
Though the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4018H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 3 RX size 1 (1H)
RX of station No. 3, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Station No. 4 RX offset 4018H Head buffer memory address of RX of station No. 4
Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4018H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 4 RX size 1 (1H)
RX of station No. 4, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Station No. 1 RY offset 4200H Head buffer memory address of RY of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RY size 24 (18H) 384 (number of RY points) / 16 = 24 words
Station No. 2 RY offset 4000H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RY size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 3 RY offset 4218H Head buffer memory address of RY of station No. 3
Though the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4218H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 3 RY size 1 (1H)
RY of station No. 3, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Station No. 4 RY offset 4218H Head buffer memory address of RY of station No. 4
Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4218H are the corresponding size of
Station No. 4 RY size 1 (18H)
RY of station No. 4, 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up.
Station No. 1 RWw offset 4400H Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RWw size 64 (40H) 2 (number of occupied stations) 32 (expanded cyclic setting) = 64
Station No. 2 RWw offset 4400H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RWw size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 3 RWw offset 4440H Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No. 3
Station No. 3 RWw size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWw of station No. 3
Station No. 4 RWw offset 4440H Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No. 4
Station No. 4 RWw size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWw of station No. 4
Station No. 1 RWr offset 4C00H Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No. 1
Station No. 1 RWr size 64 (40H) 2 (number of occupied stations) 32 (expanded cyclic setting) = 64
Station No. 2 RWr offset 4C00H As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 2 RWr size 0 (default) As 2 stations are occupied, the area of station No. 1 is checked.
Station No. 3 RWr offset 4C40H Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No. 3
Station No. 3 RWr size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWr of station No. 3
Station No. 4 RWr offset 4C40H Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No. 4
Station No. 4 RWr size 0 (default) Buffer memory size of RWr of station No. 4

8 - 19 8 - 19
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(5) Link special relays (SB)

The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON/OFF data.
Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH correspond to link special relays
SB0000 to SB01FF.
For details on the link special relays (SB0000 to SB01FF), see Section 8.4.1.
The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses
5E0H to 5FFH and link special relays SB0000 to SB01FF.

Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

5E0H F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5E1H 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
5E2H 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
5E3H 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30
5E4H 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
5E5H 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50
5E6H 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
5E7H 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70
5E8H 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
5E9H 9F 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90
5EAH AF AE AD AC AB AA A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
5EBH BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
5ECH CF CE CD CC CB CA C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
5EDH DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
5EEH EF EE ED EC EB EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0
5EFH FF FE FD FC FB FA F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
5F0H 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100
5F1H 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11A 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110
5F2H 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120
5F3H 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130
5F4H 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140
5F5H 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150
5F6H 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160
5F7H 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170
5F8H 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180
5F9H 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190
5FAH 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1 1A0
5FBH 1BF 1BE 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1B0
5FCH 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 1C5 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1C0
5FDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 1D7 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 1D1 1D0
5FEH 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1E4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1E0
5FFH 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1F0

8 - 20 8 - 20
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(6) Link special registers (SW)

The link special registers store the data link status using word data.
Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special registers
SW0000 to SW01FF.
For more details on the link special registers (SW0000 to SW01FF), see Section
8.4.2.

(7) Random access buffer

The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations.
The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission.

(8) Communication buffer

The communication buffers stores the send and receive data when performing
transient transmission (communication using the communication buffers)
between the local stations, standby master station, and intelligent device stations.
The communication buffer sizes for the local station, standby master station, and
intelligent device station are set with network parameters.
For more details on the communication buffer size settings, see Section 6.2.

[Example of communication using the communication buffers]

Master station Local station (first module)

CPU CPU
Buffer memory
1)
Device memory
G(P).RIRD
1)

Receive 2)
buffer for the
first module 2)

1) Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the
CPU.
2) Stores the data specified by the control data in the receive buffer for the first
module.
Master station Local station (first module)
CPU CPU
2) Buffer memory

1) Send buffer
Device memory
G(P).RIWT for the first
module 2)

1) Stores the data to be written in the buffer memory of the local station or to the
device memory of the CPU in the send buffer for the first module.
2) Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the
CPU.
8 - 21 8 - 21
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(9) Automatic update buffer

The automatic update buffer stores automatic update data when performing
transient transmission (communication using the automatic update buffer) with
the AJ65BT-R2(N).
The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT-R2 is specified by a network
parameter.
For more details on the automatic update buffer size settings, see Section 6.2.

[Communication example using the automatic update buffer]

Master station AJ65BT-R2(N) (first module)

CPU
Buffer memory

1) Automatic
G(P).RIFR Automatic update
Automatic update
2) update buffer
D buffer for memory
the first
module

1) Accesses the automatic update buffer for the first module.

2) Stores the data specified by the control data in the CPU device.
For details on the automatic update timing, see CC-Link System RS-232
Interface Module User's Manual (Nonprocedural Protocol Mode) AJ65BT-
R2N.

8 - 22 8 - 22
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(10) Ver.2 compatible remote input (RX) and Ver.2 compatible remote
output (RY)
Used when the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode is
selected.
(a) Master station Remote I/O station/remote device station/local station
1) Master station
The input status from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RX) and local station (RY) is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, 2, 4 or 8 words are used. The number of
used points changes depending on the extended cyclic setting and the
number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
2) Local station
Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output
(RY) of the address corresponding to the host station number.
The input status from the remote I/O station, remote device station
(RX) and other local station is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 2 to 8 words are used. The number
of used points changes depending on the extended cyclic setting and
the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
… The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master
station and the local station.
(In the example below, RYEE and RYEF cannot be used.)

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station

(Station number 1: Occupies 1 (Station number 2: Occupies 1 Local station Local station
(Example) station, Remote I/O station station, Remote I/O station (Station number 3: Occupies 4 (Station number 7: Occupies 4
point setting: point setting: stations, Expanded cyclic stations, Expanded cyclic
Master station 16-point setting) 32-point setting) setting, double) setting, double)

Address Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Address Remote output (RY) Address
Station Station Station
4000H RX F to RX 0 X0F to X00 RY F to RY 0 4200H RY F to RY 0 4200H
number 1 number 1 number 1
Station 4001H RX 1F to RX 10 X1F to X10 RY 1F to RY 10 4201H RY 1F to RY 10 4201H
Station Station
number 2 4002H RX 2F to RX 20 X2F to X20 RY 2F to RY 20 4202H number 2 RY 2F to RY 20 4202H number 2
4003H RX 3F to RX 30 RY 3F to RY 30 4203H RY 3F to RY 30 4203H
4004H RX 4F to RX 40 RY 4F to RY 40 4204H RY 4F to RY 40 4204H
Station Station Station
number 3 number 3 number 3
400FH RX FF to RX F0 RY FF to RY F0 420FH RY FF to RY F0 420FH
4010H RX 10D to RX 100 RY 10D to RY 100 4210H RY 10D to RY 100 4210H
4011H RX 11F to RX 110 RY 11F to RY 110 4211H RY 11F to RY 110 4211H
4012H RX 12F to RX 120 RY 12F to RY 120 4212H RY 12F to RY 120 4212H
Station
Station Station
number 7
number 7 number 7
400DH RX 1DF to RX 1D0 RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH
400EH RX 1EF to RX 1E0 RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421EH RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421EH

41FCH RX1FCF to RX1FC0 RY1FCF to RY1FC0 43FCH RY1FCF to RY1FC0 43FCH

41FDH RX1FDF to RX1FD0 RY1FDF to RY1FD0 43FDH RY1FDF to RY1FD0 43FDH
41FEH RX1FEF to RX1FE0 RY1FEF to RY1FE0 43FEH RY1FEF to RY1FE0 43FEH
41FFH RX1FFF to RX1FF0 RY1FFF to RY1FF0 43FFH RY1FFF to RY1FF0 43FFH

POINT
The assignment range of each station in the preset station information can be
confirmed by the slave station offset and size information (buffer memory
addresses 3E0H to 5DFH). (Refer to Section 8.3.2 (4).)

8 - 23 8 - 23
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(b) Master station Remote I/O station/remote device station/local station

1) Master station
The output status to the remote I/O station, remote device station (RY)
and all local stations (RX) is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, 2, 4 or 8 words are used. The number of
used points changes depending on the extended cyclic setting and the
number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
2) Local station
The data received from remote I/O stations, remote device stations
(RY) and master station (RY) are stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 2 to 8 words are used. The number
of used points changes depending on the extended cyclic setting and
the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)

… The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master
station and the local station.
(In the example below, RYEE and RYEF cannot be used.)
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Local station Local station
(Example) (Station number 1: Occupies 1 (Station number 2: Occupies 1 (Station number 3: Occupies 4 (Station number 7: Occupies 4
station, Remote I/O station station, Remote I/O station stations, Expanded cyclic stations, Expanded cyclic setting,
Master station point setting: 16-point setting) point setting: 32-point setting) double)
setting, double)

Address Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Address Remote input (RX) Address
Station
number 1 4200H RY F to RY 0 Y0F to Y00 RX F to RX 0 4000H Station RX F to RX 0 4000H Station
number 1 number 1
Station 4201H RY 1F to RY 10 4001H 4001H
Y1F to Y10 RX 1F to RX 10 Station RX 1F to RX 10 Station
number 2 4202H RY 2F to RY 20 Y2F to Y20 RX 2F to RX 20 4002H number 2 RX 2F to RX 20 4002H number 2
4203H RY 3F to RY 30 4003H 4003H
RX 3F to RX 30 RX 3F to RX 30
4204H RY 4F to RY 40 4004H 4004H
RX 4F to RX 40 RX 4F to RX 40
Station
number 3 Station Station
number 3 number 3
420FH RY FF to RY F0 400FH 400FH
RX FF to RX F0 RX FF to RX F0
4210H RY 10D to RY 100 RX 10F to RX 100 4010H 4010H
RX 10F to RX 100
4211H RY 11F to RY 110 4011H 4011H
RX 11F to RX 110 RX 11F to RX 110
4212H RY 12F to RY 120 RX 12F to RX 120 4012H RX 12F to RX 120 4012H
Station
number 7 Station Station
number 7 number 7
421DH RY 1DF to RY 1D0 RX 1DF to RX 1D0 401DH RX 1DF to RX 1D0 401DH
421EH RY 1EF to RY 1E0 RX 1EF to RX 1E0 401EH RX 1EF to RX 1E0 401EH

43FCH RY1FCF to RY1FC0 RX1FCF to RX1FC0 41FCH RX1FCF to RX1FC0 41FCH

43FDH RY1FDF to RY1FD0 RX1FDF to RX1FD0 41FDH RX1FDF to RX1FD0 41FDH
43FEH RY1FEF to RY1FE0 RX1FEF to RX1FE0 41FEH RX1FEF to RX1FE0 41FEH
43FFH RY1FFF to RY1FF0 RX1FFF to RX1FF0 41FFH RX1FFF to RX1FF0 41FFH

POINT
The assignment range of each station in the preset station information can be
confirmed by the slave station offset and size information (buffer memory
addresses 3E0H to 5DFH). (Refer to Section 8.3.2 (4).)

8 - 24 8 - 24
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(11) Ver.2 compatible remote registers (RWw) and (RWr)

Used when the remote net ver. 2 mode or remote net additional mode is
selected.

(a) Master station (RWw) remote device station (RWw)/local station (RWr)

1) Master station
The data to be sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station and the remote registers (RWr) of all local stations are stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 4 to 32 words are used. The
number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic
setting and the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
2) Local station
The data sent to the remote register (RWw) of the remote device
station can also be received.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 4 to 32 words are used. The
number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic
setting and the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)

(Example) Remote device station Local station

(Station number 1: Occupies 1 station, (Station number 2: Occupies 1 station,
Master station Expanded cyclic setting: single) Expanded cyclic setting: quadruple)

Address Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr) Address
4400H RWw 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 4C00H
Station 4401H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 4C01H Station
number 1 4402H RWw 2 RWw 2 RWr 2 4C02H number 1
4403H RWw 3 RWw 3 RWr 3 4C03H
4404H RWw 4 RWr 4 4C04H
4405H RWw 5 RWr 5 4C05H
4406H RWw 6 RWr 6 4C06H
4407H RWw 7 RWr 7 4C07H
4408H RWw 8 RWr 8 4C08H
4409H RWw 9 RWr 9 4C09H
440AH RWw A RWr A 4C0AH
440BH RWw B RWr B 4C0BH
Station Station
number 2 440CH RWw C RWr C 4C0CH number 2
440DH RWw D RWr D 4C0DH
440EH RWw E RWr E 4C0EH
440FH RWw F RWr F 4C0FH
4410H RWw 10 RWr 10 4C10H
4411H RWw 11 RWr 11 4C11H
4412H RWw 12 RWr 12 4C12H
4413H RWw 13 RWr 13 4C13H

to to to to

4BFCH RWw 7FC RWr 7FC 53FCH

4BFDH RWw 7FD RWr 7FD 53FDH
4BFEH RWw 7FE RWr 7FE 53FEH
4BFFH RWw 7FF RWr 7FF 53FFH

8 - 25 8 - 25
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

(b) Master station (RWr) ← remote device station (RWr)/local station (RWw)

1) Master station
The send data from the remote register (RWr) of the remote device
station and the remote register (RWw) of the local station is stored.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 4 to 32 words are used. The
number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic
setting and the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)
2) Local station
Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it
in the address corresponding to the host station number.
Data in the remote register (RWr) of the remote device station can also
be received.
When 1 station is occupied, any of 4 to 32 words are used. The
number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic
setting and the number of occupied stations. (see Section 3.1)

(Example) Remote device station Local station

(Station number 1: Occupies 1 station, (Station number 2: Occupies 1 station,
Master station Expanded cyclic setting: single) Expanded cyclic setting: quadruple)

Address Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWw) Address
4C00H RWr 0 RWr 0 RWw 0 4400H
Station 4C01H RWr 1 RWr 1 RWw 1 4401H Station
number 1 4C02H RWr 2 RWr 2 RWw 2 4402H number 1
4C03H RWr 3 RWr 3 RWw 3 4403H
4C04H RWr 4 RWw 4 4404H
4C05H RWr 5 RWw 5 4405H
4C06H RWr 6 RWw 6 4406H
4C07H RWr 7 RWw 7 4407H
4C08H RWr 8 RWw 8 4408H
4C09H RWr 9 RWw 9 4409H
4C0AH RWr A RWw A 440AH
4C0BH RWr B RWw B 440BH
Station Station
number 2 4C0CH RWr C RWw C 440CH number 2
4C0DH RWr D RWw D 440DH
4C0EH RWr E RWw E 440EH
4C0FH RWr F RWw F 440FH
4C10H RWr 10 RWw 10 4410H
4C11H RWr 11 RWw 11 4411H
4C12H RWr 12 RWw 12 4412H
4C13H RWr 13 RWw 13 4413H

to to to to

53FCH RWr 7FC RWw 7FC 4BFCH

53FDH RWr 7FD RWw 7FD 4BFDH
53FEH RWr 7FE RWw 7FE 4BFEH
53FFH RWr 7FF RWw 7FF 4BFFH

8 - 26 8 - 26
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.4 Link Special Relays and Registers (SB/SW)

The data link status can be checked with bit data (link special relays: SB) and word
data (link special registers: SW).
The SB and SW represent the information in the buffer memory of the master/local
module, which is used by reading to the device specified in an automatic refresh
parameter.
• Link special relays (SB) : Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH
• Link special registers (SW): Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH

8.4.1 Link special relays (SB)

Link special relays SB0000 to SB001F are turned ON/OFF by the sequence program,
and SB0020 to SB01FF are automatically turned ON/OFF.
The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address.
When the standby master station is controlling the data link, the availability of the link's
special relays is basically identical to that of the master station.
When the standby master station is operating as a local station, the availability of the
link's special relays is identical to that of a local station.
For the correspondence with the buffer memory, see Section 8.3.2 (5).

Table 8.5 Link special relay list (1/5)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002.
SB0000
Data link restart OFF: Restart not instructed
(5E0H, b0)
ON : Restart instructed
Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is
Refresh instruction at
SB0001 transferred to the standby master station.
standby master
(5E0H, b1) OFF: Not instructed
switching
ON : Instructed
Stops the host data link.
However, when the master station executes this, the entire system
SB0002
Data link stop will stop.
(5E0H, b2)
OFF: No stop instruction
ON : Stop instructed
Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the
SB0003 when changing G(P).RLPASET instruction.
(5E0H, b3) parameters by the OFF: Not instructed (stop refreshing)
dedicated instruction ON : Instructed (start/continue refreshing)
Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 as
SB0004 Temporary error temporary error invalid stations.
(5E0H, b4) invalid request OFF: Not requested
ON : Requested
Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by
Temporary error
SB0005 SW0003 to SW0007.
invalid canceling
(5E0H, b5) OFF: Not requested
request
ON : Requested
Master station Instructs to cancel master station duplication error.
SB0007
duplication error OFF: Not instructed
(5E0H, b7)
canceling request ON : Instructed
Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008.
SB0008
Line test request OFF: Not requested
(5E0H, b8)
ON : Requested
Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system
configuration.
SB0009 Parameter information
(enabled only on Ver.1 remote stations)
(5E0H, b9) read request
OFF: Not requested
ON : Requested

8 - 27 8 - 27
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.5 Link special relay list (2/5)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Use this to perform the transmission speed test.
SB000B Transmission speed
OFF: Not requested
(5E0H, b11) test request
ON : Requested
Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master
station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in
SB000C Forced master 1
case the standby master station becomes faulty.
(5E0H, b12) switching
OFF: Not requested
ON : Requested
Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the
initialization procedure registration.
Remote device station
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and
initialization procedure
(5E0H, b13) remote registers stops.
registration instruction
OFF: Not instructed
ON : Instructed
Indicates the module access (module operation) status.
SB0020
Module status OFF: Normal (Module is operating normally)
(5E2H, b0)
ON : Abnormal (Module error has occurred)
Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgement status.
SB0040 Data link restart
OFF: Not acknowledged
(5E4H, b0) acceptance
ON : Startup instruction acknowledged
Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgement
SB0041 Data link restart completion status.
(5E4H, b1) complete OFF: Not complete
ON : Startup complete
Refresh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master
SB0042 acknowledgement switching have been acknowledged.
(5E4H, b2) status at standby OFF: Not executed
master switching ON : Instruction acknowledged
Refresh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master
SB0043 complete status at switching is complete.
(5E4H, b3) standby master OFF: Not executed
switching ON : Switching complete
Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgement status.
SB0044 Data link stop
OFF: Not acknowledged
(5E4H, b4) acceptance
ON : Stop instruction acknowledged
Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgement completion
SB0045 Data link stop status.
(5E4H, b5) complete OFF: Not complete
ON : Stop complete
Indicates whether the forced master switching (SB000C) signal can
Forced master
SB0046 be executed or not. 1
switching
(5E4H, b6) OFF: Cannot be executed.
executable status
ON: Can be executed.
Indicates the acknowledgement status of remote station temporary
Temporary error
SB0048 error invalid instruction.
invalid acceptance
(5E4H, b8) OFF: Not executed
status
ON : Instruction acknowledged
Indicates the acknowledgement completion status of remote station
Temporary error temporary error invalid instruction.
SB0049
invalid complete OFF: Not executed
(5E4H, b9)
status ON : Temporary error invalid station established/Specified station
number is invalid
Temporary error Indicates the acknowledgement status of remote station temporary
SB004A invalid canceling error invalid cancel instruction.
(5E4H, b10) acknowledgement OFF: Not executed
status ON : Instruction acknowledged
Indicates the acknowledgement completion status of remote station
Temporary error
SB004B temporary error invalid cancel instruction.
invalid canceling
(5E4H, b11) OFF: Not executed
complete status
ON : Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete
Indicates the line test request acknowledgement status.
SB004C Line test acceptance
OFF: Not executed
(5E4H, b12) status
ON : Instruction acknowledged

1: Can be used for the standby master station only.

8 - 28 8 - 28
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.5 Link special relay list (3/5)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Indicates the line test completion status.
SB004D Line test complete
OFF: Not executed
(5E4H, b13) status
ON : Test complete
Parameter information Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgement
SB004E read status.
(5E4H, b14) acknowledgement OFF: Not executed
status ON : Instruction acknowledged
Indicates the completion status of the parameter information read
Parameter information
SB004F request.
read completion
(5E4H, b15) OFF: Not executed
status
ON : Test complete
Indicates the offline test execution status.
SB0050
Offline test status OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b0)
ON : In progress
Master station Indicates the acknowledgement status of master station duplication
SB0057 duplication error error canceling request.
(5E5H, b7) canceling OFF: Not acknowledged
acknowledgement ON : Acknowledged
Indicates the completion status of master station duplication error
Master station
SB0058 canceling request.
duplication error
(5E5H, b8) OFF: Not complete
canceling complete
ON : Complete
Indicates the acknowledgement status of the standby master station
Master switching
SB005A when it has received a master switching request from the line.
request
(5E5H, b10) OFF: Not acknowledged
acknowledgement
ON : Request acknowledged
Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master
SB005B Master switching station to master station is complete.
(5E5H, b11) request complete OFF: Not complete
ON : Complete
Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been
Forced master
SB005C acknowledged. 1
switching request
(5E5H, b12) OFF: Not acknowledged
acknowledgement
ON : Instruction acknowledged
Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is
Forced master
SB005D complete. 1
switching request
(5E5H, b13) OFF: Not complete
complete
ON : Complete
Execution status of Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure.
SB005E
remote device station OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b14)
initialization procedure ON : Being executed
Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure
Completion status of
SB005F execution.
remote device station
(5E5H, b15) OFF: Not complete
initialization procedure
ON : Complete
Indicates the mode setting status of the transmission speed/mode
SB0060 setting switch for the host.
Host mode
(5E6H, b0) OFF: Online
ON : Other than online
Indicates the station type of the host.
SB0061
Host type OFF: Master station (station number 0)
(5E6H, b1)
ON : Local station (station numbers 1 to 64)
Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for
SB0062 Host standby master the host.
(5E6H, b2) station setting status OFF: No setting
ON : Setting exists
Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the
Input data status of
SB0065 host.
host data link faulty
(5E6H, b5) OFF: Clear
station
ON : Retain

1: Can be used for the standby master station only.

8 - 29 8 - 29
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.5 Link special relay list (4/5)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Indicates the setting status of host occupied stations.
SB0066 Number of
(5E6H, b6) SB0066 SB0067
occupied station
Number of host
1 station OFF OFF
occupied stations
2 stations OFF ON
SB0067 3 stations ON ON
(5E6H, b7) 4 stations ON OFF

Indicates the switch setting status.

SB006A
Switch setting status OFF: Normal
(5E6H, b10)
ON : Setting error exists (the error code is stored in SW006A)
Indicates the parameter setting status.
SB006D Parameter setting
OFF: Normal
(5E6H, b13) status
ON : Setting error exists (the error code is stored in SW0068)
Indicates the data link communication status with other stations.
SB006E Host station operation
OFF: Being executed
(5E6H, b14) status
ON : Not executed
Indicates the "block guarantee of cyclic data per station" setting
Setting status of block
SB006F status.
guarantee of cyclic
(5E6H,b15) OFF: Not set
data per station
ON : Set
Indicates the data link status.
SB0070 Master station
OFF: Data link control by the master station
(5E7H, b0) information
ON : Data link control by the standby master station
Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present.
SB0071 Standby master
OFF: Not present
(5E7H, b1) station information
ON : Present
Indicates the scan mode setting information.
SB0072 Scan mode setting
OFF: Asynchronous mode
(5E7H, b2) information
ON : Synchronous mode
Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when
Operation
SB0073 the CPU is down.
specification when
(5E7H, b3) OFF: Stop
CPU is down status
ON : Continue
Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter.
SB0074 Reserved station OFF: No specification
(5E7H, b4) specified status ON : Specification exists (information is stored in SW0074 to
SW0077)
Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a
parameter.
SB0075 Error invalid station
OFF: No specification
(5E7H, b5) specified status
ON : Specification exists (information is stored in SW0078 to
SW007B)
Temporary error Indicates whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting.
SB0076
invalid station setting OFF: No setting
(5E7H, b6)
information ON : Setting exists (information is stored in SW007C to SW007F)
Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station.
SB0077 Parameter receive
OFF: Reception complete
(5E7H, b7) status
ON : Reception not complete
Detects changes to the host setting switch during data linking.
SB0078 Host station switch
OFF: No changes detected
(5E7H, b8) change detection
ON : Changes detected
Indicates whether the "Type" setting of the network parameters is set
Master station return
SB0079 to "Master station" or "Master station (Duplex function)."
specification
(5E7H, b9) OFF: Master station
information
ON : Master station (Duplex function)

8 - 30 8 - 30
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.5 Link special relay list (5/5)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master
Host master/standby
SB007B station.
master operation
(5E7H, b11) OFF: Operates as the master station (controlling data link)
status
ON : Operates as the standby master station (standby)
Slave station
Indicates the parameter-set slave station refresh/compulsory clear
refresh/compulsory
SB007C setting status in case of programmable controller CPU STOP.
clear setting status in
(5E7H, b12) OFF: Refresh
case of programmable
ON : Clears compulsorily
controller CPU STOP
Indicates the communication status between remote/local/intelligent
device/standby master stations.
SB0080 Other station data link
2 OFF: All stations normal
(5E8H, b0) status
ON : Faulty station exists (information is stored in SW0080 to
SW0083)
Other station Indicates the occurrence of a watchdog timer error in other stations.
SB0081
watchdog timer error OFF: No error
(5E8H, b1)
status ON : Error occurrence.
Indicates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations.
SB0082 Other station fuse (SW0088 to SW008B)
(5E8H, b2) blown status OFF: No error
ON : Error occurrence.
Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data
SB0083 Other station switch linking.
(5E8H, b3) change status OFF: No change
ON : Change detected.
Indicates the line status of the host.
SB0090
Host line status OFF: Normal
(5E9H, b0)
ON : Abnormal (line disconnection)
Indicates whether a transient transmission error has occurred in other
Other stations stations.
SB0094
transient transmission OFF: No error
(5E9H, b4)
status ON : Error occurrence. (SW0094 to SW0097)
Even when a dedicated instruction was retried, an error is detected.
Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station.
SB0095
transient transmission OFF: Normal
(5E9H, b5)
status ON : Abnormal
Stores the test result of Line test 1/Line test 2.
SB00B4 Standby master
OFF: Normal
(5EBH, b4) station test result
ON : Abnormal
Stores a result of the transmission speed test for the standby master
station.
Transmission speed
SB0184 OFF: Normal (Same transmission speed as that of master station),
test result for standby
(5F8 H, b4) or no response from the module
master station
ON : Abnormal (Different transmission speed from that of master
station)
Indicates the accept status of Transmission speed test request
SB0185 Transmission speed (SB000B).
(5F8 H , b5) test accept status OFF: Not accepted
ON : Accepted
Indicates the completion status of the transmission speed test.
SB0186 Transmission speed
OFF: Not complete
(5F8 H , b6) test completion status
ON : Test complete

2: The other station data link status (SB0080) takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave station connected
to the master/local station becomes faulty.
The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration, faulty status or other conditions.

8 - 31 8 - 31
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.4.2 Link special registers (SW)

Data is stored in the link special registers SW000 to SW001F by the sequence
program, and data is automatically stored in SW0020 to SW01FF. The values in
parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory addresses.
When the standby master station is controlling the data link, availability is basically
identical to that of the master station.
When the standby master station is operating as a local station, availability is identical
to that of a local station.

Table 8.6 Link special register list (1/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Select whether multiple temporary error invalid stations are
specified.
Multiple temporary 00 : Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to
SW0003
error invalid station SW0007.
(603H)
specification 01 to 64: Specifies a single station from 1 to 64.
(The specified number indicates the station number of a
temporary error invalid station.)
Specifies a temporary error invalid station.
0: Not specified as a temporary error invalid station
SW0004 1: Specified as a temporary error invalid station
(604H)
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0005
Temporary error SW0004 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(605H)
invalid station SW0005 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW0006
specification 2 SW0006 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(606H)
SW0007 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW0007
(607H) Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Error invalid stations, reserved stations and any station of the
number higher than the max. are not specified.
0 : Entire system (executed for all stations)
SW0008 Line test station
01 to 64 : Specified station only
(608H) setting
Default value: 0
Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used.
Default value: 10 (seconds)
Setting range: 0 to 360 (seconds)
SW0009 Monitoring time The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value
(609H) setting outside of the above setting range is specified.
If a value is set in SW000B, time elapsed until error completion of a
dedicated instruction is as follows:
(Number of retries + 1) x Monitoring time
Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed
with a dedicated instruction.
SW000A CPU monitoring time Default value: 90 (seconds)
(60AH) setting Setting range: 0 to 3600 (seconds)
The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value
outside of the above setting range is specified.
Set the number of retries for use of dedicated instructions.
SW000B Dedicated instruction Default value: 0 (No retry)
(60BH) retry count setting Setting range: 0 to 7 (times)
When the set value is out of the range, 7 is applied.

2: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.

8 - 32 8 - 32
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (2/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Specifies the station to be initialized using the information saved in
initialization procedure registration.
SW0014 0: Initial processing not performed
(614H)
1: Initial processing performed
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
SW0015
Specification of SW0014 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(615H) SW0015 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1
remote device station
SW0016 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
SW0016 to be initialized.
SW0017 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
(616H)
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
SW0017
Not necessary to set for the number of occupied stations.
(617H)
Error invalid stations, reserved stations and any station of the number
higher than the max. are not specified.
Indicates the status of communication with a programmable controller
CPU.
SW0020
Module status 0 : Normal
(620H)
Other than 0: Stores an error code (Error code of programmable
controller CPU).
Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with
SW0041 SB0000.
Data link restart result
(641H) 0 : Normal
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master
Refresh instruction at
SW0043 switching.
standby master
(643H) 0 : Normal
switching result
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the execution result of the data-link stop instruction with
SW0045 SB0002.
Data link stop result
(645H) 0 : Normal
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Indicates the execution result of temporary error invalid station
Temporary error
SW0049 specification.
invalid station
(649H) 0 : Normal
specification result
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Temporary error Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station
SW004B invalid station specification cancellation.
(64BH) specification cancel 0 : Normal
result Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Indicates the execution result of the line test.
SW004D
Line test result 0 : Normal
(64DH)
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Indicates the execution result of the parameter setting test.
SW004F Parameter setting test
0 : Normal
(64FH) result
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the system configuration check result when a new station is
Automatic CC-Link
SW0052 added to a system using an automatic CC-Link startup.
startup execution
(652H) 0 : Normal
result
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3.)
Stores the execution result of the master station duplication error
canceling request.
Master station
SW0057 0 : Normal
duplication error
(657H) Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3.)
canceling result
B31AH : Data linking
BBC5H : Master station duplication error

1: Can be used for the standby master station only.

8 - 33 8 - 33
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (3/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Stores the details of the LED display status.
0: OFF
1: ON

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0

LINE(ERROR) : Cable is disconnected or the

transmission path is affected by
noise.
TIME(ERROR): Responses cannot be received from
any station due to the cable being
SW0058 Detailed LED display disconnected or the transmission
path being affected by noise.
(658H) status PRM(ERROR) : Invalid parameter value
M/S(ERROR) : Duplicate master station on the
same line
SW(ERROR) : Error in switch settings
LOCAL : Operating as a local station
S MST : Operating as the standby master station
MST : Operating as the master station
ERR. : Error occurrence
RUN : The module is operating normally.

Stores the contents of the transmission speed setting.

0: Cancel
1: Set

b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0
SW0059 Transmission speed
10 Mbps
(659H) setting
5 Mbps
2.5 Mbps
625 kbps
156 kbps

Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction

Forced master
SW005D with SB000C. 1
switching instruction
(65DH) 0 : Normal
result Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Remote device station Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration
SW005F initialization procedure instruction with SB000D.
(65FH) registration instruction 0 : Normal
result Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the mode setting status.
0: Online (Remote net mode)
1: Online (Remote I/O net mode)
SW0060
Mode setting status 2: Offline
(660H) 3: Line test 1
4: Line test 2
6: Hardware test
Stores the station number of the host that is currently in operation.
SW0061
Host station number 0 : Master station
(661H) 1 to 64: Local station
1: Can be used for the standby master station only.

8 - 34 8 - 34
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (4/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Stores the operation setting status of the module.
b15 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0
Station type
0: Master station/local station
1: Standby master station
(Valid only when b1 is 0)
Master station duplex function
0: Master station duplex function invalid
1: Master station duplex function valid
Input status from the data
link faulty station
0: Clear
1: Hold
Number of occupied stations
00: Occupies 1 station
10: Occupies 2 stations
SW0062 Module operating 11: Occupies 3 stations
(662H) status 01: Occupies 4 stations
Master station/local station
start by dedicated instruction
0: Start by CPU parameter
1: Start by dedicated instruction
Slave station refresh/compulsory
clear setting in case of programmable
controller CPU STOP
0: Refresh
1: Clears compulsorily
Expanded cyclic setting
00: Single
01: Double
10: Quadruple
11: Octuple
Block guarantee of cyclic data per station
0: Not set
1: Set

Indicates the retry count setting information when there is an error

SW0064 No. of retries
response.
(664H) information 1 to 7 (times)
Indicates the setting information for the number of automatic return
SW0065 No. of automatic
stations during one link scan.
(665H) return stations 1 to 10 (stations)
SW0066 Delay timer
Indicates the delay time setting information.
(666H) information
Stores the parameter information area to be used.
0H: CPU built-in parameters
SW0067
Parameter information 3H: Dedicated instruction (parameter setting with the
(667H) G(P).RLPASET instruction and data link startup.)
DH: Default parameters (automatically starts CC-Link)
Stores the parameter setting status.
SW0068
Host parameter status 0 : Normal
(668H) Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of
each station.
SW0069 0 : Normal
Loading status 3 Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
(669H)
Details are stored in SW0098 to 9B and SW009C to
9F.
Stores the switch setting status.
SW006A
Switch setting status 0 : Normal
(66AH)
Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
SW006D
Max. link scan time Stores the maximum value of the link scan time (in 1 ms units).
(66DH)
SW006E
Current link scan time Stores the current value of the link scan time (in 1 ms units).
(66EH)
SW006F
Min. link scan time Stores the minimum value of the link scan time (in 1 ms units).
(66FH)
SW0070 Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter.
(670H) stations 1 to 64 (stations)
Stores the maximum station number (setting of the station number
SW0071 Max. communication
setting switch) that is performing data link.
(671H) station number
1 to 64 (stations)
SW0072 Number of connected
Stores the number of modules that are performing data link.
(672H) modules
3: This register checks and stores the status only at link startup.

8 - 35 8 - 35
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (5/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
SW0073 Standby master Stores the station number of the standby master station.
(673H) station number 1 to 64 (stations)
Stores the reserved station setting status.
0: Not reserved station
SW0074
1: Reserved station
(674H)

SW0075 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(675H) Reserved station SW0074 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
2
SW0076 specified status SW0075 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(676H) SW0076 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0077 SW0077 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(677H)
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Any station of the number higher than the max. are excepted.
Stores the error invalid station setting status.
0: Other than error invalid station
SW0078 1: Error invalid station
(678H)
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0079
SW0078 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(679H) Error invalid station
2 SW0079 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW007A specified status
SW007A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(67AH)
SW007B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW007B
(67BH) Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excepted.
Indicates the temporary error invalid status.
0: Normal status
SW007C 1: Temporary error invalid status
(67CH)
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW007D
SW007C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(67DH) Temporary error
5 SW007D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW007E invalid status
SW007E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(67EH)
SW007F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW007F
(67FH) Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Error invalid stations, reserved stations and any station of the
number higher than the max. are excepted.
Stores the data link status of each station.
0: Normal
1: Data link error occurred
SW0080
(680H) b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0081 SW0080 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(681H) Other station data link SW0081 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW0082 status 5 7 to
SW0082 48 47 46 45 36 35 34 33
(682H)
SW0083 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW0083
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
(683H)
Temporary error invalid stations, error invalid stations, reserved
stations and any station of the number higher than the max. are
excepted.

2: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
5: Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on.
7: The other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave
station connected to the master/local station becomes faulty.
The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration, faulty status or other conditions.
8 - 36 8 - 36
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (6/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Indicates the watchdog timer error occurrence status.
0: No watchdog timer error
SW0084 1: Watchdog timer error occurred
(684H)
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0085
Other station SW0084 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(685H)
watchdog timer error SW0085 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW0086 occurrence status 2
(686H) SW0086 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0087 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW0087
(687H) Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excepted.
Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station.
0: Normal
SW0088 1: Abnormal
(688H)
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0089
SW0088 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(689H) Other station fuse
blown status
5 SW0089 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW008A
(68AH) SW008A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW008B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW008B
(68BH) Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excepted.
Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data
link.
0: No change
SW008C
1: Change occurred
(68CH)

SW008D b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(68DH) Other station switch SW008C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
2
SW008E change status SW008D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(68EH) SW008E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW008F SW008F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(68FH)
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excepted.
Stores the line status.
SW0090
Line status 0: Normal
(690H)
1: Data link cannot be performed (disconnected)

2: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
5: Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on.

8 - 37 8 - 37
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (7/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Indicates the transient transmission error status of each station.
0: No transient transmission error
SW0094 1: Transient transmission error occurrence
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(694H)
SW0094 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW0095
Other stations SW0095 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(695H)
transient transmission
SW0096 2 SW0096 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
status
(696H) SW0097 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW0097 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
(697H) Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excluded.
Even when a dedicated instruction was retried, an error is detected.
Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each
module is not overlapped.
0: Normal
1: Overlap station number (first station number only)
SW0098
(698H) b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

SW0099 SW0098 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
(699H) Station number SW0099 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
6
SW009A overlap status SW009A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(69AH)
SW009B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW009B
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
(69BH)
Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excluded.
Unable to detect station number overlapping of standby master
stations.
Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the
parameter settings.
A matching error occurs in any of the following cases.
1) Station type mismatch
2) Number of occupied stations mismatch
3) Expanded cyclic setting mismatch
4) CC-Link compatible version mismatch
A matching error will not occur when installation parameter. (For
example, a matching error will not occur when a remote device
station is installed and the parameter setting is an intelligent
device station.)
SW009C 0: Normal
(69CH) 1: Matching error
SW009D Example of matching error
(69DH) Loading/parameter
6 Installation Parameter
SW009E consistency status
(69EH) Remote device station Remote I/O station

SW009F Remote I/O station

(69FH) Intelligent device station
Remote device station
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW009C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW009D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW009E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW009F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.

Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excluded.

2: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
6: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
The status is checked and stored only at link startup and at parameter update.

8 - 38 8 - 38
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 Link special register list (8/10)

Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Stores the line test 1 result.
0: Normal
SW00B4
1: Abnormal
(6B4H)

SW00B5 b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0

(6B5H) 6 SW00B4 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
Line test 1 result
SW00B6 SW00B5 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(6B6H)
SW00B6 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW00B7 SW00B7 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
(6B7H)
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.

Stores the line test 1/line test 2 result.

SW00B8
Line test result 0 : Normal
(6B8H)
Other than 0: Stores the error code (see Section 13.3).
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0110
registration execution
(710 H)
individual information
(target 1)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0111
registration execution
(711 H)
individual information
(target 2)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0112
registration execution
(712 H)
individual information
(target 3)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0113
registration execution
(713 H)
individual information
The execution phase of initialization procedure registration is stored.
(target 4)
Upper bit: Next execution procedure number (FFH at completion)
Remote device station
Lower bit: Targeted station number
initialization procedure
SW0114
registration execution
(714 H)
individual information
(target 5)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0115
registration execution
(715 H)
individual information
(target 6)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0116
registration execution
(716 H)
individual information
(target 7)
Remote device station
initialization procedure
SW0117
registration execution
(718 H)
individual information
(target 8)

6: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
In addition, these registers check and store the status at link startup and at parameter update.

8 - 39 8 - 39
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 List of link special registers (9/10)

Availability
(o: Available, x: Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
SW0118 registration
(718 H) execution
individual
information (target
9)
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
SW0119 registration
(719 H) execution
individual
information (target
10)
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
SW011A registration
(71A H) execution
individual
information (target
11)
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
Stores the execution information of initialization procedure registration.
SW011B registration
High: Next execution procedure number (FF H at completion)
(71B H) execution
Low: Targeted station number
individual
information (target
12)
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
SW011C registration
(71C H) execution
individual
information (target
13)
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
SW011D registration
(71D H) execution
individual
information (target
14)
Remote device
station initialization
procedure
SW011E registration
(71E H) execution
individual
information (target
15)

8 - 40 8 - 40
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

Table 8.6 List of link special registers (10/10)

Availability
(o: Available, x: Not available)
Number Name Description
Online
Offline
Master station Local station
Remote device station
Stores the execution information of initialization procedure
initialization procedure
SW011F registration.
registration execution
(71F H) High: Next execution procedure number (FF H at completion)
individual information
Low: Targeted station number
(target 16)
Indicates the slave stations compatible with CC-Link ver. 2.
0: Ver.1compatible slave station
SW0140 1: Ver.2compatible slave station
(740H)
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0141
(741H) SW0140 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
Compatible CC-Link
5 SW0141 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW0142 ver. information
(742H) SW0142 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0143 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
SW0143
(743H) Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Reserved stations and any station of the number higher than the
max. are excepted.
Stores the CC-Link version matching status of the parameters and
slave stations.
0: Normal
1: Matching error
Example of matching error
SW0144
(744H) Installation Parameter
Ver.2compatible remote Ver.1compatible remote
SW0145 device station device station
CC-Link ver. Ver.1compatible remote Ver.2compatible remote
(745H)
installation/parameter device station device station
SW0146 matching status
5
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(746H)
SW0144 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW0147 SW0145 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(747H)
SW0146 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0147 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.
Reserved stations and final station number onwards are not
targeted.
Indicates in which mode the system is operating.
SW0148 0: Remote net ver.1 mode
Parameter mode
(748H) 1: Remote net additional mode
2: Remote net ver.2 mode
Indicates in which mode the host is operating.
SW0149 0: Remote net ver.1 mode
Host parameter mode
(749H) 1: Remote net additional mode
2: Remote net ver.2 mode
Indicates the execution result of the transmission speed test.
SW0183 Transmission speed
0: Normal
(783H) test result
Other than 0: Stores an error code (see Section 13.3)
Indicates transmission speed test results by station numbers.
SW0184 0: Normal (Same transmission speed as that of master station), or
(784H) no response from the module
1: Abnormal (Different transmission speed from that of master
SW0185 station)
(785H) Transmission speed b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
test result for each
SW0184 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
SW0186 station*2
(786H) SW0185 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
SW0186 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
SW0187
(787H) SW0187 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers.

2: Only the bit for the first station number is turned on.
5: The bits for the number of occupied stations turn ON.

8 - 41 8 - 41
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

The timing when the data in a link special register (SW) is updated differs depending
on the link register number.
Table 8.7 lists the update timings of link special registers.

Table 8.7 Update timing of the link special registers

Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing
Updated independently regardless
SW0041 SW0071
Updated independently regardless of SB
of SB (Update after each station is
SW0045 SW0072
stabilized.)
SW0060 When SB0060 changes SW0074 to SW0077 When SB0074 changes
SW0061 When SB0061 changes SW0078 to SW007B When SB0075 changes
SW0062 SW0080 to SW0083 When SB0080 changes
Updated independently regardless
SW0067 SW0088 to SW008B
of SB
SW0068 SW0090 When SB0090 changes
SW0069 Updated independently regardless SW0098 to SW009B
SW006A of SB SW009C to SW009F Updated independently regardless
SW006D SW00B4 to SW00B7 of SB
SW006E SW00B8
SW006F
—— ——
SW0070

8 - 42 8 - 42
8 PROGRAMMING
MELSEC-Q

8.5 Mode Selection Method

Four different modes are available for CC-Link to be applicable to various systems.
The following flowchart explains the points of mode selection.

1)

Do you use CC-Link for Yes

the first time?

No

Does the system Yes Are modules to be Yes

completely utilize the connected only remote
previous system?
I/O stations?

No No Select the remote I/O

net mode.
Is the previous system Yes
in the remote I/O net
mode? Are modules to be Yes
connected only local
stations?
No

Select the remote net Select the remote I/O No

ver. 1 mode. net mode.
Are the numbers
of points used per station Yes
32 points for RX/RY and 4 points
for RWw/RWr without any
problem?

No
Is a ver. 2 compatible Yes
station added to the
previous system? Select the remote net Select the remote net
ver. 2 mode. ver. 1 mode.

No

Are the sequence Yes Do the modules Yes

programs for ver. 1 to be connected include a
stations utilized? ver. 2 compatible
station?

No No

1) Select the remote net Select the remote net Select the remote net
ver. 2 mode. additional mode. ver. 2 mode.

Will a ver. 2
Yes
compatible station be
connected in the
future?
No

Select the remote net Select the remote net

ver. 1 mode. ver. 2 mode.

8 - 43 8 - 43
 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I/O

STATIONS

This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings,
programming, and finally operation check using a system configuration example.

9.1 When Remote I/O Net Mode is Used

The remote I/O net mode is used.

9.1.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system with three connected remote I/O stations is used as an
example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Remote I/O station (station number 1) Remote I/O station (station number 2) Remote I/O station (station number 3)
AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16T AJ65BTB1-16DT

Input module Output module I/O module

Terminal
resistor

9-1 9-1
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master station

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.

STATION
NO.
× 10
5

0
Station number setting switch
0 ( 10)
Master station must be set to "00".
0 ( 1)
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

9-2 9-2
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the remote I/O stations

Settings of the remote I/O station switches are shown below:

Transmission speed/mode setting switch Station number setting switch

0 (156 kbps/online)
Module 10 1
AJ65BTB1-16D 0 1
AJ65BTC1-16T 0 2
AJ65BTB1-16DT 0 3

MITSUBISHI AJ65BTB1-16D B RATE

0 1
2
PW L RUN SD RD L ERR. 3
4
STATION NO.
× 10 ×1
0 1 9 0 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 2 8 2
3 7 3
6 5 4 6 5 4

9-3 9-3
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

9.1.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link
Input data hold/clear
disorder Hold/ clear
Default: Clear
station setting
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings
Block
guarantee of Disable/Enable
Disable /Enable
cyclic data per Default: Disable
station
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 3 modules
Default: 64
Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
Remote input (RX)
ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST,
Remote output (RY)
D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or
Remote register (RWr)
ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
Remote register (RWw)
W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or
Ver.2 Remote input (RX)
ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST,
Ver.2 Remote output (RY)
D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or
(RWr) ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D,
(RWw) W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB
Special relay (SB)
or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW
Special register (SW)
or ZR

9-4 9-4
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Item Setting range Setting value

1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection 1 to 10
modules
station count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
Standby master station
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

(a) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

9-5 9-5
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

4) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting the refresh devices for special relay (SB) and special register (SW) to
SB and SW respectively, make sure that their device numbers do not duplicate with
those used in the CC-Link IE controller network and MELSECNET/H network.

(a) Example of automatic refresh parameter settings

An example of automatic refresh parameter settings is shown below:

9-6 9-6
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

9.1.3 Creating a program

This section shows the program used to control the remote I/O stations. The following
diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the programmable controller
CPU and the inputs/outputs of remote I/O stations.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.

Programmable controller CPU Remote I/O station (station number 1)

AJ65BTB1-16D

Station X100F to X1000 X0F to X00

number 1
X101F to X1010

Station X102F to X1020

number 2
X103F to X1030

Station X104F to X1048 X1047 to X1040 Remote I/O station (station number 2)
number 3
X105F to X1050 AJ65BTB1-16T

Y0F to Y00

Station Y100F to Y1000

number 1
Y101F to Y1010 Remote I/O station (station number 3)
Station Y102F to Y1020 AJ65BTB1-16DT
number 2
Y103F to Y1030

Station Y104F to Y1048 Y1047 to Y1040 Y0F to Y08 X07 to X00

number 3
Y105F to Y1050

9-7 9-7
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Read data link status

of each station

Station number 1 is faulty

Processing upon
occurrence of faulty Station number 2 is faulty
station
Station number 3 is faulty

Station number 1 is
performing the data link
Confirmation of data link Station number 2 is
status performing the data link
Station number 3 is
performing the data link

Control program for

station number 1

Control program Control program for

station number 2

Control program for

station number 3

9-8 9-8
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

9.1.4 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the remote I/O stations first, and then turn on the power to the
master station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the remote I/O station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the remote I/O station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off
AJ65BTB1-16D

PW L RUN SD RD L ERR.

24 V DC is being supplied The data link is being performed normally Sending data Receiving data

9-9 9-9
9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
I/O STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.

1) For example, when X00 of the remote I/O station AJ65BTB1-16D (station
number 1) is turned on, Y40 (QY41P) of the master station turns on.
2) When X21 (QX41) of the master station is turned on, Y08 of the remote I/O
station AJ65BTB1-16DT (station Number 3) turns on.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

X21 Y40

Terminal
resistor

ON
2)

ON
1)

Remote I/O station (station number 1) Remote I/O station (station number 2) Remote I/O station (station number 3)

AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB1-16T AJ65BTB1-16DT

Input module Output module I/O module

Terminal
resistor

X00 ON
1) ON
Y08 2)

9 - 10 9 - 10
 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE

DEVICE STATIONS

This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings,
programming, and finally operation check using a system configuration example.
For more detailed information on remote device stations, see the Remote Device
Station User's Manual.

10.1 When Remote Net Ver. 1 Mode is Used

10.1.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system with one connected remote I/O station is used as an
example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Terminal
resistor

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

Remote device station (station number 1)

Occupies 3 stations

10

10 - 1 10 - 1
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master station

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.

STATION
NO.

× 10
5

0
Station number setting switch
0 ( 10)
Master station must be set to "00".
0 ( 1)
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

10

10 - 2 10 - 2
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the remote device station

Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below:
For more detailed information about the contents of the settings, see the Remote
Device Station User's Manual.

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2
L RUN

3 L ERR Station number setting switch,

SW1 Transmission speed setting switch
TEST
4 40 OFF

1 place 10 place
1 STATION NO.
20 OFF
2
5 10 OFF
4
8 OFF Station
8 number 1
OFFSET 4 OFF
6 2 OFF
1 ON
GAIN
4 OFF
B RATE

7
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
MODE Mode select switch

0 (Normal mode)
CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D

10 - 3 10 - 3
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.1.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link
Input data hold/clear
disorder Hold/ clear
Default: Clear
station setting
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings
Block
guarantee of Disable/Enable
Disable /Enable
cyclic data per Default: Disable
station
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 1 modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
Remote register (RWw)
or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Ver.2 Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
(RWr)
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
(RWw) or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR

10 - 4 10 - 4
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Item Setting range Setting value

1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection 1 to 10
1 modules
station count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
Standby master station
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting station points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies
1 Remote device station single 3 stations 96 points No setting

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

10 - 5 10 - 5
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

10 - 6 10 - 6
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.1.3 Initial setting of the remote device station

This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station.

(1) Setting the target station number

Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed.
(a) Setting the target station number
Set the target to "1".

(b) Selecting the Regist procedure

Click the "Regist procedure" of the target station number "1".

(2) Setting the regist procedure registration

Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings.
In this section, AJ65VBTCU-68ADV is used as an example for the Regist
procedure registration.
The details to be set are as follows:
Set channels 1, 2 to A-D conversion enable (the first condition).
Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range setting
1 (the second condition).
Set channel 1 to Sampling processing, and specify channel 2 as Average
processing and set it to Number of times (the third condition).
Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the seventh condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the eighth condition).
For more detailed information about the settings, see the Remote Device Station
User's Manual.

Set the input format to "HEX.".

(a) Setting the first condition
1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

10 - 7 10 - 7
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "00", and the
"Write Data" to "0003".

(b) Setting the second condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "01", and
"Write Data" to "0031".

(c) Setting the third condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw" ,the "Device Number" to "03", and the
"Write Data" to "0200".

(d) Setting the fourth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "05", and the
"Write Data" to "0010".

(e) Setting the fifth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".

10 - 8 10 - 8
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Setting the sixth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".

(g) Setting the seventh condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "OFF".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "OFF".

(h) Setting the eighth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "19", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
"Write Data" to "OFF".

10 - 9 10 - 9
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(i) Setting results

The results of settings (a) to (h) are shown below.

10 - 10 10 - 10
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings

This section explains the link special relays (SB) relating to the initial settings of
remote device stations.
Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit
positions of the buffer memory.

Example: For buffer memory address 5E0H and bit 13: (5E0H, b13)

Table 10.1 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings
Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description Online
Master Offline
Local station
station
Starts initial processing using the information registered during
the initialization procedure registration.
Remote device station
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and
initialization procedure
(5E0H, b13) remote registers stops.
registration instruction
OFF: No instruction
ON: Instructed
Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure.
SB005E
device station initialization OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b14)
procedure ON: Being executed
Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization
Complete status of remote
SB005F procedure execution.
device station initialization
(5E0H, b15) OFF: Not complete
procedure
ON: Complete
Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration
Remote device station
SW005F instruction with SB000D.
initialization procedure
(65FH) 0: Normal
instruction result
Other than 0: Store an the error code (see Section 13.3).

Parameter setting is required in the case of a standby master station. (First 5 digits of serial No.must be
07112 or later.)

For details on how to create a program, see Section 10.1.4.

POINT
(1) When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction
(SB0000) is turned off after the initial processing completion, all of the RY
signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off.
Therefore, about signals that are required to turn always on, such as conversion
valid signal, they should be turned on in the sequence program.
(2) If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the
remote device station initialization procedure registration, the completion status
of remote device station initialization procedure (SB005F) does not turn on.
If there is a faulty station, turn off the remote device station initialization
procedure registration instruction (SB000D) according to the completion status
of the other stations.

10 - 11 10 - 11
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
Setting with the sequence program (Reference)
For reference, an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown
below.

Checking of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV status

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link normal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link abnormal

Initial settings
A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns on initial data
setting request flag (RY19).
Changing of initial settings
Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Processing at initial settings
Turns off initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Read of digital output values
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).
Reads CH.2 digital
output value (RWr1).
Processing at error occurrence

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 12 10 - 12
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.1.4 Creating a program

This section shows a program used to control remote device stations.

The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input/output and remote
registers between the programmable controller CPU devices and the remote device
station.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.
For detailed information about each remote device station, see the User's Manual for
each module.

[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]

Programmable controller CPU Remote device station (station number 1)
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

X100F to X1000 RX0F to RX00

X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10
X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030

Y100F to Y1000 RY0F to RY00

Y101F to Y1010 RY1F to RY10
Y102F to Y1020
Y103F to Y1030

10 - 13 10 - 13
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]

Programmable controller CPU Remote device station (station number 1)

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
For write
W100 RWw0 (A/D conversion enable/prohibit specification)
W101 RWw1 (CH.1 to CH.4 input range setting)
W102 RWw2 (CH.5 to CH.8 input range setting)
W103 RWw3 (Average processing specification)
W104 RWw4 (CH.1 average time, number of times setting)
W105 RWw5 (CH.2 average time, number of times setting)
W106 RWw6 (CH.3 average time, number of times setting)
W107 RWw7 (CH.4 average time, number of times setting)
W108 RWw8 (CH.5 average time, number of times setting)
W109 RWw9 (CH.6 average time, number of times setting)
W10A RWwA (CH.7 average time, number of times setting)
W10B RWwB (CH.8 average time, number of times setting)

For read
W000 RWr0 (CH.1 digital output value)
W001 RWr1 (CH.2 digital output value)
W002 RWr2 (CH.3 digital output value)
W003 RWr3 (CH.4 digital output value)
W004 RWr4 (CH.5 digital output value)
W005 RWr5 (CH.6 digital output value)
W006 RWr6 (CH.7 digital output value)
W007 RWr7 (CH.8 digital output value)
W008 RWr8 (Error code)
W009 RWr9 (Reserved)
W00A RWrA (Reserved)
W00B RWrB (Reserved)

10 - 14 10 - 14
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Checking of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV status

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link normal
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link abnormal

Initialization procedure registration Turns on initialization

procedure registration
directive.
Turns off initialization
procedure registration
directive.
Changing of initial settings
Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
setting request flag
(RY19).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Read of digital output values
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).
Reads CH.2 digital
output value (RWr1).
Processing at error occurrence

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 15 10 - 15
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.1.5 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the remote device station first, and then turn on the power to the
master station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the remote device station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

: On : Off

24 V DC is being supplied
POWER

RUN
Module is normal
L RUN
The data link is being
L ERR performed normally

10 - 16 10 - 16
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.

1) Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and confirm that the A-
D converted digital value also changes.

1)

A-D conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

D1500 CH1 Digital output value

D1501 CH2 Digital output value

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Terminal
resistor

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

1)

Remote device station (station number 1)

Occupies 3 stations

10 - 17 10 - 17
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.2 When Remote Net Ver.2 Mode is Used

10.2.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system where one ver.1 compatible remote device station and one
ver.2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Terminal
resistor

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Ver.1 compatible remote device station Ver.2 compatible remote device station
(station number 1) (station number 4)

Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station

10 - 18 10 - 18
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master station

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.

STATION
NO.

× 10
5

0
Station number setting switch
0 ( 10)
Master station must be set to "00".
0 ( 1)
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

10 - 19 10 - 19
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the remote device station

Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below:
For more detailed information about the contents of the settings, see the Remote
Device Station User's Manual.

Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2
L RUN

3 L ERR Station number setting switch,

SW1 Transmission speed setting switch
TEST
4 1 place 10 place 40 OFF
1 20 OFF
STATION NO.

2
5 10 OFF
4
8 OFF Station
8 number 1
OFFSET 4 OFF
6 2 OFF
1 ON
GAIN
4 OFF
B RATE

7
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
MODE Mode select switch

0 (Normal mode)
CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D

10 - 20 10 - 20
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CON
A L
I
N
K
CON
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2 UP
L RUN

3 DOWN L ERR Station number setting switch,

SW1 Transmission speed setting switch
TEST
4 40 OFF

1 place 10 place
1 20 OFF

STATION NO.
2
5 10 OFF
4 Station
8
8 OFF
number 4
OFFSET 4 ON
6 2 OFF
1 OFF
GAIN
4 OFF
B RATE
7
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
MODE Mode select switch

3 (Ver.2 Mode Normal mode)

CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D

10 - 21 10 - 21
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.2.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link
Input data hold/clear
disorder Hold/ clear
Default: Clear
station setting
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings
Block
guarantee of Disable/Enable
Disable /Enable
cyclic data per Default: Disable
station
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 2 modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
Remote register (RWw)
or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Ver.2 Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
(RWr)
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
(RWw) or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR

10 - 22 10 - 22
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Item Setting range Setting value

1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection 1 to 10
1 modules
station count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
Standby master station
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting station points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies
1 Ver.1Remote device station single 3 stations 96 points No setting

Occupies
4 Ver.2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting
1 station

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

10 - 23 10 - 23
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W1000.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

10 - 24 10 - 24
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.2.3 Initial setting of the remote device station

This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station.

(1) Setting the target station number

Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed.
(a) Setting the target station number
Set the target station numbers to "1" and "4".

(b) Selecting the Regist procedure

Click the "Regist procedure" of the target station number "1".

(2) Setting the regist procedure registration

Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings.
In this section, AJ65VBTCU-68ADV is used as an example for the Regist
procedure registration.
The details to be set are as follows:
Set channels 1, 2 to A-D conversion enable (the first condition).
Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range setting
1 (the second condition).
Set channel 1 to Sampling processing, and specify channel 2 as Average
processing and set it to Number of times (the third condition).
Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the seventh condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the eighth condition).
For more detailed information about the settings, see the Remote Device Station
User's Manual.

Set the input format to "HEX.".

(a) Setting the first condition
1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

10 - 25 10 - 25
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "00", and the
"Write Data" to "0003".

(b) Setting the second condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "01", and
"Write Data" to "0031".

(c) Setting the third condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw" ,the "Device Number" to "03", and the
"Write Data" to "0200".

(d) Setting the fourth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "05", and the
"Write Data" to "0010".

(e) Setting the fifth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".

10 - 26 10 - 26
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Setting the sixth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".

(g) Setting the seventh condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "OFF".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "OFF".

(h) Setting the eighth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "19", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
"Write Data" to "OFF".

10 - 27 10 - 27
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(i) Setting results

The results of settings (a) to (h) are shown below.

Similarly, make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN.

Click the "Regist procedure" of the target station number "4".

The details to be set are as follows:

Set channels 1, 2 to Analog output enable. (the first condition)

Set the output range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range
setting 1. (the second condition)
Set the HOLD/CLEAR setting of channels 1, 2 to CLEAR. (the third condition)
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the seventh condition).

10 - 28 10 - 28
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings

This section explains the link special relays (SB) relating to the initial settings of
remote device stations.
Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit
positions of the buffer memory.

Example: For buffer memory address 5E0H and bit 13: (5E0H, b13)

Table 10.2 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings
Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description Online
Master Offline
Local station
station
Starts initial processing using the information registered during
the initialization procedure registration.
Remote device station
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and
initialization procedure
(5E0H, b13) remote registers stops.
registration instruction
OFF: No instruction
ON: Instructed
Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure.
SB005E
device station initialization OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b14)
procedure ON: Being executed
Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization
Complete status of remote
SB005F procedure execution.
device station initialization
(5E0H, b15) OFF: Not complete
procedure
ON: Complete
Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration
Remote device station
SW005F instruction with SB000D.
initialization procedure
(65FH) 0: Normal
instruction result
Other than 0: Store an error code (see Section 13.3).

Parameter setting is required in the case of a standby master station. (First 5 digits of serial No. must be
07112 or later.)

For details on how to create a program, see Section 10.2.4.

POINT
(1) When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction
(SB0000) is turned off after the initial processing completion, all of the RY
signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off.
Therefore, about signals that are required to turn always on, such as conversion
valid signal, they should be turned on in the sequence program.
(2) If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the
remote device station initialization procedure registration, the completion status
of remote device station initialization procedure (SB005F) does not turn on.
If there is a faulty station, turn off the remote device station initialization
procedure registration instruction (SB000D) according to the completion status
of the other stations.

10 - 29 10 - 29
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
Setting with the sequence program (Reference)
For reference, an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown
below.

Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV, AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link abnormal
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN data
link abnormal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns on initial data
setting request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change
Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
setting request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting processing
Turns off initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)
HOLD/CLEAR setting
(RWwB)
Turns on initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns on initial data
setting request flag
(RY19).
The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

(To the next page)

10 - 30 10 - 30
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
(From the previous page)

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Initial setting change
Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)

Turns on initial data setting

request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting processing
Turns off initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).
Reads CH.2 digital
output value (RWr1).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV error occurrence processing

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN digital value setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CH.1 digital value
Digital value setting (RWw0) : 500
setting
CH.2 digital value
setting (RWw1) : 1000
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting
Turns on CH.1 analog
output enable/disable
Analog output flag (RY00).
enable Turns on CH.2 analog
output enable/disable
flag (RY01).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN error occurrence processing
Read CH. check code
(RWr0, RWr1).

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 31 10 - 31
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.2.4 Creating a program

This section shows a program used to control remote device stations.

The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input/output and remote
registers between the programmable controller CPU devices and the remote device
station.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.
For detailed information about each remote device station, see the User's Manual for
each module.

[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]

Remote device station Remote device station

Programmable controller CPU (station number 1) (station number 4)
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

X100F to X1000 RX0F to RX00

X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10
X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030
X104F to X1040
X105F to X1050
X106F to X1060 RX0F to RX00
X107F to X1070 RX1F to RX10
X108F to X1080
X109F to X1090

Y100F to Y1000 RY0F to RY00

Y101F to Y1010 RY1F to RY10
Y102F to Y1020
Y103F to Y1030
Y104F to Y1040
Y105F to Y1050
Y106F to Y1060 RY0F to RY00
Y107F to Y1070 RY1F to RY10
Y108F to Y1080
Y109F to Y1090

10 - 32 10 - 32
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]

Remote device station (station number 1) Remote device station (station number 4)
Programmable controller CPU AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
For write
W1000 RWw0 (A/D conversion enable/prohibit specification)

W1001 RWw1 (CH.1 to CH.4 input range setting)

W1002 RWw2 (CH.5 to CH.8 input range setting)

W1003 RWw3 (Average processing specification)

W1004 RWw4 (CH.1 average time, number of times setting)

W1005 RWw5 (CH.2 average time, number of times setting)

W1006 RWw6 (CH.3 average time, number of times setting)

W1007 RWw7 (CH.4 average time, number of times setting)

W1008 RWw8 (CH.5 average time, number of times setting)

W1009 RWw9 (CH.6 average time, number of times setting)

W100A RWwA (CH.7 average time, number of times setting)

W100B RWwB (CH.8 average time, number of times setting)

W100C RWw0 (CH.1 digital value setting)

W100D RWw1 (CH.2 digital value setting)

W100E RWw2 (CH.3 digital value setting)

W100F RWw3 (CH.4 digital value setting)

W1010 RWw4 (CH.5 digital value setting)

W1011 RWw5 (CH.6 digital value setting)

W1012 RWw6 (CH.7 digital value setting)

W1013 RWw7 (CH.8 digital value setting)

W1014 RWw8 (Analog output enable disable setting)

W1015 RWw9 (CH.1 to CH.4 output range setting)

W1016 RWwA (CH.5 to CH.8 output range setting)

W1017 RWwB (HOLD/CLEAR setting)

W1018 RWwC (Reserved)

W1019 RWwD (Reserved)

W101A RWwE (Reserved)

W101B RWwF (Reserved)

For read
W0000 RWr0 (CH.1 digital output value)

W0001 RWr1 (CH.2 digital output value)

W0002 RWr2 (CH.3 digital output value)

W0003 RWr3 (CH.4 digital output value)

W0004 RWr4 (CH.5 digital output value)

W0005 RWr5 (CH.6 digital output value)

W0006 RWr6 (CH.7 digital output value)

W0007 RWr7 (CH.8 digital output value)

W0008 RWr8 (Error code)

W0009 RWr9 (Reserved)

W000A RWrA (Reserved)

W000B RWrB (Reserved)

W000C RWr0 (CH.1 check code)

W000D RWr1 (CH.2 check code)

W000E RWr2 (CH.3 check code)

W000F RWr3 (CH.4 check code)

W0010 RWr4 (CH.5 check code)

W0011 RWr5 (CH.6 check code)

W0012 RWr6 (CH.7 check code)

W0013 RWr7 (CH.8 check code)

W0014 RWr8 (Error code)

W0015 RWr9 (Reserved)

W0016 RWrA (Reserved)

W0017 RWrB (Reserved)

W0018 RWrC (Reserved)

W0019 RWrD (Reserved)

W001A RWrE (Reserved)

W001B RWrF (Reserved)

10 - 33 10 - 33
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV, AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link abnormal
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN data
link abnormal

Initialization procedure registration

Turns off initialization
procedure registration
directive.

Turns on initialization
56 procedure registration
directive.

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).

Reads CH.2 digital

output value (RWr1).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV error occurrence processing

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).

Turns off error reset

request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 34 10 - 34
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting change

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Initial setting change
Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).

Turns off initial data setting

request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN digital value setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CH.1 digital value
Digital value
setting (RWw0) : 500
setting CH.2 digital value
setting (RWw1) : 1000
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting Turns on CH.1 analog
output enable/disable
flag (RY00).
Analog output
enable Turns on CH.2 analog
output enable/disable
flag (RY01).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN error occurrence processing
Read CH. check code
(RWr0, RWr1).

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 35 10 - 35
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.2.5 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the remote device station first, and then turn on the power to the
master station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the remote device station

For both the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, confirm that
the LED display status is as shown below.

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

: On : Off

24 V DC is being supplied
POWER

RUN
Module is normal
L RUN
The data link is being
L ERR performed normally

10 - 36 10 - 36
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.

1) Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and confirm that the A-
D converted digital value also changes.
2) Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, and confirm that the voltages
converted from digital to analog are output.

1) A-D conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

D500 CH1 Digital output value

D501 CH2 Digital output value

2) D-A conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

D510 CH1 Digital value setting

D511 CH2 Digital value setting

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Terminal
resistor

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

V
1) 2)

Ver.1 compatible remote device station Ver.2 compatible remote device station
(station number 1) (station number 4)

Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station

10 - 37 10 - 37
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used

10.3.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system where one ver. 1 compatible remote device station and one
ver. 2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Terminal
resistor

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Ver.1 compatible remote device station Ver.2 compatible remote device station
(station number 1) (station number 4)

Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station

10 - 38 10 - 38
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master station

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.

STATION
NO.

× 10
5

0
Station number setting switch
0 ( 10)
Master station must be set to "00".
0 ( 1)
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

10 - 39 10 - 39
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the remote device station

Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below:
For more detailed information about the contents of the settings, see the Remote
Device Station User's Manual.

Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2
L RUN

3 L ERR Station number setting switch,

SW1 Transmission speed setting switch
TEST
4 40 OFF
1 place 10 place
1 20 OFF
STATION NO.

2
5 10 OFF
4
8 OFF Station
8 number 1
OFFSET 4 OFF
6 2 OFF
1 ON
GAIN
4 OFF
B RATE

7
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
MODE Mode select switch

0 (Normal mode)
CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D

10 - 40 10 - 40
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Setting of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CON
A L
I
N
CON K
B
SEL
C
H POWER
1
SET
RUN
2 UP
L RUN

3 DOWN L ERR Station number setting switch,

SW1 Transmission speed setting switch
TEST
4 40 OFF

1 place 10 place
1 20 OFF

STATION NO.
2
5 10 OFF
4 Station
8
8 OFF
number 4
OFFSET 4 ON
6 2 OFF
1 OFF
GAIN
4 OFF
B RATE
7
2 OFF 156kbps
1 OFF
8
MODE Mode select switch

3 (Ver.2 Mode Normal mode)

CON
C P
O
W
E
CON R
D

10 - 41 10 - 41
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.3.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link
Input data hold/clear
disorder Hold/ clear
Default: Clear
station setting
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings
Block
guarantee of Disable/Enable
Disable /Enable
cyclic data per Default: Disable
station
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 2 modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
Remote register (RWw)
or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W,
Ver.2 Remote output (RY)
R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
(RWr)
Ver.2 Remote register Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R
(RWw) or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR

10 - 42 10 - 42
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Item Setting range Setting value

1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection 1 to 10
1 modules
station count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station
Standby master station
specified)
No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting station points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies
1 Ver.1Remote device station single 96 points No setting
3 stations

Occupies
4 Ver.2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting
1 station

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

10 - 43 10 - 43
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote input (RX) to X1500.

6) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote output (RY) to Y1500.

7) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWr) to W1000.

8) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWw) to W1500.

9) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

10) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

10 - 44 10 - 44
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.3.3 Initial setting of the remote device station

This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station.

(1) Setting the target station number

Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed.
(a) Setting the target station number
Set the target station numbers to "1" and "4".

(b) Selecting the Regist procedure

Click the "Regist procedure" of the target station number "1".

(2) Setting the regist procedure registration

Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings.
In this section, AJ65VBTCU-68ADV is used as an example for the Regist
procedure registration.
The details to be set are as follows:
Set channels 1, 2 to A-D conversion enable (the first condition).
Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range setting
1 (the second condition).
Set channel 1 to Sampling processing, and specify channel 2 as Average
processing and set it to Number of times (the third condition).
Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the seventh condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the eighth condition).
For more detailed information about the settings, see the Remote Device Station
User's Manual.

Set the input format to "HEX.".

(a) Setting the first condition
1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

10 - 45 10 - 45
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "00", and the
"Write Data" to "0003".

(b) Setting the second condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "01", and
"Write Data" to "0031".

(c) Setting the third condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw" ,the "Device Number" to "03", and the
"Write Data" to "0200".

(d) Setting the fourth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RWw", the "Device Number" to "05", and the
"Write Data" to "0010".

(e) Setting the fifth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".

10 - 46 10 - 46
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(f) Setting the sixth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Same as prev. set".

3) Details of execution setting

Set "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
"Write Data" to "ON".

(g) Setting the seventh condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "18", and
the "Execute Condition" to "OFF".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "18", and the
"Write Data" to "OFF".

(h) Setting the eighth condition

1) Execute Flag setting
Set the "Execute Flag" to "Execute".

2) Operational condition setting

Set the "Operational condition" to "Set new".

3) Executional condition settings

Set the "Condition Device" to "RX", the "Device Number" to "19", and
the "Execute Condition" to "ON".

4) Details of execution setting

Set the "Write Device" to "RY", the "Device Number" to "19", and the
"Write Data" to "OFF".

10 - 47 10 - 47
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(i) Setting results

The results of settings (a) to (h) are shown below.

Similarly, make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN.

Click the "Regist procedure" of the target station number "4".

The details to be set are as follows:

Set channels 1, 2 to Analog output enable. (the first condition)

Set the Output range of channel 1 to 0 - 5V, and channel 2 to User range
setting 1. (the second condition)
Set the HOLD/CLEAR setting of channels 1, 2 to CLEAR. (the third condition)
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON (the forth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON (the fifth condition).
Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF (the sixth condition).
Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF (the seventh condition).

10 - 48 10 - 48
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Validating the remote device station initial settings

This section explains the link special relays (SB) relating to the initial settings of
remote device stations.
Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit
positions of the buffer memory.

Example: For buffer memory address 5E0H and bit 13: (5E0H, b13)

Table 10.3 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings
Availability
( : Available, : Not available)
Number Name Description Online
Master Offline
Local station
station
Starts initial processing using the information registered during
the initialization procedure registration.
Remote device station
SB000D While SB000D is on, the refresh of the remote input/output and
initialization procedure
(5E0H, b13) remote registers stops.
registration instruction
OFF: No instruction
ON: Instructed
Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure.
SB005E
device station initialization OFF: Not executed
(5E5H, b14)
procedure ON: Being executed
Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization
Complete status of remote
SB005F procedure execution.
device station initialization
(5E0H, b15) OFF: Not complete
procedure
ON: Complete
Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration
Remote device station
SW005F instruction with SB000D.
initialization procedure
(65FH) 0: Normal
instruction result
Other than 0: Store an the error code (see Section 13.3).

Parameter setting is required in the case of a standby master station. (First 5 digits of serial No. must be
07112 or later.)

For details on how to create a program, see Section 10.3.4.

POINT
(1) When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction
(SB0000) is turned off after the initial processing completion, all of the RY
signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off.
Therefore, about signals that are required to turn always on, such as conversion
valid signal, they should be turned on in the sequence program.
(2) If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the
remote device station initialization procedure registration, the completion status
of remote device station initialization procedure (SB005F) does not turn on.
If there is a faulty station, turn off the remote device station initialization
procedure registration instruction (SB000D) according to the completion status
of the other stations.

10 - 49 10 - 49
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
Setting with the sequence program (Reference)
For reference, an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown
below.

Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV, AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link abnormal

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN data
link abnormal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns on initial data
setting request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change
Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data
setting request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting processing
Turns off initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)
HOLD/CLEAR setting
(RWwB)
Turns on initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns on initial data
setting request flag
(RY19).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.
(To the next page)

10 - 50 10 - 50
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
(From the previous page)

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Initial setting change
Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting processing
Turns off initial data
processing completion flag
(RY18).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).

Reads CH.2 digital

output value (RWr1).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV error occurrence processing

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN digital value setting
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CH.1 digital value
Digital value setting (RWw0) : 500
setting
CH.2 digital value
setting (RWw1) : 1000
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting
Turns on CH.1 analog
output enable/disable
Analog output flag (RY00).
enable Turns on CH.2 analog
output enable/disable
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN error occurrence processing flag (RY01).

Read CH. check code

(RWr0, RWr1).

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 51 10 - 51
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.3.4 Creating a program

This section shows a program used to control remote device stations.

The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input/output and remote
registers between the programmable controller CPU devices and the remote device
station.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.
For detailed information about each remote device station, see the User's Manual for
each module.

[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]

Remote device station Remote device station

Programmable controller CPU (station number 1) (station number 4)
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Ver.1compatible
X100F to X1000 RX0F to RX00
X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10
X102F to X1020
X103F to X1030
X104F to X1040
X105F to X1050
Y100F to Y1000 RY0F to RY00
Y101F to Y1010 RY1F to RY10
Y102F to Y1020
Y103F to Y1030
Y104F to Y1040
Y105F to Y1050

Ver.2compatible
X150F to X1500 RX0F to RX00
X151F to X1510 RX1F to RX10
X152F to X1520
X153F to X1530

Y150F to Y1500 RY0F to RY00

Y151F to Y1510 RY1F to RY10
Y152F to Y1520
Y153F to Y1530

10 - 52 10 - 52
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]

Remote device station (station number 1) Remote device station (station number 4)
Programmable controller CPU AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
Ver.1compatible for write
W100 RWw0 (A/D conversion enable/prohibit specification)
W101 RWw1 (CH.1 to CH.4 input range setting)
W102 RWw2 (CH.5 to CH.8 input range setting)
W103 RWw3 (Average processing specification)
W104 RWw4 (CH.1 average time, number of times setting)
W105 RWw5 (CH.2 average time, number of times setting)
W106 RWw6 (CH.3 average time, number of times setting)
W107 RWw7 (CH.4 average time, number of times setting)
W108 RWw8 (CH.5 average time, number of times setting)
W109 RWw9 (CH.6 average time, number of times setting)
W10A RWwA (CH.7 average time, number of times setting)
W10B RWwB (CH.8 average time, number of times setting)
Ver.1compatible for read
W000 RWr0 (CH.1 digital output value)
W001 RWr1 (CH.2 digital output value)
W002 RWr2 (CH.3 digital output value)
W003 RWr3 (CH.4 digital output value)
W004 RWr4 (CH.5 digital output value)
W005 RWr5 (CH.6 digital output value)
W006 RWr6 (CH.7 digital output value)
W007 RWr7 (CH.8 digital output value)
W008 RWr8 (Error code)
W009 RWr9 (Reserved)
W00A RWrA (Reserved)
W00B RWrB (Reserved)

Ver.2compatible for write

W1500 RWw0 (CH.1 digital value setting)
W1501 RWw1 (CH.2 digital value setting)
W1502 RWw2 (CH.3 digital value setting)
W1503 RWw3 (CH.4 digital value setting)
W1504 RWw4 (CH.5 digital value setting)
W1505 RWw5 (CH.6 digital value setting)
W1506 RWw6 (CH.7 digital value setting)
W1507 RWw7 (CH.8 digital value setting)
W1508 RWw8 (Analog output enable disable setting)
W1509 RWw9 (CH.1 to CH.4 output range setting)
W150A RWwA (CH.5 to CH.8 output range setting)

W150B RWwB (HOLD/CLEAR setting)

W150C RWwC (Reserved)

W150D RWwD (Reserved)

W150E RWwE (Reserved)

W150F RWwF (Reserved)

Ver.2compatible for read
W1000 RWr0 (CH.1 check code)
W1001 RWr1 (CH.2 check code)

W1002 RWr2 (CH.3 check code)

W1003 RWr3 (CH.4 check code)

W1004 RWr4 (CH.5 check code)

W1005 RWr5 (CH.6 check code)

W1006 RWr6 (CH.7 check code)

W1007 RWr7 (CH.8 check code)

W1008 RWr8 (Error code)

W1009 RWr9 (Reserved)

W100A RWrA (Reserved)

W100B RWrB (Reserved)

W100C RWrC (Reserved)

W100D RWrD (Reserved)

W100E RWrE (Reserved)

W100F RWrF (Reserved)

10 - 53 10 - 53
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV, AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV,
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
data link normal

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV data
link abnormal
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN data
link abnormal

Initialization procedure registration

Turns off initialization
procedure registration
directive.

Turns on initialization
procedure registration
directive.

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

Initial setting change A/D conversion enable/
prohibit specification
(RWw0)
CH.1 to CH.4 input
range setting (RWw1)
Average processing
specification (RWw3)
CH.2 average time,
number of times setting
(RWw5)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
Reads CH.1 digital
output value (RWr0).
Reads CH.2 digital
output value (RWr1).
AJ65VBTCU-68ADV error occurrence processing
Reads error code (RWr8).
Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 54 10 - 54
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN initial setting change AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Initial setting change Analog output enable/
disable setting (RWw8)
CH.1 to CH.4 output range
setting (RWw9)
Turns on initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
Turns off initial data setting
request flag (RY19).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN digital value setting AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
CH.1 digital value
setting (RWw0) : 500
Digital value
setting CH.2 digital value
setting (RWw1) : 1000
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN analog output enable/disable setting Turns on CH.1 analog
output enable/disable
flag (RY00).
Analog output
enable Turns on CH.2 analog
output enable/disable
flag (RY01).
AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN error occurrence processing
Read CH. check code
(RWr0, RWr1).

Reads error code (RWr8).

Error reset
Turns on error reset
request flag (RY1A).
Turns off error reset
request flag (RY1A).

The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed.

10 - 55 10 - 55
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

10.3.5 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the remote device station first, and then turn on the power to the
master station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the remote device station

For both the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, confirm that
the LED display status is as shown below.

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

: On : Off

24 V DC is being supplied
POWER

RUN
Module is normal
L RUN
The data link is being
L ERR performed normally

10 - 56 10 - 56
10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE
DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.

1) Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU-68ADV and confirm that the A-
D converted digital value also changes.
2) Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN, and confirm that the voltages
converted from digital to analog are output.

1) A-D conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68ADV

D500 CH1 Digital output value

D501 CH2 Digital output value

2) D-A conversion of AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

D510 CH1 Digital value setting

D511 CH2 Digital value setting

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Terminal
resistor

AJ65VBTCU-68ADV AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

V
1) 2)

Ver.1 compatible remote device station Ver.2 compatible remote device station
(station number 1) (station number 4)

Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station

10 - 57 10 - 57
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL

STATIONS
11
This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings,
programming, and finally operation check using a system configuration example.

11.1 Secured 32-bit Data

When the following conditions, 1) and 2) are satisfied in the CC-Link network, 32-bit
data in remote registers (RWr/RWw) between a programmable controller CPU and a
master/local station can be secured.

1) Access starts from a remote resister (RWr/RWw) address of an "even number".

Programmable Programmable
controller CPU Master station Local station controller CPU Master station Local station
CPU device Remote register Remote register CPU device Remote register Remote register
W000 RWr00 RWw00 W000 RWr00 RWw00
W001 RWr01 RWw01 W001 RWr01 RWw01
W002 RWr02 RWw02 W002 RWr02 RWw02
W003 RWr03 RWw03 W003 RWr03 RWw03
W004 RWr04 RWw04

Because the start address on the remote resister

side is an "odd address", new and old data may be
mixed in 16-bit (1-word) units.

2) Access by the sequence program must be made in units of even points.

Programmable Programmable
controller CPU Master station controller CPU Master station
CPU device Remote register CPU device Remote register
FROM
W000 DFRO RWr00 W000 RWr00
W001 RWr01 W001 RWr01
W002 RWr02 W002 RWr02
W003 RWr03 W003 RWr03

Because the access is made for each single point

(1-word), new and old data may be mixed in 16-bit
(1-word) units.

11 - 1 11 - 1
 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.2 When Remote Net Ver.1 Mode is Used

11 11.2.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system with one connected local station is used as an example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Local station (station number 1:

occupies 4 stations)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

11 - 2 11 - 2
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master and local stations

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
Station number setting switch
× 10
5

Module 10 1
Master station 0 0
Local station 0 1
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

11 - 3 11 - 3
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.2.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
Operational setting Default: Refresh
settings Block guarantee of
cyclic data per Disable/Enable
Disable /Enable
station function Default: Disable
setting
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 1 modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
1 modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 4 11 - 4
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote station Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies 64 64 128
1 Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting
4 stations

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 5 11 - 5
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 6 11 - 6
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.2.3 Setting the local station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the local station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the local station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
setting Default: Clear: Refresh
Number of occupied Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Operational Occupies 4 stations
stations Default: Occupies 1 station
settings
Expanded cyclic single/double/quadruple/octuple
setting Default: single
Block guarantee of
Disable/Enable
cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 7 11 - 7
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 8 11 - 8
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 9 11 - 9
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.2.4 Creating a program

This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master
and local stations. The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices
of the master station programmable controller CPU and the devices of the local station
programmable controller CPU.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.

[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]

Master station Local station
programmable Local station (station number 1: programmable
controller CPU Master station occupies 4 stations) controller CPU

X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000

X101F to X1010 RX01F to RX010 RY01F to RY010 Y101F to Y1010
X102F to X1020 RX02F to RX020 RY02F to RY020 Y102F to Y1020
X103F to X1030 RX03F to RX030 RY03F to RY030 Y103F to Y1030
X104F to X1040 RX04F to RX040 RY04F to RY040 Y104F to Y1040
X105F to X1050 RX05F to RX050 RY05F to RY050 Y105F to Y1050
X106F to X1060 RX06F to RX060 RY06F to RY060 Y106F to Y1060
X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070

Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000

Y101F to Y1010 RY01F to RY010 RX01F to RX010 X101F to X1010

Y102F to Y1020 RY02F to RY020 RX02F to RX020 X102F to X1020

Y103F to Y1030 RY03F to RY030 RX03F to RX030 X103F to X1030

Y104F to Y1040 RY04F to RY040 RX04F to RX040 X104F to X1040

Y105F to Y1050 RY05F to RY050 RX05F to RX050 X105F to X1050

Y106F to Y1060 RY06F to RY060 RX06F to RX060 X106F to X1060

Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070

The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master and local stations.

11 - 10 11 - 10
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]

Master station Local station

programmable programmable
controller CPU Master station Local station controller CPU

W000 RWr00 RWw00 W100

W001 RWr01 RWw01 W101
W002 RWr02 RWw02 W102
W003 RWr03 RWw03 W103
W004 RWr04 RWw04 W104
W005 RWr05 RWw05 W105
W006 RWr06 RWw06 W106
W007 RWr07 RWw07 W107
W008 RWr08 RWw08 W108
W009 RWr09 RWw09 W109
W00A RWr0A RWw0A W10A
W00B RWr0B RWw0B W10B
W00C RWr0C RWw0C W10C
W00D RWr0D RWw0D W10D
W00E RWr0E RWw0E W10E
W00F RWr0F RWw0F W10F

W100 RWw00 RWr00 W000

W101 RWw01 RWr01 W001
W102 RWw02 RWr02 W002
W103 RWw03 RWr03 W003
W104 RWw04 RWr04 W004
W105 RWw05 RWr05 W005
W106 RWw06 RWr06 W006
W107 RWw07 RWr07 W007
W108 RWw08 RWr08 W008
W109 RWw09 RWr09 W009
W10A RWw0A RWr0A W00A
W10B RWw0B RWr0B W00B
W10C RWw0C RWr0C W00C
W10D RWw0D RWr0D W00D
W10E RWw0E RWr0E W00E
W10F RWw0F RWr0F W00F

11 - 11 11 - 11
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Master station program

Local station status confirmation

Station number 1 is
performing the data link

Station number 1 is faulty

Control program
Control program using data
received from a local station
Program to generate
transmission data to a local
station

(2) Local station program

Confirmation of data link status

Local station is performing
data link

Control program
Control program using data
received from the master
station
Program to generate
send data to the master
station

11 - 12 11 - 12
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
Securing cyclic data on a per-station basis
By configuring an interlock with remote I/O (RX/RY), cyclic data can be secured on a
1
per-station (4-word) basis.

1 Data of more than one station are not secured.

Configure an interlock with remote I/O (RX/RY) as shown in the following example.

Sending station (master station) Receiving station (local station)

1) 1) 4)
2) 5)

3) 6)

7)

1) The send/receive command (M0) turns ON.

2) Data of D0 to D3 are stored in W100 to W103 (RWw0 to RWw3).
3) Upon completion of storage in W100 to W103, Y1000 (RY0) for handshake
turns ON.
4) By cyclic transmission, remote output (RY) data are sent following the remote
resister (RWw) data, and the receiving station’s X1000 (RX0) turns ON.
5) Data of W0 to W3 (RWr0 to RWr3) are stored in D100 to D103.
6) Upon completion of storage in D100 to D103, Y1000 (RY0) for handshake turns
ON.
7) When the data transmission to the receiving station is complete, Y1000 turns
OFF.

11 - 13 11 - 13
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.2.5 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the local station first, and then turn on the power to the master
station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the local station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the local station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:

: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

11 - 14 11 - 14
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.

1) When X20 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station turns
on.
2) When X21 of the local station is turned on, Y40 of the master station turns
on.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Local station (station number 1:

occupies 4 stations)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

11 - 15 11 - 15
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.3 When Remote Net Ver.2 Mode is Used

11.3.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system with two connected local station is used as an example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Ver.1compatible local station

(station number 1: occupies 4 stations)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Ver.2compatible local station

(station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

11 - 16 11 - 16
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master and local stations

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
Station number setting switch
× 10
5

Module 10 1
Master station 0 0
Local station 0 1
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

11 - 17 11 - 17
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.3.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational Refresh /Clears compulsorily
setting Default: Refresh
settings
Block guarantee of
Disable/Enable
cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 2 modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
1 modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 18 11 - 18
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote station Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies
1 Ver.1Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting 64 64 128
4 stations

Occupies
5 Ver.2Intelligent device station double 96 points No setting 64 64 128
2 stations

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 19 11 - 19
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W1000.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 20 11 - 20
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.3.3 Setting the local station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the local station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station
(station number 1)
(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
setting Default: Clear: Refresh
Number of occupied Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Operational Occupies 4 stations
stations Default: Occupies 1 station
settings
Expanded cyclic single/double/quadruple/octuple
setting Default: single
Block guarantee of
Disable/Enable
cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 21 11 - 21
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 22 11 - 22
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.1 compatible

local station (station number 1)
(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W1000.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 23 11 - 23
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Setting the network parameters of the ver.2 compatible local station
(station number 5)
(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
setting Default: Refresh
Number of occupied Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Operational Occupies 2 stations
stations Default: Occupies 1 station
settings
Expanded cyclic single/double/quadruple/octuple
double
setting Default: single
Block guarantee of
Disable/Enable
cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 24 11 - 24
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 25 11 - 25
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(4) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.2 compatible

local station (station number 5)
(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W1000.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 26 11 - 26
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.3.4 Creating a program

This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master
and local stations. The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices
of the master station programmable controller CPU and the devices of the local station
programmable controller CPU.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.

[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]

Ver.1compatible local station Ver.2compatible local station
Master station (station number 1: occupies 4 stations) (station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)
Local station
programmable
controller CPU
RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000
RY01F to RY010 Y101F to Y1010
RY02F to RY020 Y102F to Y1020
RY03F to RY030 Y103F to Y1030
RY04F to RY040 Y104F to Y1040
RY05F to RY050 Y105F to Y1050
RY06F to RY060 Y106F to Y1060
RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070

RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000

RX01F to RX010 X101F to X1010
RX02F to RX020 X102F to X1020
RX03F to RX030 X103F to X1030
Master station RX04F to RX040 X104F to X1040 Local station
programmable Ver.2 compatible RX05F to RX050 X105F to X1050 Ver.2 compatible programmable
controller CPU buffer memory RX06F to RX060 X106F to X1060 buffer memory controller CPU
X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000
X101F to X1010 RX01F to RX010 RY01F to RY010 Y101F to Y1010
X102F to X1020 RX02F to RX020 RY02F to RY020 Y102F to Y1020
X103F to X1030 RX03F to RX030 RY03F to RY030 Y103F to Y1030
X104F to X1040 RX04F to RX040 RY04F to RY040 Y104F to Y1040
X105F to X1050 RX05F to RX050 RY05F to RY050 Y105F to Y1050
X106F to X1060 RX06F to RX060 RY06F to RY060 Y106F to Y1060
X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070
X108F to X1080 RX08F to RX080 RY08F to RY080 Y108F to Y1080
X109F to X1090 RX09F to RX090 RY09F to RY090 Y109F to Y1090
X10AF to X10A0 RX0AF to RX0A0 RY0AF to RY0A0 Y10AF to Y10A0
X10BF to X10B0 RX0BF to RX0B0 RY0BF to RY0B0 Y10BF to Y10B0
X10CF to X10C0 RX0CF to RX0C0 RY0CF to RY0C0 Y10CF to Y10C0
X10DD to X10D0 RX0DF to RX0D0 RY0DF to RY0D0 Y10DD to Y10D0

Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000

Y101F to Y1010 RY01F to RY010 RX01F to RX010 X101F to X1010
Y102F to Y1020 RY02F to RY020 RX02F to RX020 X102F to X1020
Y103F to Y1030 RY03F to RY030 RX03F to RX030 X103F to X1030
Y104F to Y1040 RY04F to RY040 RX04F to RX040 X104F to X1040
Y105F to Y1050 RY05F to RY050 RX05F to RX050 X105F to X1050
Y106F to Y1060 RY06F to RY060 RX06F to RX060 X106F to X1060
Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070
Y108F to Y1080 RY08F to RY080 RX08F to RX080 X108F to X1080
Y109F to Y1090 RY09F to RY090 RX09F to RX090 X109F to X1090
Y10AF to Y10A0 RY0AF to RY0A0 RX0AF to RX0A0 X10AF to X10A0
Y10BF to Y10B0 RY0BF to RY0B0 RX0BF to RX0B0 X10BF to X10B0
Y10CF to Y10C0 RY0CF to RY0C0 RX0CF to RX0C0 X10CF to X10C0
Y10DD to Y10D0 RY0DF to RY0D0 RX0DF to RX0D0 X10DD to X10D0

The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master and local stations.

11 - 27 11 - 27
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]

Ver.1compatible local station Ver.2compatible local station
Master station (station number 1) (station number 5)
Local station
programmable
controller CPU
RWw00 W0000
RWw01 W1001
RWw02 W1002
RWw03 W1003
RWw04 W1004
RWw05 W1005
RWw06 W1006

RWw0D W100D
RWw0E W100E
RWw0F W100F

RWr00 W0000
RWr01 W0001
RWr02 W0002
RWr03 W0003
RWr04 W0004
RWr05 W0005
RWr06 W0006
Master station Local station
programmable Ver.2 compatible RWr0D W000D Ver.2 compatible programmable
controller CPU buffer memory RWr0E W000E buffer memory controller CPU
W0000 RWr00 RWr0F W000F RWw00 W1000
W0001 RWr01 RWw01 W1001
W0002 RWr02 RWw02 W1002
W0003 RWr03 RWw03 W1003
W0004 RWr04 RWw04 W1004
W0005 RWr05 RWw05 W1005
W0006 RWr06 RWw06 W1006

W000D RWr0D RWw0D W100D

W000E RWr0E RWw0E W100E
W000F RWr0F RWw0F W100F
W0010 RWr10 RWw10 W1010
W0011 RWr11 RWw11 W1011
W0012 RWr12 RWw12 W1012
W0013 RWr13 RWw13 W1013
W0014 RWr14 RWw14 W1014
W0015 RWr15 RWw15 W1015
W0016 RWr16 RWw16 W1016

W001D RWr1D RWw1D W101D

W001E RWr1E RWw1E W101E
W001F RWr1F RWw1F W101F

W1000 RWw00 RWr00 W0000

W1001 RWw01 RWr01 W0001
W1002 RWw02 RWr02 W0002
W1003 RWw03 RWr03 W0003
W1004 RWw04 RWr04 W0004
W1005 RWw05 RWr05 W0005
W1006 RWw06 RWr06 W0006

W100D RWw0D RWr0D W000D

W100E RWw0E RWr0E W000E
W100F RWw0F RWr0F W000F
W1010 RWw10 RWr10 W0010
W1011 RWw11 RWr11 W0011
W1012 RWw12 RWr12 W0012
W1013 RWw13 RWr13 W0013
W1014 RWw14 RWr14 W0014
W1015 RWw15 RWr15 W0015
W1016 RWw16 RWr16 W0016

W101D RWw1D RWr1D W001D

W101E RWw1E RWr1E W001E
W101F RWw1F RWr1F W001F

11 - 28 11 - 28
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Master station program

Local station status confirmation

Station number 1 is faulty

Station number 5 is faulty

Control program
Control program of station number 1
Control program using
data received from local
station of station No. 1
Program to generate
transmission data to local
Control program of station number 5 station of station No. 1
Control program using data
received from local station
of station No. 5
Program to generate
transmission data to local
station of station No. 5

(2) Local station program

(a) Ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) program
Confirmation of data link status
Local station is performing
data link

Control program
Control program using data
received from a master station
Program to generate send
data to the master station

(b) Ver.2 compatible local station (station number 5) program

Confirmation of data link status
Local station is performing
data link

Control program
Control program using data
received from a master station
Program to generate send
data to the master station

11 - 29 11 - 29
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
By configuring an interlock with remote I/O (RX/RY), cyclic data can be secured on a
per-station (4-word) basis.
For details, refer to Remark in Section 11.2.4.

11.3.5 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the local station first, and then turn on the power to the master
station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the local station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:
: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the local station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:
: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

11 - 30 11 - 30
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.
1) When X20 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station of
station No. 1 turns on.
2) When X21 of the local station of station No. 1 is turned on, Y40 of the master
station turns on.
3) When X21 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station of
station No. 5 turns on.
4) When X21 of the local station of station No. 5 is turned on, Y41 of the master
station turns on.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Ver.1compatible local station

(station number 1: occupies 4 stations)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Ver.2compatible local station

(station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

11 - 31 11 - 31
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.4 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used

11.4.1 Configuring a system

As shown below, a system with two connected local station is used as an example.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Ver.1compatible local station

(station number 1: occupies 4 stations)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Ver.2compatible local station

(station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

11 - 32 11 - 32
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Setting the master and local stations

Settings of the master station switches are shown below:

QJ61BT11N
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION
NO.
Station number setting switch
× 10
5

Module 10 1
Master station 0 0
Local station 0 1
×1
5

C Transmission speed/mode setting switch

MODE 0 (156 kbps/online)
8

NC
1
NC

DA
2
3
SLD

DB
4
5
(FG)
6
DG
7

11 - 33 11 - 33
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.4.2 Setting the master station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the master station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist and station information setting checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Operational Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
settings
Block guarantee
Disable/Enable
of cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Mater station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count 2 modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count 3 times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
1 modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop /continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous /synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 34 11 - 34
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

Number of Intelligent buffer select (word)

Station Expanded Remote station Reserve/invalid
Station type occupied
No. cyclic setting points station select
stations Send Receive Automatic
Occupies
1 Ver.1Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting 64 64 128
4 stations

Occupies
5 Ver.2Intelligent device station double 96 points No setting 64 64 128
2 stations

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 35 11 - 35
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station

(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote input (RX) to X1500.

6) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote output (RY) to Y1500.

7) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWr) to W1000.

8) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWw) to W1500.

9) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

10) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 36 11 - 36
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.4.3 Setting the local station parameters

This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh
parameters of the local station.

(1) Setting the network parameters of the ver.1 compatible local station
(station number 1)
(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU STOP Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
setting Default: Clear: Refresh
Number of occupied Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Operational Occupies 4 stations
stations Default: Occupies 1 station
settings
Expanded cyclic single/double/quadruple/octuple
setting Default: single
Block guarantee of
Disable/Enable
cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 37 11 - 37
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 38 11 - 38
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.1 compatible

local station (station number 1)
(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

6) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 39 11 - 39
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(3) Setting the network parameters of the ver.2 compatible local station
(station number 5)
(a) Setting the network parameters
Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting
checklist.

Item Setting range Setting value

Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/ clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh /Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
Number of Occupies 1 to 4 stations
Operational Occupies 2 stations
occupied stations Default: Occupies 1 station
settings
Expanded cyclic single/double/quadruple/octuple
double
setting Default: single
Block guarantee of
Disable/Enable
cyclic data per Disable /Enable
Default: Disable
station
Master station
Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

11 - 40 11 - 40
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(b) Example of network parameter settings

An example of network parameter settings is shown below:

11 - 41 11 - 41
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(4) Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver.2 compatible

local station (station number 5)
(a) Setting the automatic refresh parameters
Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below.

1) Set the refresh device for remote input (RX) to X1000.

2) Set the refresh device for remote output (RY) to Y1000.

3) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWr) to W0.

4) Set the refresh device for remote register (RWw) to W100.

5) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote input (RX) to X1500.

6) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote output (RY) to Y1500.

7) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWr) to W1000.

8) Set the refresh device for ver.2 remote register (RWw) to W1500.

9) Set the refresh device for special relay (SB) to SB0.

10) Set the refresh device for special register (SW) to SW0.

POINT
When setting X, Y, B, W, SB and SW as refresh devices, make setting so that they
do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks, etc.

(b) Setting example

A setting example is shown below.

11 - 42 11 - 42
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

11.4.4 Creating a program

This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master
and local stations. The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices
of the master station programmable controller CPU and the devices of the local station
programmable controller CPU.
The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used.

[Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)]

Master station Ver.1compatible local station Ver.2compatible local station
(station number 1: occupies 4 stations) (station number 5: occupies 2 stations: double)
Master station Local station Local station
programmable Ver.1 compatible programmable Ver.1 compatible programmable
controller CPU buffer memory controller CPU buffer memory controller CPU
X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 Y100F to Y1000
X101F to X1010 RX01F to RX010 RY01F to RY010 Y101F to Y1010 RY01F to RY010 Y101F to Y1010
X102F to X1020 RX02F to RX020 RY02F to RY020 Y102F to Y1020 RY02F to RY020 Y102F to Y1020
X103F to X1030 RX03F to RX030 RY03F to RY030 Y103F to Y1030 RY03F to RY030 Y103F to Y1030
X104F to X1040 RX04F to RX040 RY04F to RY040 Y104F to Y1040 RY04F to RY040 Y104F to Y1040
X105F to X1050 RX05F to RX050 RY05F to RY050 Y105F to Y1050 RY05F to RY050 Y105F to Y1050
X106F to X1060 RX06F to RX060 RY06F to RY060 Y106F to Y1060 RY06F to RY060 Y106F to Y1060
X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 Y107D to Y1070

Y100F to Y1000 RY00F to RY000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000 RX00F to RX000 X100F to X1000
Y101F to Y1010 RY01F to RY010 RX01F to RX010 X101F to X1010 RX01F to RX010 X101F to X1010
Y102F to Y1020 RY02F to RY020 RX02F to RX020 X102F to X1020 RX02F to RX020 X102F to X1020
Y103F to Y1030 RY03F to RY030 RX03F to RX030 X103F to X1030 RX03F to RX030 X103F to X1030
Y104F to Y1040 RY04F to RY040 RX04F to RX040 X104F to X1040 RX04F to RX040 X104F to X1040
Y105F to Y1050 RY05F to RY050 RX05F to RX050 X105F to X1050 RX05F to RX050 X105F to X1050
Y106F to Y1060 RY06F to RY060 RX06F to RX060 X106F to X1060 RX06F to RX060 X106F to X1060
Y107D to Y1070 RY07F to RY070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070 RX07F to RX070 X107D to X1070

Ver.2 compatible Ver.2 compatible

buffer memory buffer memory
X150F to X1T500 RX08F to RX080 RY06F to RY060 Y150F to Y1500
X151F to X1510 RX09F to RX090 RY07F to RY070 Y151F to Y1510
X152F to X1520 RX0AF to RX0A0 RY08F to RY080 Y152F to Y1520
X153F to X1530 RX0BF to RX0B0 RY09F to RY090 Y153F to Y1530
X154F to X1540 RX0CF to RX0C0 RY0AF to RY0A0 Y154F to Y1540
X155D to X1550 RX0DF to RX0D0 RY0BF to RY0B0 Y155D to Y1550

Y150F to Y1500 RY08F to RY080 RX06F to RX060 X150F to X1500

Y151F to Y1510 RY09F to RY090 RX07F to RX070 X151F to X1510
Y152F to Y1520 RY0AF to RY0A0 RX08F to RX080 X152F to X1520
Y153F to Y1530 RY0BF to RY0B0 RX09F to RX090 X153F to X1530
Y154F to Y1540 RY0CF to RY0C0 RX0AF to RX0A0 X154F to X1540
Y155D to Y1550 RY0DF to RY0D0 RX0BF to RX0B0 X155D to X1550

The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master and local stations.

11 - 43 11 - 43
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

[Remote registers (RWw and RWr)]

Ver.1compatible local station Ver.2compatible local station
Master station (station number 1) (station number 5)
Master station Local station Local station
programmable Ver.1 compatible programmable Ver.1 compatible programmable
controller CPU buffer memory controller CPU buffer memory controller CPU
W0000 RWr00 RWw00 W1000 RWw00 W0100
W0001 RWr01 RWw01 W1001 RWw01 W0101
W0002 RWr02 RWw02 W1002 RWw02 W0102
W0003 RWr03 RWw03 W1003 RWw03 W0103
W0004 RWr04 RWw04 W1004 RWw04 W0104
W0005 RWr05 RWw05 W1005 RWw05 W0105
W0006 RWr06 RWw06 W1006 RWw06 W0106
W0007 RWr07 RWw07 W1007 RWw07 W0107
W0008 RWr08 RWw08 W1008 RWw08 W0108
W0009 RWr09 RWw09 W1009 RWw09 W0109
W000A RWr0A RWw0A W100A RWw0A W010A
W000B RWr0B RWw0B W100B RWw0B W010B
W000C RWr0C RWw0C W100C RWw0C W010C
W000D RWr0D RWw0D W100D RWw0D W010D
W000E RWr0E RWw0E W100E RWw0E W010E
W000F RWr0F RWw0F W100F RWw0F W010F

W0100 RWw00 RWr00 W0000 RWr00 W0000

W0101 RWw01 RWr01 W0001 RWr01 W0001
W0102 RWw02 RWr02 W0002 RWr02 W0002
W0103 RWw03 RWr03 W0003 RWr03 W0003
W0104 RWw04 RWr04 W0004 RWr04 W0004
W0105 RWw05 RWr05 W0005 RWr05 W0005
W0106 RWw06 RWr06 W0006 RWr06 W0006
W0107 RWw07 RWr07 W0007 RWr07 W0007
W0108 RWw08 RWr08 W0008 RWr08 W0008
W0109 RWw09 RWr09 W0009 RWr09 W0009
W010A RWw0A RWr0A W000A RWr0A W000A
W010B RWw0B RWr0B W000B RWr0B W000B
W010C RWw0C RWr0C W000C RWr0C W000C
W010D RWw0D RWr0D W000D RWr0D W000D
W010E RWw0E RWr0E W000E RWr0E W000E
W010F RWw0F RWr0F W000F RWr0F W000F

Ver.2 compatible Ver.2 compatible

buffer memory buffer memory
W1000 RWr10 RWw10 W1500
W1001 RWr11 RWw11 W1501
W1002 RWr12 RWw12 W1502
W1003 RWr13 RWw13 W1503
W1004 RWr14 RWw14 W1504
W1005 RWr15 RWw15 W1505
W1006 RWr16 RWw16 W1506
W1007 RWr17 RWw17 W1507
W1008 RWr18 RWw18 W1508
W1009 RWr19 RWw19 W1509
W100A RWr1A RWw1A W150A
W100B RWr1B RWw1B W150B
W100C RWr1C RWw1C W150C
W100D RWr1D RWw1D W150D
W100E RWr1E RWw1E W150E
W100F RWr1F RWw1F W150F

W1500 RWw10 RWr10 W1000

W1501 RWw11 RWr11 W1001
W1502 RWw12 RWr12 W1002
W1503 RWw13 RWr13 W1003
W1504 RWw14 RWr14 W1004
W1505 RWw15 RWr15 W1005
W1506 RWw16 RWr16 W1006
W1507 RWw17 RWr17 W1007
W1508 RWw18 RWr18 W1008
W1509 RWw19 RWr19 W1009
W150A RWw1A RWr1A W100A
W150B RWw1B RWr1B W100B
W150C RWw1C RWr1C W100C
W150D RWw1D RWr1D W100D
W150E RWw1E RWr1E W100E
W150F RWw1F RWr1F W100F

11 - 44 11 - 44
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(1) Master station program

Local station status confirmation

Station number 1 is faulty

Station number 5 is faulty

Control program
Control program of station number 1
Control program using
data received from local
station of station No. 1
Program to generate
transmission data to local
station of station No. 1
Control program of station number 5
Control program using data
received from local station
of station No. 5
Program to generate
transmission data to local
station of station No. 5

(2) Local station program

(a) Ver.1 compatible local station (station number 1) program
Confirmation of data link status
Local station is performing
data link

Control program
Control program using data
received from a master station
Program to generate send
data to the master station

(b) Ver.2 compatible local station (station number 5) program

Confirmation of data link status
Local station is performing
data link

Control program
Control program using data
received from a master station
Program to generate send
data to the master station

11 - 45 11 - 45
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

REMARK
By configuring an interlock with remote I/O (RX/RY), cyclic data can be secured on a
per-station (4-word) basis.
For details, refer to Remark in Section 11.2.4.

11.4.5 Performing the data link

Turn on the power to the local station first, and then turn on the power to the master
station to start the data link.

(1) Confirming the operation with the LED display

The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and
the local station when the data link is being performed normally.

(a) LED display of the master station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:
: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
Controlling data link MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

(b) LED display of the local station

Make sure that the LED display shows the following status:
: On : Off

Module is normal
QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed
normally
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD Receiving data
Sending data ERR. L ERR.

11 - 46 11 - 46
11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL
STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirming the operation with the sequence program

Using the sequence program, confirm that the data link is being performed
normally.

1) When X20 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station of
station No. 1 turns on.
2) When X21 of the local station of station No. 1 is turned on, Y40 of the master
station turns on.
3) When X21 of the master station is turned on, Y41 of the local station of
station No. 5 turns on.
4) When X21 of the local station of station No. 5 is turned on, Y41 of the master
station turns on.

Master
station

Q61P-A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

Ver.1compatible local station

(station number 1: Occupies 4 stations)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Ver.2compatible local station

(station number 5: Occupies 2 stations: double)

Q61P-A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P

Terminal
resistor

11 - 47 11 - 47
 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND
INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND

INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS

The communication method between the master station and intelligent device stations
is different for each intelligent device station.
For more details on the communication between the master station and intelligent
12 device stations, see the manual for each intelligent device station.

12 - 1 12 - 1
12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND
INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS
MELSEC-Q

MEMO

12

12 - 2 12 - 2
 13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

13 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC-Link
System, and lists the check items and procedures for each of the possible problems.

13.1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence

The following lists the details of the check items and procedures for each problem
occurrence.
Description of problem Check item Check procedure
13 • Check the cable connection visually or with a line
Are there any disconnected cables? test.
• Check the line status (SW0090).
Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the
Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal
terminal stations located at each end of the CC-Link
stations located at each end of the CC-Link system?
system.
Connect the appropriate terminal resistors that
match the cable type used for the terminal stations
Are correct terminal resistors connected?
located at each end of the CC-Link system. (See
Section 7.5.)
Has an error occurred at the master station's Check the error code of the programmable
programmable controller CPU? controller CPU and take corrective action.
Are the CC-Link parameters set in the Check the contents of the parameters for the
Unable to perform data link for the entire system. programmable controller CPU of the master station? programmable controller CPU of the master station.
Does the sequence scan time exceed the tolerance
for each transmission speed when using the
synchronous mode?
10 Mbps : 50 ms Switch to the asynchronous mode, or reduce the
5 Mbps : 50 ms transmission speed.
2.5 Mbps : 100 ms
625 kbps : 400 ms
156 kbps : 800 ms
• Check the host parameter status (SW0068).
• Check the switch setting status (SW006A).
Has an error occurred at the master station? • Check the Loading status (SW0069).
• Check to see if the "ERR." LED on the master
station is flashing. (See Section 13.2.)
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Is the corresponding remote I/O station performing remote I/O station.
data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
input RX (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the correct master station parameter information
Unable to receive input from a remote I/O station. area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
parameters)?
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote I/O station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).

13 - 1 13 - 1
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
Unable to receive input from a remote I/O station. • Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
parameters and the refresh executed with the
• Check the automatic refresh parameter settings. 13
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Is the corresponding remote I/O station performing remote I/O station.
data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data written to the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
Is the master station parameter information area
being used (CPU built-in internal parameters, Check parameter information (SW0067).
default parameters) correct?
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote I/O station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).
Unable to output data from a remote I/O station.
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
parameters and the refresh executed with the
• Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Unable to receive remote input (RX) of a remote Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station.
device station. performing data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)

13 - 2 13 - 2
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
input RX (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the correct master station parameter information
area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
parameters)?
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote device station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
Unable to receive remote input (RX) of a remote (SW0074 to SW0077).
device station. • Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
parameters and the refresh executed with the
• Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization
registration being executed? procedure registration instruction (SB000D) is on.
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station.
performing data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the correct master station parameter information
area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
parameters)?
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote device station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
Unable to turn on/off remote output (RY) of a remote
• Check the number of connected modules
device station.
(SW0072).
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).

13 - 3 13 - 3
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
parameters and the refresh executed with the
Unable to turn on/off remote output (RY) of a remote • Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
device station.
Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization
registration being executed? procedure registration instruction (SB000D) is on.
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station.
performing data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
register RWr (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the correct master station parameter information
area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
parameters)?
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote device station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).
Unable to receive data to the remote register RWr in • Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
a remote device station. • Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
parameters and the refresh executed with the
• Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization
registration being executed? procedure registration instruction (SB000D) is on.
• Check the LED display on the corresponding
Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station.
performing data link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data written from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
register RWw (buffer memory)? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is the correct master station parameter information
area being used (CPU built-in parameters, default Check parameter information (SW0067).
Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in parameters)?
a remote device station. • Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding remote device station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).

13 - 4 13 - 4
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
the remote device station. • Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh
• Check the sequence program.
parameters and the refresh executed with the
• Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
FROM/TO instructions performed simultaneously?
Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization
registration being executed? procedure registration instruction (SB000D) is on.
• Check the LED display on the corresponding local
Is the corresponding local station performing data station.
link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data written to the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY (buffer memory) of the master station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
input RX (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding local station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
Unable to communicate from the master station
• Check the number of connected modules
(remote output RY) to a local station (remote input
(SW0072).
RX).
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
• Check the LED display on the corresponding local
Is the corresponding local station performing data station.
link? • Check the other station data link status of the
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
Is data written to the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
output RY) to the master station (remote input RX). input RX (buffer memory) of the master station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding local station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).

13 - 5 13 - 5
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote • Check the station number overlap status
output RY) to the master station (remote input RX). (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Is the corresponding local station performing data
• Check the LED display on the corresponding local
link?
station.
Do the number of occupied stations settings for a
• Check the other station data link status of the
local station match to the station information for a
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
master station?
Is data written to the correct address of remote
• Check the sequence program.
register RWw (buffer memory) of the master
• Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
station?
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
register RWr (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding local station number • Check the max. communication station number
Unable to communicate from the master station
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
(remote register RWw) to a local station (remote
• Check the number of connected modules
register RWr).
(SW0072).
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
• Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
• Check the LED display on the corresponding local
Is the corresponding local station performing data station.
link? • Check the other station data link status of the
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote
master station. (SW0080 to SW0083)
register RWw) to the master station (remote register
Is data written to the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
RWr).
register RWw (buffer memory) of the local station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Is data read from the correct address of remote • Check the sequence program.
register RWr (buffer memory) of the master station? • Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.

13 - 6 13 - 6
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

• Check the parameters.
• Check the total number of stations (SW0070).
Is the corresponding local station number • Check the max. communication station number
recognized by the master station? (SW0071).
• Check the number of connected modules
(SW0072).
• Check the parameters.
Is the corresponding station set as a reserved
• Check the reserved station specified status
Unable to communicate from a local station (remote station?
(SW0074 to SW0077).
register RWw) to the master station (remote register
RWr). • Check the station number setting.
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
Are there any overlap station numbers?
• Check the station number overlap status
(SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading status (SW0069).
• Check the station number overlap status
Do the settings match? (SW0098 to SW009B).
• Check the loading/parameter consistency status
(SW009C to SW009F).
Unable to operate the local station at the specified Is the QJ61BT11 of function version A set to occupy
Set the number of occupied stations to 1 or 4.
number of occupied stations. 2 or 3 stations.
• Check the sequence program.
Is the data link stop (SB0002) turned on?
Unable to stop data link. • Check the automatic refresh parameter settings.
Has an error occurred? Check the data link stop result (SW0045).
• Check the sequence program.
Is the data link restart (SB0000) turned on?
• Check the automatic refresh parameter setting.
Has an error occurred? Check the data link restart result (SW0041).
Unable to restart data link. • Check the cable connection visually or with a line
test.
Is the corresponding station disconnected? • Check the parameters (for local station).
• Check the operation status of the programmable
controller CPU in the corresponding station.
Do the parameters for the number of modules and
The remote station/local station/intelligent device station information match the settings of the Check the parameters.
station/standby master station does not start up. modules that do not start up?
Are there any overlap station numbers? Check the station number setting.
Check that the station number of the local station Check the station number setting switches and
(including the number of occupied stations) is not 65 parameter of the local station/standby master
or more. station.
The local station/standby master station does not Does the mode of the master station match the Check the parameters of the master station and
start up and the "ERR." LED turns on. mode of the local station/standby master station? local station/standby master station.
Check that the parameter of the master station that
will return to the system by the standby master Check the parameter of the master station.
function has not been rewritten.
Is the station set as an error invalid station? Check the parameters.
Faulty stations cannot be detected.
Is the station number overlapped elsewhere? Check the station number setting.
Can the faulty station be identified using the other
station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083)?
• Check the switch settings for the faulty station.
• Check that the cable is properly wired.
Faulty stations are generated depending on • Check that the shield of the cable is grounded.
transmission speed. If the transmission speed is reduced to a lower level • Connect the terminal resistor that matches the
such as 156 kbps, can communication be cable type used to the terminal stations located
performed without producing an error? at each end of the CC-Link system.

• Check the error code for the programmable

controller CPU.
When a dedicated instruction is executed, the • Check the error code for the master station.
Has an error occurred?
abnormal completion bit turns on. • Check the operation status of the programmable
controller CPUs for both the master station and
the corresponding local station.
Are there any errors in the initial settings of the • Check the parameters.
The remote device station is not operating normally.
remote device station? • Check the sequence program.
When multiple remote stations are powered off at • Increase the transmission speed.
What is the setting for the retry count?
156 kbps, the "L RUN" LED goes off temporarily. • Reduce the retry count.
Has a value been set for the intelligent function Disable the intelligent function module switch setting
CC-Link cannot be started automatically.
module switch setting? of GX Developer.
Is the switch 4 setting of the intelligent function Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch
module switch settings correct? settings of GX Developer to 0100H.
• Check the error code for the programmable
controller CPU.
Are the various settings specified by the
• Check the error code for the master station.
The abnormal completion bit turns on when the G(P).RLPASET instruction correct?
• Check the operation status of the programmable
dedicated instruction (G(P).RLPASET) is executed.
controller CPU for the master station.
Has the parameter setting method been changed
Turn the power supply to the programmable
without turning the power supply to the
controller system off and back on, or reset the
programmable controller system off and back on, or
programmable controller CPU.
resetting the programmable controller CPU?
Change the module for the one having the same
If the condition returns to normal, the disconnected Has the module been changed for the one having number of occupied stations and station type.
data link error station does not return to the different number of occupied stations When changing the number of occupied stations
the system automatically. and station type during data link? and/or station type, reset the master
station after changing.

13 - 7 13 - 7
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Description of problem Check item Check procedure

Check the error code in the Error dialog box of GX
Check the error code list and take corrective action.
Developer.
GX Developer cannot communicate with the other Does the programmable controller CPU of the Check the error code of the programmable
station programmable controller CPU. station set in "Transfer setup" have an error? controller CPU.
Is the station set in "Transfer setup" executing data Check whether the "L RUN" LED of the
link? corresponding station is on or not.
LINK PARA.ERROR (Error code 3105) occurs on
Does the module support the data link start by Replace it with a module whose first 5 digits of serial
the standby master station after module
standby master station? No. is 07112 or later.
replacement.
• Check the cable connection visually or with a line
Is there any disconnected cable? test.
• Check the line status (SW0090).
The standby master station does not start data link Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal Connect the supplied terminal resistors to the
control when the master station went down. stations of the CC-Link system? terminal stations of the CC-Link system.
Connect terminal resistors that match the cable type
Are correct terminal resistors connected? to the terminal stations of the CC-Link system.
(See Section 7.5.)
Confirm the other station communication status
(SW0080 to SW0083). Reset the remote device
station, and retry the operation after the station has
Is the station participating in the data link? rejoined the data link.
Initialization procedure registration of the Or, remove the station from the specification area
corresponding station stops and is not completed. for remote device station to be initialized (SW0014
(The execution procedure number in the remote to SW0017), and retry the operation.
device station initialization procedure registration Confirm the reserved station specification status
execution individual information (SW0110 to (SW0074 to SW0077). Correct the network
Is the station set as a reserved station?
SW011F) has stopped.) parameters, and retry the operation after
establishing the data link.
Confirm the network parameters. Correct the
Is the parameter setting for remote device station
network parameters, reset the remote device station
initialization procedure registration correct?
and retry the operation.
The master station crashed and the data link Does the ready signal (X1B) of the remote device Monitor the remote input (RX) of the remote device
stopped after remote device station initialization station remain OFF after the data link is station. Reset the remote device station and retry
procedure registration was instructed. established? the operation.
Switching of master operation*1 occurred after Does the ready signal (X1B) of the remote device Monitor the remote input (RX) of the remote device
remote device station initialization procedure station remain OFF after the data link is station. Reset the remote device station and retry
registration was instructed. established? the operation.
Check the remote device station initialization
Initialization processing ended in error. Check the error code. procedure instruction result (SW005F). Check the
error code list and remedy the problem.

1 Station specification of the remote device station initialization procedure registration is available for the
station operating as a master in the redundancy system configuration or master stations.

13 - 8 13 - 8
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

13.2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the "ERR." LED of the Master Station is Flashing or
When Normal Data cannot be Sent/Received During Data Link

Do the parameter
N
settings and the installed system
configuration match
properly?
Revise the parameter settings
or installed system configuration
Y

Are the master

station link special registers N
SW0080 to SW0083 (other station
data link status)
turned on?

Y Master station malfunction

Are the master

station link special registers N
SW0098 to SW009B (station
number overlap status)
turned on?

Y
Check on master station side
Check the module for which Check the module for which
SW0098 to SW009B are on SW0080 to SW0083 are on
Check on slave station side

Are the
station number N
Is the power on?
switches set properly? N
(Are there any station numbers
that are incompletely
matched? 2) Y Turn on the power
Set the station number
switches properly
Y

Turn on the power again/

turn on the reset switch

N Is there a "POWER" LED

Corresponding module on the module?
malfunction
Y

N
Is the "POWER" LED lit?

Y Is the supplied N
power within the specified
range?

Y
N Set the supplied voltage to
Is the "RD" LED lit? within the specified range

Y Corresponding module
malfunction

Is the communication N
cable wired properly?
1
Correct the communication
Y
cable wiring

Corresponding module
malfunction

To next page To next page To next page

1: Check for short-circuits, reversed connection, disconnection, terminal resistors, FG connection, overall distance,
and distance between stations.

13 - 9 13 - 9
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

From previous page From previous page From previous page

N
Is the "SD" LED lit (flashing)?

Y N
Is the transmission speed
setting correct? *4

Y
Set the correct transmission
speed

Turn on the power again/

turn on the reset switch

Is the communication N
cable wired properly?
1

Y Wire the communication

cable properly

Corresponding module
malfunction
(baud rate switch)

Are the station

number switches set properly? N
(Are there any station numbers
that are completely
matched? 3)
Set the correct
station numbers
Y

Turn on the power again/

turn on the reset switch
N
Is the "MST" LED unlit?

Corresponding module The master station

malfunction already exists. Reset the
(station number switch) module to operate as the
standby master station.

End

2 Incomplete match
Occupies 2 Occupies 1
stations or more station or more

Station Station Station Station

number number
number n n+1 number n n+1
Or
Station Station Station Station
number number
number m m+1 number m m+1
Occupies 1 Occupies 2
station or more stations or more

3 Complete match
Occupies 1
station or more
Station Station
number
number n n+1
Station Station
number
number m m+1
Occupies 1
station or more

4 The transmission speed test allows checking whether the transmission speed setting of the slave station
matches that of the master station. (See Section 7.9.)

13 - 10 13 - 10
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

13.3 Error Codes

When a trouble such as data link failure has occurred, error cause can be identified by
an error code.

13.3.1 How to check error codes

Error codes can be checked on GX Developer and GX Works2. (Refer to (1) and (2) in
this section)
They can also be checked in link special registers (SW). (Refer to (3) in this section)

(1) Checking with GX Developer

On GX Developer, select [Diagnostics] [System monitor], and then click the
Module’s Detailed Information button.

(The "Error contents Disposal" section is displayed in GX Developer Version 8.17T or

later.)

13 - 11 13 - 11
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

(2) Checking with GX Works2

Error codes that are corresponding to the errors occurred in the QJ61BT11N can
be checked by following either procedure (a) or (b) described below.

(a) Checking on the "Module’s Detailed Information" screen

Error code, error contents, and corrective action are displayed.

On GX Works2, select [Diagnostics] [System Monitor], and then click the

Detailed Information button.

Displays the latest error code.

Displays error history.

Displays description of the error code

that is currently selected under Error
history and corrective action for the
error.

13 - 12 13 - 12
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

1
(b) Checking on the "Error History" screen
On this screen, errors including those occurred in other modules are
displayed in chronological order, and the data can be output in a CSV file.
Error code and date and time of error occurrence can be checked even
after the programmable controller was powered off and then on or after the
programmable controller CPU is reset.

On GX Works2, select [Diagnostics] [System Monitor], and then click the

System Error History button.

1: Available on the programmable controller CPU, QJ61BT11N, and GX

Works2 when those versions are respectively as follows.
Item Version
Programmable controller
Universal model QCPU with the first five digits of serial No. 11043
CPU
QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11N with the first five digits of the serial No. 11042
GX Works2 Version 1.12N or later

1)
2)

3)

1) Error History List

Error log of the module is displayed.
For errors occurred during initial processing of the programmable
controller CPU, the date and time will be 0000/00/00 00:00:00,
therefore the displayed order under Error history list is not in the order
in which the errors occurred. (Example: Station number setting error)

13 - 13 13 - 13
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

2) Error and Solution, Intelligent Module Information

• Error and Solution
The error description and corrective action for the error, which is
currently selected under "Error History List", are displayed.
• Intelligent Module Information
The status of a QJ61BT11N when the error, which is currently
1
selected under "Error History List", had occurred is displayed.

1: When the error that simultaneously occurs with a network error is selected, the
status right before the error occurrence may be displayed under Intelligent
Module Information.

For the QJ61BT11N, the following will be displayed.

Item Description
Action status Operation status of the host station
Data link status Data link status of the host station
Data link status of each station
Other station data link status (SW0080 to SW0083) 0: Normal
1: Data link error occurred
Line status (SW0090) Line status
Master station information (SB0070) Data link status
Standby master station information (SB0071) Availability of the standby master station
Scan mode setting information (SB0072) Settings of the scan mode
Operation specification when CPU is down status Operation specification status when the CPU is down,
(SB0073) which is set by parameters
Reserved station specified status which is set by
Reserved station specified status (SB0074)
parameters
Error invalid station specified status (SB0075) Error invalid station status which is set by parameters
Temporary error invalid station setting information
Whether the temporary error invalid station is set
(SB0076)
Status of the parameter reception from the master
Parameter receive status (SB0077)
station
Changing status of the setting switches of the host
Host station switch change detection (SB0078)
station that is in data link
Whether the "Type" setting is set to "Master station" or
Master station return specification information
"Master station (Duplex function)" in Network
(SB0079)
parameter
Host master/standby master operation status Whether the host station is operating as the master or
(SB007B) standby master
Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting status in Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting status in
case of programmable controller CPU STOP case of programmable controller CPU stop which is set
(SB007C) by parameters
Dedicated instruction Dedicated instruction on which an error has occurred
Station number of the transient transmission target
station
Target station number
When it is not transient transmission error, "No
Information" is displayed.

13 - 14 13 - 14
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

3) Create CSV File button

Click this button to output the module error history in a CSV file.

POINT
(1) If errors have frequently occurred in the QJ61BT11N, "*HST.LOSS*" may be
displayed instead of an error code in the Error Code column.

If too many "*HST.LOSS*" are displayed, increase the number of errors to be

collected per scan in the "PLC RAS" tab of the "Q Parameter Setting" dialog
box.
For setting, refer to the user’s manual (Function Explanation, Program
Example) for the CPU module used.

(2) When the same errors consecutively occurred, only the error code for the first
occurred is displayed on the “Error History” screen.

(3) Checking in link special registers (SW)

Error codes can be checked in link special registers (SW).
For details, refer to Section 8.4.

13 - 15 13 - 15
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

13.3.2 Error code list

Table 13.1 lists the error codes.

When the standby master station is operating as the master station, the detectability is
identical to that of the master station.
When the standby master is operating as a local station, the detectability is identical to
that of the local station.

Table 13.1 Error code list (1/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
Take corrective actions, referring to
the troubleshooting section of the
4000 to (Errors detected by the
——— CPU User's Manual (Hardware ― ―
4FFF programmable controller CPU)
Design, Maintenance and
Inspection).
Take corrective actions, referring to
7000 to (Errors detected by serial the troubleshooting section of the
——— ― ―
7FFF communication module, etc) Serial Communication Module
User's Manual
Check the station No. of the target
The message transmission function was station.
Message transmission function
B10C executed for the remote device station Or, check if the target station
unsupported
that does not support the function. supports the message transmission
function.
Transient data can not be
B110 A line error has occurred. Check the line.
received.
Transient data receiving order
B111 A line error has occurred. Check the line.
error
B112 Transient data length error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
A line error has occurred or an Check the line, or check the supply
B113 Transient data ID error instantaneous power failure has occurred power and power supply module of
at the send station. the send station.
B115 Link error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
B116 Packet error A line error has occurred. Check the line.
In the remote device station initialize
Do not turn the specification of the
Forced termination of the procedure registration function, the
remote device station initialize
B120 remote device station initialize specification of the remote device station
procedure registration off until all
procedure registration function initialize procedure registration was turned
procedures are completed.
off before all procedures were completed.
Error at a station on which the The specification of the remote device Turn on the remote device station
remote device station initialize station initialize procedure registration initialization procedure registration
B124
procedure registration function function was turned on at a station other instruction on the master station
was executed than the master station. (station No.0).
The specification of the remote device Turn on the specification of the remote
station initialize procedure registration device station initialize procedure
function was turned on without setting the registration function after setting the
remote device station initialize procedure remote device station initialize
Parameter not set error of the registration. procedure registration.
B125 remote device station initialize Bits corresponding to other than the head
procedure registration function station number were turned ON in the Turn ON only the head station number
remote device station initialization in the remote device station
processing station specification area, and initialization processing station
remote device station initialization specification area.
procedure registration was instructed.
Check the communication status of
A data link error occurred at the other stations, whether or not a
Corresponding station error
B201 corresponding station during transient temporary error invalid station is
during sending
transmission. specified, or if the corresponding
station is stopped.
A transient request was issued to other
B205 Transient target station error Check the target station.
than the intelligent device station.
Processing request error during Line test request was issued while the Perform a line test while the link is
B301
link stop link was stopped. being established
The specified station number exceeded
the highest communication station Specify a station number that is no
Specified station number
B302 number during temporary error invalid greater than the highest
setting error
request/temporary error invalid cancel communication station number.
request.

13 - 16 13 - 16
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (2/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
The station number was not specified during
Specified station number not Set a specified station number.
B303 temporary error invalid request/temporary
set error (SW0003, SW0004 to SW0007)
error invalid cancel request.
Check that the remote station,
An error was detected in a remote
intelligent device station or
station, intelligent device station or
B304 Line test error station detected standby master station is
standby master station when a line test
operational and that the cable is
was performed.
not disconnected.
A station number other than the head Specify a head station when
Specified station number station number was specified during temporary error invalid
B306
setting error temporary error invalid request/temporary request/temporary error invalid
error invalid cancel request. cancel request is requested.
All stations were in data link error status
when one of the following requests was
Request again after the data
B307 All stations data link error made:
link becomes normal.
• SB0000 (data link restart)
• SB0002 (data link stop)
Set the station number of the
Station number setting error The station number of the slave station is
B308 slave station within the range
(installation status) outside of the range between "1 and 64".
between "1 and 64".
The station number of the connected
module was duplicated (including
Check the module station
B309 Station number overlap error number of occupied stations).
number.
However, this excludes the duplicate
head station number.
The station types of the module are
different from parameter settings.
Example)

Connected Parameter
module setting
Remote Set the correct parameters.
Remote I/O
device
Loading/parameter
B30A Remote I/O
consistency error
Intelligent
Remote
device
device

The mode is inconsistent between the After correcting the parameters

master station and a local or standby of the master station, or the
master station. local or standby master station,
• The modes of the master station and reset the programmable
standby master station are different. controller CPU.
Set the contents of the
Loading/parameter The contents of the installation status
B30B installation status and network
consistency error and network parameters do not match.
parameters to match.
Master station switching was instructed Specify the station number that
Standby master station
B30C to a station other than the standby corresponds to the standby
specification error
master station. master station.
Temporary error invalid station
specification, line test request, or data Issue the request after the data
B30D Initial status
link stop/restart request, etc. was issued link is started.
before starting the link.
In the function started by SB/SW, an
attempt was made to execute the Execute the corresponding
B30E Unsupported error function, which is function from the master
supported by only the master station, at station.
the local station.
Specify a temporary error
A temporary error invalid station was invalid station while the data
Temporary error invalid station specified while the data link is being link is performed with
B30F
specification error performed upon automatic CC-Link parameters set using GX
startup. Developer or the dedicated
instruction.
Execute Data link restart
Data link restart (SB0000) was executed
(SB0000) for the station that
B310 Data link restart error for the station that was performing a data
has stopped a data link with
link.
Data link stop (SB0002).

13 - 17 13 - 17
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (3/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
Data link stop (SB0002) was executed Execute Data link stop
B311 Data link stop error for the station that had stopped a data (SB0002) for the station that is
link. performing a data link.
Forced master to standby master
After starting the data link of the
switching (SB000C) was executed in the
Standby master station standby master station, execute
B312 system where no standby master station
absence error Forced master to standby
exists or in the system where the standby
master switching (SB000C).
master station had become faulty.
Forced master to standby master After starting the data link of the
switching (SB000C) was executed in the standby master station, execute
B313 All station fault error
system where all stations had become Forced master to standby
faulty. master switching (SB000C).
Execute Forced master to
Forced master to standby master
standby master switching
B314 Switching target error switching (SB000C) was executed for
(SB000C) for the master
any station other than the master station.
station.
Forced master switching (SB000C) was
Forced master station switching instructed again while the master station Check ON/OFF of Forced
B315
error was being switched to the standby master switching (SB000C).
master station.
Use the RLPASET instruction
according to the procedure
below.
1. Clear the settings of the
network parameters and
refresh parameters of the
The RLPASET instruction was executed target module using GX
for a module whose parameters have Developer.
been set by GX Developer. 2. Set the type of I/O
Network startup setting mode The parameter setting was changed assignment setting in GX
B317
error without turning the power supply to the Developer to "intelli."
programmable controller system off and 3. Set switch 4 of the intelligent
back on, or resetting the programmable function module switch
controller CPU. setting in GX Developer to
0100 H.
4. Turn the power supply to the
programmable controller
system off and back on, or
reset the programmable
controller CPU.
Data link has already been started when Do not instruct the master
B31A Data linking the master station duplication error station duplication error
cancelling is instructed. cancelling during data linking.
Set Data link stop (SB0002) to
Transmission speed test The transmission speed test was ON and then Transmission
B31B
execution error executed during data link. speed test request (SB000B) to
ON.
B31C
B31D
B31E Please consult your local
System error ———
B31F Mitsubishi representative.
B320
B321
The station number (including the
Station number setting error number of occupied stations) of the Set within the range of "1H to
B384
(parameter) station information parameters was set to 40H".
"other than 1 H to 40H."
The total number of occupied stations set
Total number of stations error Set a parameter value of 64 or
B385 with the station information parameter
(parameter) less.
exceeded 64.
The number of all occupied stations in Set the occupied station
Number of occupied stations
B386 the station information parameter was set number to a value between "1
setting error (parameter)
to "0". and 4".
The delay time setting in the master
Delay time setting error Set a value within the setting
B387 station network parameters is out of the
(parameter) range.
setting range.
Station type setting error The station type in the station information Set to a value between "0 and
B388
(parameter) parameter was set to "other than 0 to 2". 2".
The number of remote device stations Set the remote device station to
Remote device station setting
B38B was set to "43 stations or more" with the "42 stations or less" with the
error (parameter)
station information parameter. station information parameter.

13 - 18 13 - 18
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (4/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
The number of intelligent device stations
Set the intelligent device station to
Intelligent device station (including local stations) was set to "27
B38C "26 stations or less" with the station
setting error (parameter) stations or more" with the station
information parameter.
information parameter.
"Other than module head station number"
or "station number not specified in the
parameter" was set with the invalid station
Set the "Head station number of the
specification parameter.
Invalid station specified error module".
B38D <Example of other than head station
(parameter) Do not specify any of the stations
number>
not specified with the parameter.
A bit other than that for station number 5
was ON for a module occupies 4 stations
(station numbers 5 to 8).
The total size of the communication buffers Set the total size of the
Communication buffer
B38E in the station information parameter communication buffers to 4 k words
assignment error (parameter)
exceeded 4 k words. or less.
The total size of the automatic update
Automatic update buffer Set the total size of the automatic
B38F buffer in the station information parameter
assignment error (parameter) update buffer to 4 k words or less.
exceeded 4 k words.
Specify the standby master station
Standby master station The standby master station parameter was
B390 to a value within the range from "1
specification error (parameter) set to a value other than "1 to 64".
to 64".
Retry count setting error The retry count parameter was set to a Set a value within the range from "1
B391
(parameter) value other than "1 to 7". to 7".
The operation when the CPU is down
Operation when CPU is down
B392 specification parameter was set to a value Set "0 or 1".
specified error (parameter)
other than "0 or 1".
Scan mode specification error The scan mode parameter was set to a
B393 Set "0 or 1".
(parameter) value other than "0 or 1".
Number of automatic return The number of automatic return stations
Set a value within the range from "1
B394 stations setting error parameter was set to a value other than "1
to 10".
(parameter) to 10".
Station number overlap error A duplicate station number was specified Set so that station numbers are not
B396
(parameter) with the station information parameter. duplicated.
The station information parameter setting
does not meet the following condition:
(16 A) + (54 B) + (88 C) < 2304
Station information setting Set the parameter so that it meets
B397 A: Number of remote I/O stations
error (parameter) the condition shown on left.
B: Number of remote device stations
C: Number of intelligent device stations
(including local stations)
The number of occupied stations in the
Number of occupied stations Set a value within the range from "1
B398 station information parameter was set to a
setting error (parameter) to 4".
value other than "1 to 4".
Number of connected The number of connected modules
Set a value within the range from "1
B399 modules setting error parameter was set to a value other than "1
to 64".
(parameter) to 64".
The station number set with the station
Change the parameter setting of the
number setting switches of the standby
master station, or change the
master station differs from that set in the
Standby master station station number setting of the
"standby master station No." network
B39A specification error (loading local/standby master station, and
parameter of the master station, or the
status) then reset the programmable
station set in the "standby master station
controller CPU of the local/standby
No." network parameter of the master
master station.
station is a local station.
B39B Reserved station setting error All stations were set as reserved stations. Check the reserved station settings.
Any other than Intelligent device station
Specify the standby master station
has been set to the station type for the
as an intelligent device station.
Standby master station "Standby master station No." specified in
B39C Make the same setting to the
setting error the master station network parameter.
master and standby master
The mode setting is different between the
stations.
master and standby master stations.
Reserved station 0 points setting has been Change the mode to the remote net
made in the remote net additional mode. ver. 2 mode.
Reserved station 0 points
B39D Reserved station 0 points setting has been
setting error Set the station of reserved 0 points
made for the station that is not a reserved
setting as a reserved station.
station.

13 - 19 13 - 19
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (5/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
Remote I/O station points setting is 8/16 Change the mode to the remote
points in the remote net additional mode. net ver. 2 mode.
8 points setting and 16 points
8/16 points setting has been made for the
8/16-point remote I/O station setting have been made for the
B39E station other than the remote I/O station.
setting error same remote I/O station.
Make either 8 points setting or
Make 8/16 points setting for the same
16 points setting for the remote
remote I/O station.
I/O station.
In the remote net additional
In the remote net additional mode, the mode, make network parameter
"maximum station number of ver. 1 setting so that the "maximum
Remote net additional mode compatible slave stations" is greater than station number of ver. 1
B39F
station number illegal the "minimum station number of ver. 2 compatible slave stations" is
compatible slave stations" in the network less than the "minimum station
parameter setting. number of ver. 2 compatible
slave stations".
Model illegal has occurred between the
master and local/standby master
stations.
• The mode differs between the master
and standby master stations. After correcting the mismatch of
Mode illegal (between master • The local station is set to the remote modes between the master and
B3A0 and local/standby master net additional mode, and the master local/standby master stations,
stations) station is set to other than the remote reset the programmable
net additional mode. controller CPU.
• The local station is in the remote net
ver. 2 mode or remote net additional
mode, and the master station is in the
remote net ver. 1 mode.
At the time of parameter setting with
Set a correct value to switch 5
dedicated instruction, an illegal value has
B3A1 Standby master setting illegal of the intelligent function
been set to switch 5 of the intelligent
module switch setting.
function module switch setting.
At the time of parameter setting with
Remote I/O net mode station dedicated instruction, the station type of Set all station types to the
B3A2
type illegal other than the remote I/O station has remote I/O station.
been set in the remote I/O net mode.
In the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote
net additional mode, total points for Check the points for remote
B3A3 Assignment error remote stations set in the station stations in the station
information has exceeded the maximum information setting.
of 8192.
When the standby master station was
operating as the master station with the Return the network parameter
B3A4 Parameter mismatch master station duplex function, the setting of the master station to
network parameter setting of the faulty the original value.
master station was changed.
Check the control data of the
The mode set in the control data of the
G(P).RLPASET instruction and
G(P).RLPASET instruction differs from
B3A5 Mode illegal (parameter) the switch 3 setting of the
the mode set with switch 3 of the
intelligent module switch
intelligent module switch setting.
setting.
Change the parameter after all
Parameter change was executed during transient requests are
B401 Parameter change error
transient request. completed or before any are
requested.
A response from the requested station Set a longer watchdog time. If
B404 Response error was not returned within the watchdog an error persists, check the
time period. requested module and cables.
A transient request was made to a Set the corresponding station to
Transient applicable station
B405 remote I/O station or a remote device a local station or an intelligent
error
station. device station.
The receive buffer size of the dedicated
B410 Receive buffer size error instruction is less than the response data Check the receive buffer size.
size.
The number of read/write points in the Change the number of
B411 Data length outside of range control data of the dedicated instruction read/write points to within the
is outside the setting range. setting range.

13 - 20 13 - 20
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (6/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
The station number in the control data of
Station number outside of Change the station number to
B412 the dedicated instruction is outside the
range within the setting range.
setting range.
Multiple dedicated instructions were
B413 Request error Check the sequence program.
executed for the same station.
The setting of the interlock signal storage
Change the setting of the
Interlock signal data outside of device of the G(P).RIRCV or
B414 interlock signal storage device
range G(P).RISEND instruction is outside the
to within the setting range.
setting range.
Data exceeding the receivable data size Set a value of the received data
B418 Received data size error were received with the message size or more for the receivable
transmission function. data size.
Check the contents of the
B601 Request type error An unsupported request was received. request, as well as the target
station number.
Wait a while and then send the
Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to
B602 requests (transient overload
error the corresponding station.
status).
Wait a while and then send the
Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to
B603 requests (transient overload
error the corresponding station.
status).
Transient transmission was sent when a Wait a while and then
B604 Line test in processing
line test was in progress. retransmit.
Transient storage buffer could Transient storage buffer could not be Wait a while and then
B605
not be obtained obtained. retransmit.
There is an error in the target station's
B607 Target station CPU error Check the target CPU.
CPU.
Wait a while and then
Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to
B771 retransmit (transient overloaded
error the corresponding station.
status).
The target station was not an intelligent Check if the target station is an
B774 Transient request error
device station. intelligent device station.
A response was not received from the Check the requested module
B778 Response time out
requested station. and cables.
A transient transmission was executed
B780 Module mode setting error even though the target station was set to Set to the remote net mode.
the I/O mode.
The transmission destination and source Check the transmission
Station number specification
B782 stations were the same when other destination station number, or
error
station connection was specified. change to host connection.
An error occurred in the transient storage
Wait a while and then
B783 Transient storage buffer error buffer when a transient transmission of
retransmit.
greater than 1 k was being performed.
A non-existing access code/attribute was Set a correct access
B801 Access code setting error
set. code/attribute.
An access code that does not exist was
B802 Access code error Use the correct access code.
used.
The number of data points were out of Set the number of data points
B803 Data points error
range. to within 1 to 960 bytes.
Review the attribute definition.
Attribute definition error The attribute definition was invalid. Check the designation of the
Transient transmission Alternatively, transient transmission was target station number, as well
B804
unsupported station performed even though the target station as the function version and
specification error does not support transient transmission. software version of the target
local station.
Set the range to within 1 to 100
B805 Data points error The number of data was out of range. when writing, and 1 to 160
when reading.
Correct the start device No.
The start device No. is out of range.
Or, set the address to a multiple
B807 Device No. error Or, the address was not a multiple of 16
of 16 when accessing the bit
when the bit device was accessed.
device.
The specified combination (addresses Set so that the number of
B80D Setting range error and points) exceeded the valid processing points does not
processing range. exceed the device range .
File register capacity setting The file register capacity was not Specify the file register
B814
error specified. capacity.

13 - 21 13 - 21
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (7/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
A transient transmission was executed
B815 Module mode setting error when the target station was set to the I/O Set to the intelli mode.
mode.
The mode setting of the remote control
B823 Remote control mode error Check the mode specification.
was incorrect.
A transient request was issued to a
Secure a communication buffer
B903 Transient request error station that has not secured a
area with a parameter.
communication buffer area.
The communication buffer size of the
Set the communication buffer
Communication buffer size corresponding station was out of range
B904 size of the corresponding
setting error when a dedicated instruction was
station within the range.
executed.
When the dedicated instruction is Make the communication buffer
executed, the transient data length is size of the corresponding
B905 Transient data length error
greater than the communication buffer station greater than the
size of the corresponding station. transient data length.
The corresponding station that is being
Check the cable and the
BA19 Corresponding station error tested stopped communication during
corresponding station.
line test 1.
All stations stopped communications
BA1B All stations error Check the cables.
during line test 1.
Any of the following were attempted to be
executed to the same station. (Including
the same requests)
• Message transmission function
Execute a request after
• Remote device station initialization
BB01 Concurrent execution error completion of another
procedure registration function
processing.
• G(P).RISEND or G(P).RIRCV
instruction
• Remote device station access from a
peripheral.
"Remote I/O net mode" is set for the To set "Remote I/O net mode",
BBC1 Mode setting error mode setting on a station other than set the station number setting
station No. 0. switch to the 0 position.
The station number setting switch setting
Check the station number and
of the module is other than "0 to 64".
BBC2 Station number setting error the number of occupied stations
Alternatively, the last station number is
of the module.
greater than 64.
Reduce the number of master
stations on the same line to
Multiple master stations exist on the one.
same line. Alternatively, if data link starts
BBC5 Master station duplication error
Alternatively, line noise was detected at when turning on the SB007
power on. (Master station duplication error
canceling request), check the
line status.*1
Reduce the number of standby
master stations on the same
Standby master station Multiple standby master stations exist on
BBCA line to one.
duplication error the same line.
Alternatively, check the line
status.
All stations data link error After the data link status is
A data link error occurred on all stations
BC01 (Message transmission recovered, perform the
during a message transmission.
function) message transmission again.
The target station specified for the
message transmission function is in any
of the following status.
• No network parameter is set. Check network parameters or
Message transmission target
BC03 • The specified station No. is not the remote device stations’
station failure
head station number. operations.
• The station is set as a reserved station.
• A data link error (including All stations
data link error) has occurred.
The message transmission was
Message transmission target
BC04 performed for any other than remote Check the target station.
station error
device stations.
Station No. out of range The station No. specified for the
BC05 (Message transmission message transmission function is outside Check the specified station No.
function) of the range between “1 and 64”.
1 The QJ61BT11N whose first 5 digits of serial number are "09112" or later is
supported.
For the QJ61BT11N whose first 5 digits of serial number are "09111" or earlier, reset
the programmable controller CP
13 - 22 13 - 22
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (8/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
Execution of the message transmission Execute the message
Message transmission function
BC06 function was attempted from other than transmission function on the
executing station invalid
the master station. master station.
In the message transmission function, Change the send data size so
BC07 Send data size out of range
the send data size is outside the range. that it will be within the range.
Check the sequence program
to see if any prohibited remote
output (RY) has not been
accessed.
With the message transmission function, If the same error persists after
BC50
abnormal data were received. checking the above, the master
module or remote device
station may be faulty. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
During execution of message
Check the operation of the
transmission, a data link error occurred
target remote device station.
Message transmission on the station.
handshake failure During execution of message
Stop the data link, and then
transmission, some parameters were
change parameters.
changed.
Check the sequence program
BC51 to see if any prohibited remote
output (RY) has not been
accessed.
With the message transmission function, If the same error persists after
abnormal data were received. checking the above, the master
module or remote device
station may be faulty. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
Increase the value for
Monitoring time setting
In the message transmission function, a
(SW0009).
Message transmission communication timeout has occurred.
BC52 If the error occurs again, check
handshake timeout
the target module and cables.
Data link stop (SB0002) was executed Stop data link after completion
during the message transmission. of message transmission.
Increase the value for
Monitoring time setting
In the message transmission function, a
(SW0009).
Message transmission communication timeout has occurred.
BC53 If the error occurs again, check
handshake timeout
the target module and cables.
Data link stop (SB0002) was executed Stop data link after completion
during the message transmission. of message transmission.
Execute the message
BC54 transmission function again.
If the same error persists, the
Message transmission With the message transmission function,
master module or remote
handshake failure abnormal data were received.
device station may be faulty.
BC55 Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
Executions of multiple requests for
Execute a request after
message transmission or remote device
BC57 Requests overlapped error completion of another
station access from a peripheral were
processing.
attempted to the same station.
Execute the message
BC58 transmission function again.
If the same error persists, the
Message transmission With the message transmission function,
master module or remote
handshake failure abnormal data were received.
device station may be faulty.
BC59 Please consult your local
Mitsubishi representative.
With the message transmission function, Check the operation of the
BC5B Abnormal response received
an abnormal response was received. target remote device station.

13 - 23 13 - 23
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (9/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
BC5C Execute the message
transmission function again.
BC5D If the same error persists, the
Message transmission With the message transmission function,
master module or remote
handshake failure abnormal data were received.
BC5E device station may be faulty.
Please consult your local
BC5F Mitsubishi representative.
Invalid number of The message transmission function was
Simultaneously execute the
BC60 simultaneously executed executed simultaneously for 5 or more
function for 4 stations or less.
message transmissions remote device stations.
No. of concurrent execution Too many remote device station
Execute four requests or less at
BC70 error accesses were requested from
the same time.
(Remote device station access) peripherals.
Execution of the remote device station
Unsupported function error Execute the function from the
BC71 access function was attempted from
(Remote device station access) master station.
other than the master station.
The target of remote device station
access from the peripheral is any of the
following.
Target station error • Not exist among network parameters. Check the parameters or
BC72
(Remote device station access) • Not have the start station No. operation of the target station.
• Set as a reserved station.
• Has a data link error.
(including errors on all stations)
Target station specification The target of the remote device station
Check the specified target
BC73 error access from the peripheral is a remote
station No. and station type.
(Remote device station access) I/O station.
Device No. for "RX", "RY", "RWw", or
Device No. error Check the parameters and valid
BC74 "RWr" is outside the valid range for the
(Remote device station access) device No. of the target station.
target station.
An all-stations data link error occurred
All-stations data link error Issue the request after starting
BC75 during execution of the remote device
(Remote device station access) data link.
station access from the peripheral.
Set a longer timeout time in the
Timeout occurred during the remote
Timeout application on the request
BC76 device station access from the
(Remote device station access) source, or check the operation
peripheral.
of the target slave station.
There is most likely a hardware
error in either the QJ61BT11N,
the CPU module, the base unit
BD85 Hardware error detection A hardware error was detected.
or other modules. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
BF11
BF12
BF13
BF14
BF15
BF16
BF17
BF18
BF19
BF1A
Please consult your local
BF1B System error ———
Mitsubishi representative.
BF1C
BF20
BF30
BF31
BF32
BF33
BF34
BF35
BF36
BF37

13 - 24 13 - 24
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

Table 13.1 Error code list (10/10)

Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
• Check the application of the
An error is detected in the process of
request source.
Execution result read error reading the execution result of the
BF38 • Check for remote device
(Remote device station access) remote device station access from the
station access from another
peripheral.
peripheral.
• Check the application of the
request source.
An error in the request procedure is • Check for remote device
Request procedure error
BF39 detected during the remote device station station accesses from
(Remote device station access)
access from the peripheral. multiple peripherals.
• Check if any value is written
in the system area.
Wait for a while before
Transient request overload There are too many transient requests to
BFFB transmitting again (transient
error the corresponding station.
overload status).
Check the operation of the
BFFE CPU monitoring timer time out The CPU monitoring timer timed out.
target station.
Take corrective actions,
C000 to (Errors detected by the referring to the troubleshooting
——— — —
CFFF Ethernet module) section of the Ethernet Interface
Module User's manual.
Take corrective actions,
referring to the troubleshooting
E000 to (Errors detected by the CC-Link
——— section of the CC-Link IE — —
EFFF IE controller network module)
Controller Network Reference
Manual.
Take corrective actions,
(Error detected by the
referring to the troubleshooting
F000 to MELSECENT/H,
——— section of the MELSECNET/H, — —
FFFF MELSECNET10 network
MELSECNET/10 Network
system
System Reference Manual

13 - 25 13 - 25
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

13.4 CC-Link Diagnostics

Check the status of each module after all the modules have been connected using CC-
Link dedicated cables, and verify that data link can be performed normally.
It is also possible when the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the remote I/O station of
MELSECNET/H.

(1) Host monitoring

This function monitors the items such as the data link status of the host (the
station to which peripheral devices are connected).
(a) Operating procedure
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link/LT diagnostics]
1) Select "CC-Link" for "Module Setting".
2) Specify the target module of Host monitoring for "Module No." or "I/O
Address".
3) Click the Start Monitoring button.

(b) Monitoring items

1) Host station
Indicates the type (master station, local station, standby master station)
of the monitored station and the mode* of CC-Link.
For a local station, the station number is also displayed.
Not displayed in the remote net ver. 1 mode.
2) Data link status
Displays the data link status of the host.
3) Action status
Displays the operating status of the host.
4) Switching status
Displays whether the data link is controlled by the master station or
standby master station.
5) Using loop
Displays the line in use.
6) Line status
Displays the line status.
7) Loop type
Displays the line type.

13 - 26 13 - 26
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

POINT
When conducting a network test, do not perform write to buffer memory address
5E0H.

(2) Other station monitoring

This function monitors the items such as the data link status of other stations
(stations other than the one to which peripheral devices are connected).
(a) Operating procedure
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link/LT diagnostics]
1) Select "CC-Link" for "Module Setting".
2) Specify the target master module of Monitoring other station for "Module
No." or "I/O Address".
3) Click the Start Monitoring button.
4) Click the Monitoring other station button.

(b) Monitoring items

1) Station
Displays the head station number of each station.
2) Reserve
Displays whether or not a reserved station is set.
" ": Reserved station is set.
" ": Reserved station is not set.
3) Invalid error
Displays whether or not an error invalid station is set.
" ": Error invalid station is set.
" ": Error invalid station is not set.

13 - 27 13 - 27
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

4) Station type
Displays the station type.
The CC-Link compatible version is also displayed in the remote net ver.
2 mode or remote net additional mode.
"Intelli": Local station, intelligent device station and standby master
station
"I/O" : Remote I/O station
"Device" : Remote device station
5) Number of occupied stations
Displays the number of occupied stations.
6) Status
Displays the link status of the module.
7) Transient error
Displays whether or not an error occurred during transient transmission.
" ": Error occurred.
" ": Error did not occur.
8) Expanded cyclic setting*
Displays the expanded cyclic setting.
9) Remote station points*
Displays the numbers of remote input and output (RX, RY) points of the
remote, local, intelligent device and standby master stations.
Not displayed in the remote net ver. 1 mode.

POINT
When making temporary error invalid station setting, do not perform write to buffer
memory addresses 5E0H, 603H to 607H.

13 - 28 13 - 28
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

(3) Loop test

Checks the operating status of the connected remote stations, local stations,
intelligent device stations and standby master station.
Normal stations are displayed "blue", abnormal stations "red", reserved stations
"green", error invalid stations "yellow", and unused stations "gray".

(a) Operating procedure

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link / CC-Link/LT diagnostics]
1) Select "CC-Link" for "Module Setting".
2) Specify the target master module of loop test for "Module No." or "I/O
Address".
3) Click the Start Monitoring button.
4) Click the Loop Test button.
5) When checking the communication status of all stations
Select "All stations" for "Target station", and click the Execute Test
button.
6) When checking the communication status of specific modules
Select "Selected station No." for "Target station", specify the station
number, and click the Execute Test button.

POINT
When conducting a loop test, do not perform write to buffer memory addresses
5E0H, 608H.

13 - 29 13 - 29
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

(4) H/W Information

This function displays the operation and setting statuses of the master module,
local modules, and standby master module.

(a) Operating procedure

[Diagnostics] [System monitor]
1) Select the QJ61BT11N.
2) Click the Module Detailed Information button.
3) Click the H/W Information button.

(The "Error contents Disposal" section is displayed in GX Developer

Version 8.17T or later.)

(b) Product information

The function version and serial No. are displayed as follows.

100320000000000-B

Function Version B

Serial No. (first 5 digits)

13 - 30 13 - 30
13 TROUBLESHOOTING
MELSEC-Q

(c) H/W LED Information

The H/W LED Information displays the following data link information.
Item Value
1: When the module is operating normally
RUN
0: At watchdog timer error
1: All stations are faulty
ERR.
Switching between 0 and 1: There is a faulty station
MST 1: Set to the master station
S MST 1: Set to the standby master station
LOCAL 1: Set to a local station
SW 1: Error in switch setting
M/S 1: A master station already exists on the same line
PRM 1: There is an error in the parameter contents
TIME 1: The data link monitoring timer was activated
LINE 1: The cable is broken or the transmission path is affected by noise, etc.
156K 1: A transmission speed of 156 kbps is selected
625K 1: A transmission speed of 625 kbps is selected
2.5M 1: A transmission speed of 2.5 Mbps is selected
5M 1: A transmission speed of 5 Mbps is selected
10M 1: A transmission speed of 10 Mbps is selected
TEST 1: An offline test is being executed
S0 Not used
S1 Not used
S2 Not used

(d) H/W SW Information

The H/W SW Information displays the following information.
Item Value
STNo.x10 Setting value of station number setting switch X10
STNo.x1 Setting value of station number setting switch X1
MODE Setting values of transmission speed and mode setting switches
STNo. Station number of relevant module when the power supply is turned on
S MSTNo. Station number of the standby master station set by parameter
(0: No standby master station specification)
B RATE Setting of transmission speed
MODE Mode setting status
CONFIG SW62 (module operation status)

13 - 31 13 - 31
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

APPENDIXES

Appendix 1 External Dimensions

This section describes the external dimensions of the QJ61BT11N.

App.

98(3.86)
(0.16)
4

23(0.91)

90(3.54) 27.4(1.08)

[Terminal block diagram with the cover open]

NC

NC

DA

SLD

DB

(FG)

DG

Unit: mm (inch)

App - 1 App - 1
 APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2 Dedicated Instructions

Using dedicated instructions, the QJ61BT11N is capable of the following:

• Transient transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations
• Message transmission to remote device stations

Appendix 2.1 Dedicated instruction list, applicable devices, and precautions

(1) Dedicated instruction list

The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used for each of
these stations:
Target station Instruction Description Reference page
Reads data from the buffer memory or the programmable
G(P).RIRD Appendix 2.2
Master station controller CPU device of the specified station.
Local station
App. G(P).RIWT
Writes data into the buffer memory or the programmable
Appendix 2.3
controller CPU device of the specified station.
G(P).RIRD Reads data from the buffer memory of the specified station. Appendix 2.2
G(P).RIWT Writes data into the buffer memory of the specified station. Appendix 2.3
Automatically performs handshaking with the specified
station and reads data from the buffer memory of that
G(P).RIRCV station. Appendix 2.4
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g.
AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Automatically performs handshaking with the specified
station and writes data into the buffer memory of that
Intelligent G(P).RISEND station. Appendix 2.5
device station Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g.
AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Reads data in the automatic update buffer of the specified
station.
G(P).RIFR Appendix 2.6
Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer
(e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Writes data into the automatic update buffer of the specified
station.
G(P).RITO Appendix 2.7
Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer
(e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).
Sets the network parameters for the master station and
Master station G(P).RLPASET Appendix 2.8
starts up the data link.
Performs a message transmission to a remote device
Remote device station.
G(P).RDMSG Appendix 2.9
station Available for remote device stations that support the
message transmission function.

POINT
Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed.
If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline, no error will occur, but the
execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed.

App - 2 App - 2
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(2) Available devices

The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions:
Internal devices
1 File register Constant
Bit Word
X, Y, M, L, F, V, B T, ST, C, D, W R, ZR —

1: Word device bit designation can be used for bit data.

Word device bit designation is done by specifying Word device . Bit No. .
(Bit numbers must be given in hexadecimal.)
For example, bit 10 of D0 is designated as D0.A .
However, bit designation is not allowed for timers (T), retentive timers (ST) and
counters (C).

(3) Precautions
(a) Precautions for using Monitoring time (SW0009) and
Dedicated instruction retry count setting (SW000B)
The Dedicated instruction retry count setting (SW000B) is applicable to
the following dedicated instructions. (See Section 8.4.2.)
Station executing dedicated instructions
Instruction
Master station Local station
G(P).RIRD
G(P).RIWT
G(P).RISEND
G(P).RIRCV
G(P).RIFR
G(P).RITO
G(P).RLPASET
G(P).RDMSG
: Applicable, : N/A

Set the Dedicated instruction retry count setting when the error completion
device turns ON due to noise. If this setting is made, frequency of this
turn-ON will be greatly reduced. Note that no retry is performed when the
target station has been disconnected at the time of dedicated instruction
execution.

Before execution of dedicated instructions, set the Monitoring time

(SW0009) and Dedicated instruction retry count setting (SW000B).

App - 3 App - 3
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.2 G(P).RIRD

The G(P).RIRD instruction reads the data for the specified points from the buffer
memory or the programmable controller CPU device of the specified station.
Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
(S) — — — — —
(D1) — — — — —
(D2) — — — —
[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RIRD G.RIRD Un (S) (D1) (D2)

Command
GP.RIRD GP.RIRD Un (S) (D1) (D2)

Set data
1
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S) Start number of the device in which control data is stored.
specified device
Device name
Within the range of the
(D1) Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored.
specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of
Within the range of the
(D2) reading. Bit
specified device
(D2) + 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
1 The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.

Control data
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
Specify the station numbers of the master station, local
(S) + 1 Station number 0 to 64 User
station and intelligent device station.
b15 b8 b7 b0
Access code
(S) + 2 See (1) and (2). User
Attribute code
Access code Attribute code

Buffer memory
Specify the buffer memory start address or device start 1
(S) + 3 address or device User
number.
number
2
Number of points 1 to 480
(S) + 4 Specify the read data count (in word units). 3 User
to read 1 to 32

App - 4 App - 4
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

1: For details, refer to the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station
from which data are read.
When the random access buffer is specified, specify the start address of the
random access buffer as 0.
2: The value indicates the maximum number of data to be read.
Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the
intelligent device station, or the receive buffer area setting range set by a
parameter.
3: When reading device data from the programmable controller CPU other than the
QCPU (Q mode), QCPU (A mode) or QnACPU/AnUCPU, the setting range shall
be 1 to 32 words.

(1) Buffer memory in the CC-Link

Buffer Memory contents Access code Attribute code
Buffer in the intelligent device station 00H
Random access buffer 20H
Remote input 21H
Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H 04H
station Remote register 24H
Link special relay 63H
Link special register 64H

(2) Device memory in the programmable controller CPU

Device type
Device contents Name Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X Hexadecimal 01H
Output relay Y Hexadecimal 02H
Internal relay M Decimal 03H
Latch relay L Decimal 83H
Link relay B Hexadecimal 23H
Timer (contact) T Decimal 09H
Timer (coil) T Decimal 0AH
Timer (present value) T Decimal 0CH
Retentive timer (contact) ST Decimal 89H
Retentive timer (coil) ST Decimal 8AH
Retentive timer (present value) ST Decimal 8CH 05H
Counter (contact) C Decimal 11H
Counter (coil) C Decimal 12H
Counter (present value) C Decimal 14H
Data register D Decimal 04H
Link register W Hexadecimal 24H
File register R Decimal 84H
Link special relay SB Hexadecimal 63H
Link special register SW Hexadecimal 64H
Special relay SM Decimal 43H
Special register SD Decimal 44H
Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed.
When accessing a bit device, specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16.
The extended data register of address D65536 or higher, and the extended link register of address W10000
or higher cannot be specified.
App - 5 App - 5
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(3) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the RIRD instruction

Master station Specified

station

Programmable controller CPU Master module Local module Programmable controller CPU

1)
Command
G(P).RIRD

1)
Buffer memory

2)
Device memory Device memory
3)
Receive buffer 2)

1) Accesses the buffer memory specified by (S)+2 and (S)+3 of the station
specified by (S)+1, or the programmable controller CPU device.
2) Stores the data that has been read in the receive buffer of the master
module.
3) Stores the data that has been read after the device specified in (D1), and
the device specified by (D2) turns on.

(b) The G(P).RIRD instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or

intelligent device stations simultaneously.
Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other
dedicated instruction(s) (refer to Appendix 2) is not allowed to the same local
station or intelligent device station.
Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is
completed.

App - 6 App - 6
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the G(P).RIRD instruction: the
completion device (D2) and status display device at completion (D2) + 1.

1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G(P).RIRD
instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the
G(P).RIRD instruction.
Normal completion : Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion: Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the G(P).RIRD instruction is completed,
and turns OFF in the next END processing.
END processing END processing END processing END processing
Sequence program
Execution completion of
ON the G(P).RIRD instruction
OFF
G(P).RIRD instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device ON Abnormal
completion

Status display device OFF Normal completion

at completion 1 scan

(d) Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station.
Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction
is completed, execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion
device has turned ON.
The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously
executed dedicated instruction is ignored.
(e) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RIRD instruction is 8 steps.
(f) The receive buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For more details,
see Section 6.2.

(4) Operation error

In the following cases, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
and the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 Or, when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction
exceeds the allowable range.

App - 7 App - 7
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(5) Program example

When X0 is turned ON, 10-word data are stored from the area starting D1000 in
a local station (station No.1), which is connected to the master module in the I/O
No. position of X/Y40 to X/Y5F, into the area starting from D0.
(When the link special register (SW) refresh device is set to SW0)
M12 is the RIRD instruction executing flag.

Control data setting

Dedicated instruction execution

Sets G(P).RIRD instruction

executing flag to ON.

Processing upon completion

Performs processing for receive completion.
of reception
Processing upon normal
Performs processing for normal completion. completion of dedicated instruction.

Processing upon failure

Performs processing for abnormal completion. of dedicated instruction

Sets G(P).RIRD instruction

executing flag to OFF.

App - 8 App - 8
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.3 G(P).RIWT

The G(P).RIWT instruction writes the data for the specified points, to the buffer
memory or the programmable controller CPU device of the specified station.
Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(D) — — — —
[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RIWT G.RIWT Un (S1) (S2) (D)

Command
GP.RIWT GP.RIWT Un (S1) (S2) (D)

Set data
1
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S1) Start number of the device in which control data is stored.
specified device
Device name
Within the range of the
(S2) Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored.
specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of
Within the range of the
(D) writing. Bit
specified device
(D) + 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
1 The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.

Control data
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
Specify the station numbers of the master station, local
(S1) + 1 Station number 0 to 64 User
station and intelligent device station.
b15 b8 b7 b0
Access code
(S1) + 2 See (1) and (2). User
Attribute code
Access code Attribute code

Buffer memory
Specify the buffer memory start address or device start 1
(S1) + 3 address or device User
number.
number
2
Number of points 1 to 480
(S1) + 4 Specify the write data count (in word units). 3 User
to write 1 to 10

App - 9 App - 9
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

1: For details, refer to the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station
to which data are written.
When the random access buffer is specified, specify the start address of the
random access buffer as 0.
2: The value indicates the maximum number of data to be written.
Specify the value within the buffer memory capacity of the local station or the
intelligent device station, or the send buffer area setting range set by a parameter.
3: When writing device data to the programmable controller CPU other than the
QCPU (Q mode), QCPU (A mode) or QnACPU/AnUCPU, the setting range shall
be 1 to 10 words.

(1) Buffer memory in the CC-Link

Buffer Memory contents Access code Attribute code
Buffer in the intelligent device station 00H
Random access buffer 20H
Remote input 21H
Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H 04H
station Remote register 24H
Link special relay 63H
Link special register 64H

(2) Device memory in the programmable controller CPU

Device type
Device contents Name Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X Hexadecimal 01H
Output relay Y Hexadecimal 02H
Internal relay M Decimal 03H
Latch relay L Decimal 83H
Link relay B Hexadecimal 23H
Timer (contact) T Decimal 09H
Timer (coil) T Decimal 0AH
Timer (present value) T Decimal 0CH
Retentive timer (contact) ST Decimal 89H
Retentive timer (coil) ST Decimal 8AH
Retentive timer (present value) ST Decimal 8CH 05H
Counter (contact) C Decimal 11H
Counter (coil) C Decimal 12H
Counter (present value) C Decimal 14H
Data register D Decimal 04H
Link register W Hexadecimal 24H
File register R Decimal 84H
Link special relay SB Hexadecimal 63H
Link special register SW Hexadecimal 64H
Special relay SM Decimal 43H
Special register SD Decimal 44H
Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed.
When accessing a bit device, specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16.
The extended data register of address D65536 or higher, and the extended link register of address W10000
or higher cannot be specified.

App - 10 App - 10
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(3) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RIWT instruction

Master station Specified

station

Programmable controller CPU Master module Local module Programmable controller CPU

2)
Command
G(P).RIWT

1) 2)
Send buffer Buffer memory

3)
Device memory Device memory

3)
4)

1) Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of
the master module.
2) Writes the data specified by (S2) to the buffer memory specified by
(S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of the station specified by (S1)+1 or to the
programmable controller CPU device.
3) The specified station returns the write complete response to the master
station.
4) The device specified by (D) turns ON.

(b) The G(P).RIWT instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or

intelligent device stations simultaneously.
Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other
dedicated instruction(s) (refer to Appendix 2) is not allowed to the same local
station or intelligent device station.
Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is
completed.

App - 11 App - 11
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the G(P).RIWT instruction: the
completion device (D) and the status display device at completion (D) + 1.
1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G(P).RIWT
instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the
G(P).RIWT instruction.
Normal completion : Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion: Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the G(P).RIWT instruction is completed,
and turns OFF in the next END processing.
END processing END processing END processing END processing
Sequence program
Execution completion of
ON the G(P).RIWT instruction
OFF
G(P).RIWT instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device ON Abnormal
completion

Status display device OFF Normal completion

at completion 1 scan

(d) Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station.
Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction
is completed, execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion
device has turned ON.
The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously
executed dedicated instruction is ignored.
(e) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RIWT instruction is 8 steps.
(f) The send buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For more details,
see Section 6.2.

(4) Operation error

In the following cases, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
and the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 Or, when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction
exceeds the allowable range.

App - 12 App - 12
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(5) Program example

When X0 is turned ON, 10-word data are stored from the area starting D0 in a
local station (station No.1), which is connected to the master module in the I/O
No. position of X/Y40 to X/Y5F, into the area starting from D1000.
(When the link special register (SW) refresh device is set to SW0)
M13 is the G(P).RIWT instruction executing flag.

Control data setting

Dedicated instruction execution

Sets G(P).RIWT instruction

executing flag to ON.
Processing upon completion
Performs processing for receive completion.
of reception
Processing upon normal
Performs processing for normal completion.
completion of dedicated instruction
Processing upon failure
Performs processing for abnormal completion.
of dedicated instruction
Sets G(P).RIWT instruction
executing flag to OFF.

App - 13 App - 13
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.4 G(P).RIRCV

The G(P).RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent

device station and reads data from the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device
station.
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).

Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
Set data (System, user) J \ function Index
File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(D1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(D2) — — — —

[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RIRCV G.RIRCV Un (S1) (D1) (S2) (D2)

Command
GP.RIRCV GP.RIRCV Un (S1) (D1) (S2) (D2)

Set data
1
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S1) Start number of the device in which control data is stored.
specified device
Within the range of the
(D1) Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored. Device name
specified device
Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the
(S2)
stored. specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the
(D2) Bit
reading. (D2)+1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion. specified device
1 The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.

Control data
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
(S1) + 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station. 0 to 64 User
Access code
(S1) + 2 Set "0004H". 0004H User
Attribute code
Buffer memory 1
(S1) + 3 Specify the buffer memory start address. User
address
Number of points 2
(S1) + 4 Specify the read data count (in word units). 1 to 480 User
to read

App - 14 App - 14
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

1: See the manual for the intelligent device station from which data will be read.
2: Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read.
Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting
range to be set with a parameter.

Interlock signal storage devices

Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 RY: Request device 0 to 127 User
(S2) + 0 0 RY
Set the upper 8 bits to 0. 0 User

RX : Completion device 0 to 127 User

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(S2) + 1 RWr 1 RX
RWr : Error code storage device 0 to 15
User
If none, set to FFH. FFH
0: Complete with the contents of 1 device (RXn).
b15 to b0 1: Complete with the contents of 2 devices (RXn and
(S2) + 2 completion mode 0/1 User
RXn+1).
(RXn+1 turns ON at an abnormal completion.)
1: The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage
device.

App - 15 App - 15
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RIRCV instruction

Master station Specified

station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

Intelligent device station
1)
Command
2)
RX RX
G(P).RIRCV
4)
RY RY

Buffer memory

3)
Device memory Receive buffer

5)

1) Instructs the master module to read data from the buffer memory
specified in (S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of the station specified in (S1)+1.
2) The master module monitors the remote input (RX) specified in (S2)+1.
3) When the remote input (RX) specified in (S2)+1 turns ON from OFF,
the master module reads data from the buffer memory of the specified
station.
Read data are stored in the receive buffer of the master module.
4) The master module turns the remote output (RY) specified in (S2)+0
ON.
When the remote input specified in (S)+1 turns OFF from ON, the
remote output specified in (S2)+0 turns OFF.
5) Data read out from the specified station are stored in the device
specified in (D1) and subsequent devices, and a device specified in D2
turns ON.

App - 16 App - 16
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(b) The G(P).RIRCV instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device

stations simultaneously.
Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other
dedicated instruction(s) (refer to Appendix 2) is not allowed to the same local
station or intelligent device station.
Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is
completed.

(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the G(P).RIRCV instruction: the
completion device (D2) and the status display device at completion (D2)+1.
1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G(P).RIRCV
instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the
G(P).RIRCV instruction.
Normal completion: Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion: Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the G(P).RIRCV instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the
next END processing.

END processing END processing END processing END processing

Sequence program

ON
OFF
G(P).RIRCV instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device On Abnormal
completion
Normal
Status display OFF completion
device at completion 1 scan
Receive completion

RYn OFF
(Request device)
RXn OFF
(Completion device)
Other end station send ready

(d) Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station.
Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction
is completed, execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion
device has turned ON.
The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously
executed dedicated instruction is ignored.

(e) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RIRCV instruction is 10 steps.

(f) The receive buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For more details,
see Section 6.2.

App - 17 App - 17
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(2) Operation error

In the following cases, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
and the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 Or, when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction
exceeds the allowable range.

(3) Program example

When M1 turns ON, 11-word data in the buffer memory address 400H and later of
the intelligent device station No.63 (AJ65BT-R2(N)), which is connected to the
master module installed in the position of I/O No. X/Y00 to X/Y1F, are read out to
the area starting from D40.
The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows: request device
RY2, completion device RX2, error code storage device RWr2, and completion
mode 1.
Also, set the link special register (SW) refresh device to SW0.
M10 is the G(P).RIRCV instruction executing flag.

Control data setting

Interlock signal storage

device setting

Dedicated instruction execution

Sets G(P).RIRCV instruction

executing flag to ON.
Processing upon normal
Performs processing for normal completion.
completion of dedicated instruction

Performs processing for abnormal completion. Processing upon failure of

dedicated instruction

Sets read request to OFF.

Sets G(P).RIRCV instruction

executing flag to OFF.

App - 18 App - 18
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.5 G(P).RISEND

The G(P).RISEND instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent
device station and writes data to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device
station.
Available for modules that have handshake signals (e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).

Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(S3) — — — — —
(D) — — — —
[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RISEND G.RISEND Un (S1) (S2) (S3) (D)

Command
GP.RISEND GP.RISEND Un (S1) (S2) (S3) (D)

Set data
1
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S1) Start number of the device in which control data is stored.
specified device
Within the range of the
(S2) Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored. Device name
specified device
Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the
(S3)
stored. specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the
(D) Bit
writing. (D)+1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion. specified device
1 The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.

Control data
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
(S1) + 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station. 0 to 64 User
Access code
(S1) + 2 Set "0004H". 0004H User
Attribute code
Buffer memory 1
(S1) + 3 Specify the buffer memory start address. User
address
Number of points 2
(S1) + 4 Specify the write data count (in word units). 1 to 480 User
write

App - 19 App - 19
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

1: See the manual for the intelligent device station to which data will be written.
2: Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written.
Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting
range to be set with a parameter.

Interlock signal storage devices

Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 RY: Request device 0 to 127 User
(S3) + 0 0 RY
Set the upper 8 bits to 0. 0 User

RX : Completion device 0 to 127 User

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(S3) + 1 RWr 1 RX
RWr : Error code storage device 0 to 15
User
If none, set to FFH. FFH
0: Complete with the contents of 1 device (RXn).
b15 to b0 1: Complete with the contents of 2 devices (RXn and
(S3) + 2 Completion mode 0/1 User
RXn+1).
(RXn+1 turns ON at an abnormal completion.)
1: The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage
device.

App - 20 App - 20
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RISEND instruction

Master station Specified

station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

Intelligent device station
1)
Command 6) 5) Executes
RX RX request
G(P).RISEND processing
4)
RY RY

Buffer memory
3)

Device memory Send buffer

2)

7)

1) Instructs the master module to write data to the buffer memory specified
in (S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of the station specified in (S1)+1.
2) Data to be written to the specified station are stored in the send buffer of
the master module.
3) Data are written to the buffer memory specified in (S1)+2 and (S1)+3 of
the station specified in (S1)+1.
4) The master module turns the remote output (RY) specified in (S3)+0
ON.
5) The station specified in (S1)+1 performs processing for the remote
output (RY).
6) Upon completion of the processing for the remote output (RY), the
station specified in (S1)+1 turns the remote input (RX) specified in
(S3)+1 ON and the remote output (RY) specified in (S3)+0 turns OFF.
Also, the response showing completion of write to the master module is
returned.
7) The device specified in (D) turns ON.

App - 21 App - 21
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(b) The G(P).RISEND instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device

stations simultaneously.
Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other
dedicated instruction(s) (refer to Appendix 2) is not allowed to the same local
station or intelligent device station. Create a program in which a flag
remains on until the instruction is completed.

(c) There are two types of interlock signals for the G(P).RISEND instruction: the
completion device (D) and the status display device at completion (D)+1.
1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G(P).RISEND
instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the
G(P).RISEND instruction.
Normal completion : Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion: Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the G(P).RISEND instruction is completed,
and turns OFF in the next END processing.

END processing END processing END processing END processing

Sequence program
Execution completion of
ON the RISEND instruction

G(P).RISEND OFF
instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device ON Abnormal
completion
Normal
Status display OFF completion
device at completion
1 scan
Send completion

RYn OFF
(Request device)
RXn OFF
(Completion device)
Receive completion

(d) Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station.
Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction
is completed, execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion
device has turned ON.
The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously
executed dedicated instruction is ignored.

(e) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RISEND instruction is 10 steps.

(f) The send buffer assignment is performed using the "Station information
setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For more details,
see Section 6.2.

App - 22 App - 22
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(2) Operation error

In the following cases, operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON and
the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 Or, when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction
exceeds the allowable range.

(3) Program example

When M6 turns ON, 1-word data are written to D10 from the buffer memory
address 111H of the intelligent device station No.63 (AJ65BT-R2(N)), which is
connected to the master module installed in the position of I/O No. X/Y00 to
X/Y1F.
The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows: request device
RY4, completion device RX4, error code storage device RWr1, and completion
mode 1.
Also, set the link special register (SW) refresh device to SW0.
M11 is the G(P).RISEND instruction executing flag.

Control data setting

Interlock signal storage

device setting

Sets data to be written to

intelligent device station

Dedicated instruction execution

Sets G(P).RISEND instruction

executing flag to ON.

Processing upon normal

Performs processing for normal completion.
completion of dedicated instruction
Processing upon failure of
Performs processing for abnormal completion.
dedicated instruction

Sets write request to OFF.

Sets G(P).RISEND instruction

executing flag to OFF.

App - 23 App - 23
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.6 G(P).RIFR

The G(P).RIFR instruction reads the data from the automatic update buffer of the
specified station.
Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2 (N))).

Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
n1 — — —
n2 — — —
(D) — — — — —
n3 — — —

[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RIFR G.RIFR Un n1 n2 (D) n3

Command
GP.RIFR GP.RIFR Un n1 n2 (D) n3

Set data
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH
Intelligent device station number 1 to 64
n1
Random access buffer specification FFH
Binary 16 bits
The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent
Between 0 and parameter
n2 device station specified by the master station or the random
setting value 1
access buffer.
Within the range of the
(D) Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored. Device
specified device
n3 Number of points to read 0 to 4096 2 Binary 16 bits
1: The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer.
2: No processing will be performed when set to "0".

App - 24 App - 24
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RIFR instruction

Master station Specified

station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

Intelligent device station

Command Communication
G(P).RIFR commences Buffer memory
when
conditions
1)
are met
Automatic update
buffer memory
Automatic
Device memory update buffer
2)

1) Accesses the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the

master module specified by Un.
2) Stores the data read after the device specified by (D).

(b) The G(P).RIFR instruction reads data when it is executed.

However, this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than
one location for the same intelligent device station.

(c) The maximum points that can be read by the G(P).RIFR instruction are
4096.

(d) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RIFR instruction is 9 steps.

(e) The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the "Station
information setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer.
For more details, see Section 6.2.

App - 25 App - 25
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(2) Operation error

In the following cases, operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON and
the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
When the setting for number of points to read (n3) is outside of the setting range.
4100
When the station number specified with n1 does not exist.

(3) Program example

Master module Intelligent device station
Programmable controller CPU (Start I/O number 40) (Station number 1)

Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory

300H

Automatic update
buffer memory

5FFH

When X0 is turned ON, the following example program reads 10-word data to D0
or succeeding addresses from the automatic update buffer offset value of 100
(400H of the intelligent device station) in the master module.
(When the link special register (SW) refresh device is set to SW0)

Dedicated instruction
execution

App - 26 App - 26
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.7 G(P).RITO

The G(P).RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the specified
station.
Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2(N)).

Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
n1 — — —
n2 — — —
(D) — — — — —
n3 — — —

[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RITO G.RITO Un n1 n2 (D) n3

Command
GP.RITO GP.RITO Un n1 n2 (D) n3

Set data
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH
Intelligent device station number 1 to 64
n1
Random access buffer specification FFH
Binary 16 bits
The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent
Between 0 and parameter
n2 device station specified by the master station or the random
setting value 1
access buffer.
Within the range of the
(D) Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored. Device
specified device
n3 Number of points to write 0 to 4096 2 Binary 16 bits
1: The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer.
2: No processing will be performed when set to "0".

App - 27 App - 27
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RITO instruction

Master station Specified

station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

Intelligent device station

Command Communication
commences Buffer memory
G(P).RITO
when
conditions
are met
1) Automatic update
buffer memory
Automatic
Device memory update buffer
2)

1) Accesses the device after the device specified by (D) of the master
module specified by Un.
2) Writes to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2.

(b) The G(P).RITO instruction writes data when it is executed.

However, this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than
one location for the same intelligent device station.

(c) The maximum points that can be read by the G(P).RITO instruction are
4096.

(d) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RITO instruction is 9 steps.

(e) The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the "Station
information setting" of the network parameters of the GX Developer. For
more details, see Section 6.2.

App - 28 App - 28
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(2) Operation error

In the following cases, operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON and
the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
When the setting for number of points to write (n3) is outside of the setting range.
4100
When the station number specified with n1 does not exist.

(3) Program example

Master module Intelligent device station
Programmable controller CPU (Start I/O number 40) (Station number 1)

Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory

300H

Automatic update
buffer memory

5FFH

When X0 is turned ON, the following example program writes 10-word data from
D0 to the automatic update buffer offset value starting from 100 (400H of the
intelligent device station) in the master module.
(When the link special register (SW) refresh device is set to SW0)

Dedicated instruction
execution

App - 29 App - 29
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.8 G(P).RLPASET

Set the network parameter to the master station and start up the data link.
Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(S3) — — — — —
(S4) — — — — —
(S5) — — — — —
(D) — — — —

[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RLPASET G.RLPASET Un (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) (D)

Command
GP.RLPASET GP.RLPASET Un (S1) (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) (D)

Master station set data

1
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S1) Start number of the device in which control data is stared.
specified device
2 Start number of the device in which slave station setting data Within the range of the
(S2)
is stored. specified device
2 Start number of the device in which reserved station Within the range of the
(S3) Device name
specification data is stored. specified device
2 Start number of the device in which error invalid station Within the range of the
(S4)
specification data is stored. specified device
2 Start number of the device in which send, receive and Within the range of the
(S5)
automatic refresh buffer assignment data is stored. specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of
Within the range of the
(D) reading. Bit
specified device
(D)+1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
1 The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.
2 When the setting data for (S2) to (S5) are not to be set, specify a dummy device.

App - 30 App - 30
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Control data
2
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
Specifies whether the individual setting data from (S2) to
(S5) is valid or invalid.
0: Invalid 1
1: Valid
b15 b14 b13 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0
Slave station setting data (S2)
Reserved station specification data
(S1) + 1 Setting flag (S3) —
Error invalid station specification data
(S4)
Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer
assignment data (S5)
Mode
00: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
01: Remote net (Additional mode)
10: Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
11: Not used

Number of
User
connected modules
(S1) + 2 Sets the number of connected slave stations. 1 to 64
involved in
communication
(S1) + 3 Number of retries Sets the number of retries to a communication faulty station. 1 to 7
Number of
Sets the number of slave stations that can be returned per
(S1) + 4 automatic return 1 to 10
one link scan.
modules
Specifies the data link status when a master station
Operation
programmable controller CPU error occurs.
(S1) + 5 specification when 0, 1
0: Stop
CPU is down
1: Continue
Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for
Scan mode sequence scan.
(S1) + 6 0, 1
specification 0: Asynchronous
1: Synchronous
(S1) + 7 Delay time setting Set 0 for the delay time. 0
1: For the setting data specified invalid, default parameter will be applied.
2: Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion.

App - 31 App - 31
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Slave station setting data

Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
The type of slave station, number of occupied slave stations
and station number are set as follows.
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0

Station number
—
Number of occupied slave stations
Type of slave station

The default parameter settings are "0101H to 0140H" (station

number: 1 to 64, number of occupied slave stations: 1, type
of slave station: remote I/O station).
Setting of the station number
1 to 40H
1 to 64 (BIN setting)
Setting of the number of occupied slave stations
Number of occupied
Setting
slave stations
Station 1 1H 1 to 4H
Station 2 2H
(S2) + 0
Setting for 1 to 64 Station 3 3H
to User
modules 3 Station 4 4H
(S2) + 63
Setting of the type of slave station Ver.1compatible remote
device station 4
Type of slave station Setting
Ver.1compatible remote I/O station 0H
Ver.1compatible remote device station 1H
Ver.1compatible intelligent device station 2H
Ver. 2 compatible single remote device station 5H
Ver. 2 compatible single intelligent device
6H
station
Ver. 2 compatible double remote device station 8H 0 to FH
Ver. 2 compatible double intelligent device
9H
station
Ver. 2 compatible quadruple remote device
BH
station
Ver. 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device
CH
station
Ver. 2 compatible octuple remote device
EH
station
Ver. 2 compatible octuple intelligent device
FH
station

3: Perform the settings for as many connected modules involved in communication as has been specified by the control
data.
4: Setting a value outside the setting range in the slave station type setting results in abnormal completion.

App - 32 App - 32
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Reserved station specification data

Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
6
Specify reserved stations.
0: Not specified
1: Specified
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(S3) + 0 (S3)+0 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
Setting for 1 to 64
to — User
modules 5 (S3)+1 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(S3) + 3 (S3)+2 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(S3)+3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Default parameter setting is "0: Not specified" for all stations.

5: Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data.
6: Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station, local station or intelligent device
station that occupies 2 or more stations.

Error invalid station specification data

Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
8
Specify the error invalid station.
0: Not specified
1: Specified
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
(S4) + 0 (S4)+0 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1
Setting for 1 to 64
to — User
modules 7 (S4)+1 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17
(S4) + 3 (S4)+2 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33
(S4)+3 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Default parameter setting is "0: Not specified" for all stations.

7: Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data.
8: Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station, local station or intelligent device
station that occupies 2 or more stations.
The reserved station specification is given the higher priority if both error invalid station and reserved station
specifications are made for the same station.

App - 33 App - 33
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data

Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient
transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations.
Send/receive
(S5)+0 Send buffer size buffer 10:
(S5)+1 Receive buffer size Settings for the first module 0H (no setting),
Automatic refresh 40H to 1000H
(S5)+2 buffer size 0 (word) (no setting)
64 to 4096 (words)
(S5) + 0
Setting for 1 to 26 to
to User
modules 9
(S5) + 77 Automatic refresh
(S5)+75 Send buffer size
buffer 11:
0H (no setting),
(S5)+76 Receive buffer size Settings for the 26th module
Automatic refresh 80H to 1000H
(S5)+77 buffer size 0 (word) (no setting)
128 to 4096 (words)
The default parameter settings are "send buffer size: 40H,
receive buffer size: 40H, automatic refresh buffer size: 80H."
9: Perform the settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting
data, starting from the smallest station number.
10: Keep the total size of the send and receive buffer sizes at 1000H (4096 (words)) or less.
Specify the size of data to be sent and received plus 7 words for the send and receive buffer sizes, respectively.
Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion.
11: Keep the total size of the automatic refresh buffer sizes at 1000H (4096 (words)) or less.
Specify the necessary automatic refresh buffer size for each intelligent device station.
Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion.

App - 34 App - 34
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(1) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RLPASET instruction.

Programmable controller CPU Master module

Command
G(P).RLPASET
Network
1) parameter

Device
memory
2)
4) Execution result

3) Data link start

1) Pass the network parameters set in (S1) to (S5) to the master module
specified by Un.
2) The master module analyzes the settings of the network parameters.
3) If the network parameter settings are correct, the data link is started.
4) The device specified by (D) turns on.

(b) It is only possible to execute one G(P).RLPASET instruction at a time.

App - 35 App - 35
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(C) There are two types or interlock signals for the G(P).RLPASET instruction:
the completion device (D) and status display device at completion (D) + 1.
1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END Processing of the scan where the
G(P).RLPASET instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next
END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns On and OFF depending on the completion status of the
G(P).RLPASET instruction.
Normal completion : Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion : Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the G(P).RLPASET instruction is
completed, and turns OFF in the next END
processing.
(D) After executing the G(P).RLPASET instruction, turn on SB0003
(refresh instruction) to refresh cyclic data.

[When all the stations are normal]

END END END END END END END
processing processing processing processing processing processing processing
Sequence program
Refresh stop Refresh start
Data link stop Data link start
G(P).RLPASET
instruction
completion
Host data link status
(X01)
Refresh instruction
(SB03)
Data link stop
(SB02)
Data link stop complete
(SB45)
G(P).RLPASET instruction
Direction device ON
Complete device
ON
Status display device Abnormal completion
at completion
1 scan

App - 36 App - 36
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

[When all the stations are faulty]

END END END END END END END
processing processing processing processing processing processing processing
Sequence program
Refresh stop Refresh start
Data link stop Return to system processing Data link start
G(P).RLPASET
instruction completion
Host data link status
(X01)
Refresh instruction
(SB03)
Data link stop
(SB02)
Data link stop complete
(SB45)
G(P).RLPASET instruction
Direction device ON
Complete device
ON Abnormal
Status display device completion
at completion
1 scan
Return to system

(2) Operation error

In the following cased, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
and the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data cannot be used.
When the number of points for data used in the instruction exceeds the available
range, or storage data and constants of a device specified by the instruction
exceeds the available range (including dummy devices).
The number of points required for each data is shown below.
• Control data : 8 points
• Slave station setting data : 64 points
• Reserved station specification data : 4 points
4101 • Error invalid station specification data : 4 points
• Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data : 78 points
Example: Assume that data link registers D0 to D12287 are available for the
Q02CPU. If the device head number of the slave station setting data is
set to D12284 because there are only 4 slave stations, the
programmable controller CPU nonetheless checks the range from
D12284 to D122347 (for 64 stations) and an error indicating that the
available range is exceeded occurs.

App - 37 App - 37
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(3) Program example

This program sets the network parameters for the master module mounted at the
I/O numbers X/Y00 to X/Y1F and starts the data link.

Station number 1

Local Station number 2 Station number 3

Master
station
station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
(occupies
(X/Y00 to 1F) (Error invalid station) (Reserved station)
1 station)
(occupies 1 station) (occupies 1 station)

Refresh of SB/SW
SB0040 to SB01FF are read
to SB0040 to SB01FF.
SW0040 to SW01FF are read
to SW0040 to SW01FF.
Parameter setting

Instruct to set parameters

G(P).RLPASET instruction
· Control data

Clear complete status.

All setting data: Valid

Number of connected modules

involved in communication: 3

Number of retries: 3 times

Number of automatic return

modules: 1 module

Operation specification when

CPU is down: stop

Scan mode specification:

Asynchronous

Delay time setting: 0

· Slave station setting data

First: Local station, occupies

1 station, station
number 1 *1
Second: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
Third: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
· Reserved station specification data station number 3

Reserved station specification:

station number 3
· Error invalid station specification data

Error invalid station specification:

station number 2
· Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data

First (station number 1) local station

Send buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Receive buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Automatic refresh buffer: 0 word
*1 Set the station number in hexadecimal. (Example) Set 14H for station No. 20.

App - 38 App - 38
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

· Parameter registration (data link startup)

Dedicated instruction
(G(P).RLPASET)
Processing at completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction

Turn the parameter setting

instruction off.
Instruct to refresh at normal
completion of the G(P).RLPASET
instruction.
Instruct to start the control
program at normal completion
of the G(P).RLPASET instruction.
Performs abnormal
completion processing
Parameter setting change
Parameter
change
instruction
Instruct to stop data link

Turn the data link stop

instruction off

Instruct to stop refreshing

Instruct to change parameters

G(P).RLPASET instruction
· Control data

Clear complete status

Slave station setting data/send,

receive and automatic refresh
buffer assignment data: Valid
Number of connected modules
involved in communication: 3

Number of retries: 3 times

Number of automatic return

modules: 1 module

Operation specification when

CPU is down: Stop

Scan mode specification:

Asynchronous

Delay time setting: 0

· Slave station setting data

First: Local station, occupies

1 station, station
number 1 *1
Second: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 2
Third: Remote I/O station,
occupies 1 station,
station number 3
*1 Set the station number in hexadecimal. (Example) Set 14H for station No. 20.

App - 39 App - 39
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

· Send, receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data

First (station number 1) local station
Send buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Receive buffer: 100 word

First (station number 1) local station

Automatic refresh buffer: 0 word
· Parameter registration (data link startup)
Dedicated instruction
(G(P).RLPASET) *2
Processing at completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction

Turn the parameter setting

instruction off.
Instruct to refresh at normal
completion of the
G(P).RLPASET instruction.
Instruct to start the control
program at normal completion
of the G(P).RLPASET
Performs abnormal completion processing instruction.

Start of the control program

Refresh of RX
RX00 to RX5F are read to
X1000 to X105F.
Refresh of RWr
RXr0 to RWr3 are read to
D1000 to D1003.
Station number 1 control program

Station number 1 control program

Station number 2 control program

Station number 2 control program

Station number 3 control program

Station number 3 control program

Refresh of RWw
D2000 to D2003 are written into
RWw0 to RWw3
Refresh of RY
Y1000 to Y105F are written into
RY00 to RY5F

Refresh of SB/SW

SB0000 to SB003F are refreshed.

SW0000 to SW003F are refreshed.

*2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices.

App - 40 App - 40
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.9 G(P).RDMSG

With this instruction, a message is sent to a remote device station. (The first five digits
of serial No. must be 10032 or later.)
This instruction is available for remote device stations that support the message
transmission function.
Usable devices
Internal device Link direct device Intelligent
Constant
(System, user) J \ function Index
Set data File
module register Other
register
Bit Word Bit Word device Z K, H S
U \G
(S1) — — — — —
(S2) — — — — —
(D1) — — — — —
(D2) — — — —
[Instruction [Execution
symbol] condition]
Command
G.RDMSG G.RDMSG Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

Command
GP.RDMSG GP.RDMSG Un (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

Set data
1
Device Description Setting range Data type
Un Start I/O number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits
Within the range of the
(S1) Start No. of the device in which control data are stored
specified device
2 Within the range of the
(S2) Start No. of the device that stores data to be sent Device name
specified device
2 Within the range of the
(D1) Start No. of the device that stores received data
specified device
Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of
Within the range of the
(D2) reading. Bit
specified device
(D2) + 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion.
1 The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data.
2 For details of the send data and receive data, refer to the manual for the remote device station that
supports the message transmission function.

Control data
Device Item Set data Setting range Set by
Stores the status when the instruction is complete.
(S1) + 0 Completion status 0 : No error (normal completion) — System
Other than 0: Error code
(S1) + 1 Station number Specify the station number of the remote device station. 1 to 64 User
1 to 255
(S1) + 2 Send data size Specify a send data size (in bytes). User
(See (1).)
Receivable data Specify the maximum size of the device that stores received 0 to 255
(S1) + 3 User
size data (in bytes). (See (2).)
0 to 255
(S1) + 4 Receive data size The size of received data (in bytes) is stored. System
(See (2).)

App - 41 App - 41
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(1) Send data size

Programmable controller CPU Master module Remote device station

Device Send
Size
memory data
specified Request
in (S1)+2

When the send data size ((S1)+2) is an odd number of bytes, the low byte of the
last data is sent as the last byte.
Programmable controller CPU Master module Remote device station

Device Send
memory data
Request

The low byte

of the last data
is sent.

(2) Receivable data size and receive data size

Set a receivable data size ((S1)+3) so that it will satisfy the following conditional
expression:
Receivable data size ((S1)+3) Receive data size ((S1)+4)
Programmable controller CPU Master module Remote device station

Received Size
Device
data stored
memory Response
in (S1)+4
Size
specified
in (S1)+3

If the receivable data size ((S1)+3) is smaller than the receive data size ((S1)+4),
data sent from a remote device station cannot be received.
The G(P).RDMSG instruction will fail (error code: B418H).

App - 42 App - 42
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

The following explains the operations when the receivable data size ((S1)+3) is
not equal to the receive data size ((S1)+4).

(a) Receivable data size ((S1)+3) > Receive data size ((S1)+4)
Programmable controller CPU Master module Remote device station

Device Received
memory data
Response

Data are
not updated.

(b) When the receivable data size ((S1)+3) is an odd number of bytes
Programmable controller CPU Master module Remote device station

In the high
byte of the
last data, Device Received
0 is stored.
memory data
Response

(c) When the receive data size ((S1)+4) is an odd number of bytes (when data
received from a remote device station is an odd number of bytes in length)
Programmable controller CPU Master module Remote device station

In the high
byte of the
last data, Device Received
0 is stored.
memory data
Response

App - 43 App - 43
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(3) Functions
(a) Operation chart for the G(P).RDMSG instruction
Master station Specified station

Remote device station

Programmable controller CPU Master module

Command
G(P).RDMSG

1) 2)
Send data Request

3)
Device memory
5) 4)
Received data Response

1) The send data (S2) in the size specified in (S1)+2 are stored into the
master module.
2) The send data are sent to the station specified in (S1)+1.
3) Processing for the send data is executed at the station specified in
(S1)+1.
4) A processing result is received from the station specified in (S1)+1.
5) The received data are stored in the area from the device specified in
(D1), and the device specified in (D2) is set to ON.

(c) The G(P).RDMSG instruction can be simultaneously executed to multiple

remote device stations (up to four stations).
To the same remote device station, however, simultaneous execution of
multiple instructions including other dedicated instruction(s) (see Appendix 2)
is not allowed.
Design the program so that the next dedicated instruction will be executed
after Completion device (D2) is turned ON.

App - 44 App - 44
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

(d) There are two types of interlock signals for the G(P).RDMSG instruction: the
completion device (D2) and status display device at completion (D2) + 1.
1) Completion device
Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the G(P).RDMSG
instruction is completed, and turns OFF in the next END processing.
2) Status display device at completion
Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the
G(P).RDMSG instruction.
Normal completion: Stays OFF and does not change.
Abnormal completion: Turns ON in the END processing of the scan
where the G(P).RDMSG instruction is completed,
and turns OFF in the next END processing.

END processing END processing END processing END processing

Sequence program
Execution completion of
ON the G(P).RDMSG instruction
OFF
G(P).RDMSG instruction
ON
OFF
Completion device ON Abnormal
completion

Status display device OFF Normal completion

at completion 1 scan

(e) The basic number of steps of the G(P).RDMSG instruction is 10 steps.

(4) Operation error

In the following cases, an operation error occurs; the error flag (SM0) turns ON
and the error code is stored in SD0.
Error code Description of operation error
When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module.
2112
When the module specified by Un is not a special function module.
4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction.
4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect.
4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used.
4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used.
When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range.
4101 Or, when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction
exceeds the allowable range.

(5) Program examples

For program examples, refer to the manual for the remote device station that
supports the message transmission function.

App - 45 App - 45
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 3 Differences Between the New and Previous Models

The following lists the differences between the QJ61BT11N and older models:

QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 A (1S) J61BT11 A (1S) J61QBT11

Startup using the Startup using the
parameters of the parameters of the Startup using Yn6, Yn8 Startup using Yn6, Yn8,
Startup procedure master station CPU master station CPU and dedicated and master station CPU
(Yn6 and Yn8 cannot (Yn6 and Yn8 cannot instructions parameters
be used) be used)
Remote device station
initialization procedure Yes Yes No No
registration function
Module reset function
using the sequence No No Yes Yes
program
Access to other
stations via the CC- Yes Yes No No
Link
Parameter settings
using FROM/TO Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
instruction
Parameter settings
using dedicated Supported Supported Supported Not supported
instruction
Parameter settings
Supported Supported Not supported Supported
using GX Developer
Standby master The master station that The master station that The master station that The master station that
function is down can recover is down can recover is down cannot recover is down cannot recover
Event issuance for the
Supported Supported Not supported Not supported
interrupt program
Parameter verification
No No Yes Yes
test
2
E PROM No (CPU parameters) No (CPU parameters) Yes Yes
Expanded cyclic
Yes No No No
setting
Slave station
refresh/compulsory
clear setting in case of Yes No No No
programmable
controller CPU STOP

App - 46 App - 46
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11N

(1) The following dedicated instructions for AJ61QBT11 cannot be used in

QJ61BT11N.
Instruction Description
CCL, CCLEND Performs mail box registration for intelligent device and remote device
instructions.
SPCCLR Performs interrupt command to intelligent device instruction.
SPCBUSY Reads remote station status.
SEND Sends data (message) to designated transmission destination station
(QnACPU).
RECV Reads data (message) that has been sent by SEND instruction.
READ, SREAD Designated station QnACPU word device data read by local station.
WRITE, SWRITE Data from local station written to designated station QnACPU word device
data.
REQ Sends and executes transient (such as remote RUN/STOP) requests to
other stations.

(2) The conditions setting switches for AJ61QBT11 shown below cannot be used on
QJ61BT11N.
Use the GX Developer and set the CC-Link network parameters.
Number Setting Description
SW1 Station type
SW4 Input status of data link error station
SW5 Number of occupied stations

Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QJ61BT11N

(1) When the remote net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used, use the remote net ver. 1
mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing.
(2) When the remote I/O net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used, use the remote I/O net
mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing.
(3) When the remote net ver. 2 mode/remote net additional mode is set to the master
station of the QJ61BT11, an error (error code: B399H, B983H, B984H) occurs.
Error code Detectability
Error details Cause of error occurrence (details) Corrective action
(hexadecimal) Master station Local station
The number of connected modules
Set a value within the range
parameter was set to a value other
Number of connected from "1 to 64".
than "1 to 64".
B399 modules setting error
The remote net ver. 2 mode/remote
(parameter) Set to the remote net ver. 1
net additional mode has been set to
mode/remote I/O net mode.
the master station of the QJ61BT11.
The remote net ver. 2 mode/remote
Set to the remote net ver. 1
B983 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to
mode/remote I/O net mode.
the master station of the QJ61BT11.
The remote net ver. 2 mode/remote
Set to the remote net ver. 1
B984 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to
mode/remote I/O net mode.
the master station of the QJ61BT11.

(4) When the remote net ver. 2 mode/remote net additional mode is set to the local
station of the QJ61BT11, the local station operates in the remote net ver. 1 mode.

App - 47 App - 47
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 6 CPU-dependent Function Availability

The following table indicates whether the functions are available or not depending on
the CPU.

QJ72LP25-25/
QCPU (Q mode)
QJ72LP25G/
Functions (except Basic model Basic model QCPU
QJ72LP25GE/
QCPU)
QJ72BR15
Communication with remote I/O station
Communication with remote device station
Communication with local station
Communication with intelligent device station
Basic functions
Network parameter
Parameter setting with
Automatic refresh
GX Developer
parameter
Parameter setting with dedicated instruction
Slave station cut-off function
Automatic return function
Data link status setting when the master
station programmable controller CPU has an
error
Functions for improving Setting the status of input data from a data link
system reliability faulty station
Slave station refresh/compulsory clear setting
in case of programmable controller CPU
STOP
Standby master function
2
Block guarantee of cyclic data per station
Remote device station initialization procedure
registration function
1
Event issuance for the interrupt program
Automatic CC-Link startup
Remote net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Reserved station function
Handy functions
Error invalid station setting function
Scan synchronous Synchronous mode
function Asynchronous mode
Temporary error invalid station setting function
Data link stop/restart
Station number overlap checking function
3 3
Multiple CPU system support
Functions for transient
Transient transmission
transmission
: Available : Unavailable
*1: Supported by Basic model QCPU, starting with function Ver. B.
*2: Supported by the High Performance model QCPU, and Process CPU, whose first five digits of serial No. is 08032 or later.
*3: The Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU cannot be used in any multiple CPU system configuration.

App - 48 App - 48
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 7 Functional upgrade of the QJ61BT11N

Whether the QJ61BT11N supports the upgraded function or not can be confirmed with
the first 5 digits of serial No. as shown below.

Function First five digits of serial No.

Data link start by standby master station 07112 or later
Block guarantee of cyclic data per station 08032 or later
Specification of remote device station to be initialized 08032 or later
Dedicated instruction retry count setting 08102 or later
Transmission speed test 10032 or later
Message transmission function (G(P).RDMSG
10032 or later
instruction)
Display of module’s error history 11042 or later

App - 49 App - 49
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 8 Parameter Setting Checklist

This checklist may be used to set the parameters required to configure a CC-Link
system.
Please make a copy of this checklist and use it as needed.
For more details, see Sections 6.3 to 6.6.

Appendix 8.1 Parameter setting checklist

Parameter setting checklist

Item Setting range Setting value
Start I/O No. 0000 to 0FE0 0000
Data link disorder Input data hold/clear
Hold/clear
station setting Default: Clear
Case of CPU Refresh/clears compulsorily
Refresh/Clears compulsorily
STOP setting Default: Refresh
Block guarantee
Operational of cyclic data per Disable/Enable Disable/Enable
settings Default: Disable
station
Number of Occupies 1 to 4 stations
occupied stations Default: Occupies 1 station
Expanded cyclicSingle/double/quadruple/octuple
setting Default: single
Master station
Master station
Master station (Duplex function)
Master station (Duplex function)
Type Local station
Local station
Standby master station
Standby master station
Default: Master station
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Ver.2 mode)
Remote net (Additional mode)
Mode Remote net (Additional mode)
Remote I/O net mode
Remote I/O net mode
Off line
Off line
Default: Remote net (Ver.1 mode)
1 to 64
All connect count modules
Default: 64
Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote input (RX) Device name: Select from X, M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote output (RY) Device name: Select from Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWr) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R or ZR
Ver.2 Remote register (RWw) Device name: Select from M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R or ZR
Special relay (SB) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SB or ZR
Special register (SW) Device name: Select from M, L, B, D, W, R, SW or ZR
1 to 7
Retry count times
Default: 3
Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10
modules
count Default: 1
Blank, 1 to 64 (Blank: No standby master station specified)
Standby master station No.
Default: Blank
Stop/continue
PLC down select Stop/continue
Default: Stop
Asynchronous/synchronous
Scan mode setting Asynchronous/synchronous
Default: Asynchronous
Delay information setting Set 0.

App - 50 App - 50
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Appendix 8.2 Station information setting checklist

Station information setting checklist

Expanded Number of Remote Intelligent buffer select (Word)
Station Reserve/invalid
Station type cyclic occupied station
No. station select Send Receive Automatic
setting stations points
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

App - 51 App - 51
APPENDIXES
MELSEC-Q

Expanded Number of Remote Intelligent buffer select (Word)

Station Reserve/invalid
Station type cyclic occupied station
No. station select Send Receive Automatic
setting stations points
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

App - 52 App - 52
INDEX

Ind
[A] Data link restart acceptance..........................8-28
Appendixes..................................................App-1 Data link restart complete..............................8-28
Applicable modules ......................................... 2-4 Data link restart result....................................8-33
Applicable system ........................................... 2-4 Data link stop .................................................8-27
Automatic CC-Link startup ...................1-11, 4-71 Data link stop acceptance .............................8-28
Automatic return function ....................... 1-6, 4-28 Data link stop complete .................................8-28
Automatic update buffer................................ 8-22 Data link stop result .......................................8-33
Data link stop/restart............................ 1-13, 4-81
[B] Data link status setting when the master
Block guarantee of cyclic data per station ... 4-50 station programmable controller CPU has an error
Buffer memory list ........................................... 8-6 ................................................................ 1-7, 4-29
Dedicated instruction .....................................4-94
[C] Dedicated instruction list............................. App-2
CC-Link dedicated cable................................. 3-3 Delay timer information..................................8-35
CC-Link diagnostics .................................... 13-26 Detailed LED display status...........................8-34
CC-Link ver. installation/parameter matching Details of the I/O signals..................................8-4
status ............................................................. 8-41 Differences between the new and
CC-Link version............................................. 2-14 previous models........................................ App-46
Communication between the master
station and intelligent device stations ........... 12-1 [E]
Communication between the master station EMC directive................................................ A-15
and local stations........................................... 11-1 Error invalid station setting function .... 1-12, 4-75
Communication between the master Error invalid station specified status.... 8-30, 8-36
station and remote device stations ............... 10-1 Event issuance for the interrupt
Communication between the master program ................................................ 1-11, 4-68
station and remote I/O stations....................... 9-1 Example of parameter settings with
Communication buffer ................................... 8-21 GX Developer (Remote I/O net mode) .........6-49
Communication with the remote I/O stations . 4-4 Example of parameter settings with
Communication with the local stations ......... 4-11 GX Developer (Remote net additional
Communication with the remote mode) .............................................................6-33
device stations................................................. 4-6 Example of parameter settings with
Compatible CC-Link ver. information ........... 8-41 GX Developer (Remote net ver.1 mode) ........6-6
Compatibility with CC-Link .............................. 1-2 Example of parameter settings with
Completion status of remote device station GX Developer (Remote net ver.2 mode) ......6-19
initialization procedure .................................. 8-29 Example of parameter setting with
Connecting the modules ................................. 7-9 dedicated instruction......................................6-54
Connection cable............................................. 3-1 Execution status of remote device station
CPU monitoring time setting ......................... 8-32 initialization procedure ...................................8-29
Current link scan time ................................... 8-35 External dimensions ................................... App-1
Cyclic points increase ..........................1-14, 4-86
Cyclic transmission........................................A-16 [F]
Faulty stations are generated depending
[D] on transmission speed...................................13-7
Data link processing time................................ 5-1 Faulty stations cannot be detected ...............13-7
Data link restart ............................................. 8-27 Forced master switching................................8-28

Index - 1 Index - 1
 Forced master switching instruction result ... 8-34
Forced master switching request Link special relays (SB) ....................... 8-20, 8-27
acknowledgement ......................................... 8-29 Link special registers (SW).................. 8-21, 8-32
Ind Forced master switching request complete.. 8-29 Local module................................................. A-16
Local station ........................................... A-16, 1-1
[H] Local station automatic refresh
H/W information........................................... 13-30 parameter settings ......................6-17, 6-31, 6-46
Handling precautions ...................................... 7-3 Local station communication ...........................1-4
Hardware test .................................................. 7-7 Local station network parameter
Host line status .............................................. 8-31 settings ........................................6-14, 6-27, 6-42
Host mater/standby master operation Loading status................................................8-35
status ............................................................. 8-31 Loading/parameter consistency status .........8-38
Host mode ..................................................... 8-29 Loop test.......................................................13-29
Host monitoring ........................................... 13-26
Host station number ...................................... 8-34 [M]
Host parameter status................................... 8-35 Master module .............................................. A-16
Host standby master station setting status .. 8-29 Master station......................................... A-16, 1-1
Host station operation status ........................ 8-30 Master station automatic refresh parameter
Host station switch change detection ........... 8-30 settings ........................................6-12, 6-25, 6-39
Host type........................................................ 8-29 Master station information .............................8-30
How to check the function version................ 2-12 Master station network parameter
settings ..........................................6-6, 6-19, 6-33
[I] Master station return specification
I/O signal list .................................................... 8-2 information .....................................................8-30
Initial setting of the remote device Master switching request
station ..................................... 10-7, 10-25, 10-45 acknowledgement..........................................8-29
Input data status of host data link faulty Master switching request complete...............8-29
station ............................................................ 8-29 Master station transient transmission
Installation........................................................ 7-3 status ..............................................................8-31
Installation environment .................................. 7-4 Master module .............................................. A-16
Intelligent device module ..............................A-16 Max. communication station number ............8-35
Intelligent device station.........................A-16, 1-1 Max. link scan time ........................................8-35
Intelligent device station communication........ 1-5 Maximum number of link points ......................3-1
Intelligent function module ............................A-17 Maximum overall cable distance ...... 3-1, 3-3, 3-5
Internal current consumption .......................... 3-1 Maximum transmission distance .....................3-1
Message transmission function
[L] ......................................... App-2, App-41, App-49
LED indicators ................................................. 7-5 Min. link scan time .........................................8-35
Line status ..................................................... 8-37 Mode selection method .................................8-43
Line test ..............................................7-15, 13-29 Mode setting status........................................8-34
Line test result ............................................... 8-39 Error history of the module ..........................13-13
Line test 1 result ............................................ 8-39 Module fixing screw ........................................7- 3
Line test acceptance status .......................... 8-28 Module operating status ................................8-35
Line test complete status .............................. 8-29 Module status....................................... 8-28, 8-33
Line test request............................................ 8-27 Monitoring time setting ..................................8-32
Line test result ............................................... 8-33 Mountable base unit ........................................2-4
Line test station setting ................................. 8-32 Mountable modules .........................................2-4
Link refresh time............................................ 5-22 Multiple CPU system support ................ 2-8, 4-83
Link scan time.................................................. 5-1 Multiple temporary error invalid station

Index - 2 Index - 2
 specification................................................... 8-32
[R]
[N] Random access buffer...................................8-21
No. of automatic return stations.................... 8-35 Refresh instruction acknowledgement
No. of retries information............................... 8-35 status at standby master switching ...............8-28
Notes on the system configuration ................. 2-9 Refresh instruction at standby master
Number of host occupied stations ............... 8-30 switching.........................................................8-27
Number of connected modules..................... 8-35 Refresh instruction at standby master
Number of mountable modules ...................... 2-4 switching result...............................................8-33
Number of I/O occupied points ....................... 3-1 Refresh instruction complete status at
Number of link points per station .................... 3-1 standby master switching ..............................8-28
Number of occupied station ............................ 3-1 Refresh instruction when changing parameters
by the dedicated instruction...........................8-27
[O] Remote device station ........................... A-16, 1-1
Offline test status........................................... 8-29 Remote device station communication ...........1-3
Operation specification when Remote device station initialization
CPU is down status....................................... 8-30 procedure registration function............ 1-11, 4-57
Other station data link status ...............8-31, 8-36 Remote device station initialization
Other station fuse blown status ..........8-31, 8-37 procedure registration instruction ..................8-28
Other station monitoring.............................. 13-27 Remote device station initialization
Other station switch change status......8-31, 8-37 procedure registration instruction result........8-34
Other station watchdog timer error Remote I/O net mode ................................... A-16
occurrence status .......................................... 8-37 Remote I/O station................................. A-16, 1-1
Other station watchdog timer error status .... 8-31 Remote I/O station communication.................1-2
Remote I/O station points setting ........ 1-14, 4-84
[P] Remote input (RX) .........................................8-11
Parameter information................................... 8-35 Remote module............................................. A-16
Parameter information read Remote net mode ................................A-16, 4-73
acknowledgement status .............................. 8-29 Remote net additional mode ........A-16, 2-2, 4-88
Parameter information read completion Remote net ver. 1 mode ........................ A-16, 2-1
status ............................................................. 8-29 Remote net ver. 2 mode ...............A-16, 2-2, 4-87
Parameter information read request............. 8-27 Remote output (RY).......................................8-11
Parameter memory ......................................... 6-1 Remote register (RWr) ..................................8-15
Parameter receive status .............................. 8-30 Remote register (RWw) .................................8-15
Parameter setting checklist.......................App-50 Remote station.............................................. A-16
Parameter setting items .................................. 6-3 Reserved station function ..............................4-74
Parameter setting status ............................... 8-30 Reserved station specified status ....... 8-30, 8-36
Parameter setting test result ......................... 8-33 RDMSG ..................................................... App-41
Parameter setting with dedicated RIRCV ....................................................... App-14
instruction ............................................... 1-6, 4-24 RIRD............................................................ App-4
Parameter settings .......................................... 6-1 RIFR .......................................................... App-24
Part names and settings ................................. 7-4 RISEND..................................................... App-19
Performance specification............................... 3-1 RITO.......................................................... App-27
Precautions on programming.......................... 8-1 RIWT ........................................................... App-9
Procedure before starting the data link .......... 7-1 RLPASET.................................................. App-30
Processing time for dedicated instructions... 5-15 RWr ............................................................... A-17
Programming................................................... 8-1 RWw.............................................................. A-17
RX.................................................................. A-17
RY.................................................................. A-17

Index - 3 Index - 3
[S] Temporary error invalid station
SB ..................................................................A-17 specification ...................................................8-32
Scan mode setting information ..................... 8-30 Temporary error invalid station
Scan synchronous function..................1-13, 4-76 specification cancel result..............................8-33
Selecting a mode according to the system .. 1-11 Temporary error invalid station
Setting checklist ........................................App-50 specification result .........................................8-33
Setting status of block guarantee of cyclic data Temporary error invalid status.......................8-36
per station ...................................................... 8-30 Terminal block..................................................7-6
Setting the status of input data from a data link Terminal block screws ....................................7- 3
faulty station ........................................... 1-7, 4-30 Terminal block mounting screws....................7- 3
Slave station cut-off function.................. 1-6, 4-27 Terminal resistor ........................................... A-18
Slave station offset, size information ............ 8-18 The remote device station is not operating
Slave station refresh/compulsory clear normally..........................................................13-7
setting in case of programmable controller CPU The remote station/local station/intelligent
STOP ....................................................1-14, 4-31 device station/standby master station does
Special function module................................A-17 not start up .....................................................13-7
Standby master function ........................ 1-7, 4-33 Tightening torque range ..................................7-3
Standby master station .................................A-16 Total number of stations ................................8-35
Standby master station information .............. 8-30 Transient transmission............... A-16, 1-13, 4-94
Standby master station number.................... 8-36 Transient transmission status.............. 8-31, 8-38
Station information setting checklist .........App-51 Transmission delay time..................................5-4
Station number overlap checking Transmission speed.........................................3-1
function ..................................................1-13,4-82 Transmission speed/mode setting switch .......7-6
Station number overlap status ...................... 8-38 Transmission speed and mode settings .......7-14
Station number setting .................................. 7-13 Transmission speed setting...........................8-34
Station number setting switches ..................... 7-5 Transmission speed test..................7-19, App-49
Station status at error occurrence................. 5-28 Transmission speed test accept status.........8-31
SW .................................................................A-17 Transmission speed test completion status..8-31
Switch setting ................................................ 7-13 Transmission speed test request ..................8-28
Switch setting status ............................8-30, 8-35 Transmission speed test result......................8-41
System configuration....................................... 2-1 Transmission speed test result for each
System down prevention................................. 1-6 station.............................................................8-41
Transmission speed test result for standby
[T] master station ................................................8-31
T-Branch connection ..................................... 7-11
Temporary error invalid acceptance status .. 8-28 [V]
Temporary error invalid canceling Ver. 1 compatible slave station .................... A-17
acknowledgement status .............................. 8-28 Ver. 2 compatible slave station .................... A-17
Temporary error invalid canceling Ver.2 compatible remote input ......................8-23
complete status ............................................. 8-28 Ver.2 compatible remote output ....................8-23
Temporary error invalid canceling request... 8-27 Ver.2 compatible remote register (RWr) .......8-25
Temporary error invalid complete status ...... 8-28 Ver.2 compatible remote register (RWw)......8-25
Temporary error invalid request.................... 8-27
Temporary error invalid station setting [W]
function .................................................1-13, 4-80 Weight ..............................................................3-1
Temporary error invalid station setting When a dedicated instruction is executed,
information..................................................... 8-30 the abnormal completion bit turns on............13-7
Wiring check...................................................7-10

Index - 4 Index - 4
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product
within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service
Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at
the customer’s discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-
site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and
the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair
parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels
on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused
by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions
or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary
by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA
Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause
found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi
products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for accidents, and
compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not
lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device, and that
backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries,
etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants
operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required,
such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable controller
applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical
applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and
safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi
representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the
special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States.
Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective
companies.

SH (NA)-080394E-K
 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA Kazpromautomatics Ltd. KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Straße 89 99, Paola Hill Mustafina Str. 7/2
Gothaer Straße 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta- Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-470046 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. CZECH REPUBLIC Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Avenir Business Park, Radlická 714/113a Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Phone: +31 (0)180 – 46 60 04 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Fax: +31 (0)180 – 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex TEXEL ELECTRONICS Ltd. ISRAEL
Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS 2 Ha´umanut, P.O.B. 6272
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 IL-42160 Netanya
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON
INEA BH d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
IRL-Dublin 24 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Lebanon - Beirut
BA-71000 Sarajevo NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
Italian Branch AKHNATON BULGARIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
Viale Colleoni 7 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21 Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) BG-1756 Sofia RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6004 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 CBI Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND INEA CR d.o.o. CROATIA Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o. SERBIA Private Bag 2016
Poland Branch Losinjska 4 a Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86 ZA-1600 Isando
Krakowska 50 HR-10000 Zagreb SER-18106 Nis Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770
PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA SR d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Technologická 374/6 Izletnicka 10
Spanish Branch CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec SER-113000 Smederevo
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579 B:ELECTRIC, s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC AutoCont Control s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Mladoboleslavská 812 Radlinského 47
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK CZ-197 00 Praha 19 - Kbely SK-02601 Dolny Kubin
UK Branch Phone: +420 286 850 848, +420 724 317 975 Phone: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
Travellers Lane Fax: +420 286 850 850 Fax: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK CS MTrade Slovensko, s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Lykkegårdsvej 17, 1. Vajanskeho 58
DK-4000 Roskilde SK-92101 Piestany
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +421 (0)33 / 7742 760
Office Tower “Z” 14 F Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +421 (0)33 / 7735 144
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA INEA d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 Pärnu mnt.160i Stegne 11
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 EE-11317 Tallinn SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Jaakonkatu 2 Box 426
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 FIN-01620 Vantaa SE-20124 Malmö
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 02
UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND
5, Mavrogenous Str. Im Schörli 5
GR-18542 Piraeus CH-8600 Dübendorf
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28
MELTRADE Ltd. HUNGARY GTS TURKEY
Fertő utca 14. Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
HU-1107 Budapest TR-34775 Yukarı Dudullu-Ümraniye-İSTANBUL
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
Vestienas iela 2 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
LV-1035 Riga UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA
Savanoriu Pr. 187
LT-02300 Vilnius
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980

MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com